JP7526003B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

There is known a gaming machine that can display an amount display indicating the amount of gaming value granted when the player is in an advantageous state, and a notification display notifying the player that the amount of gaming value granted has reached a predetermined amount (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-17403 A

The gaming machine uses specific character displays in which specific areas surrounded by lines forming characters are formed for various displays such as the amount of prize awarded and the notification display. The gaming machine also displays specific displays corresponding to various states such as advantageous states. There is room for improvement in the relationship between such specific character displays and the specific displays .

The present invention has been made in consideration of the above-mentioned circumstances, and has an object to provide a gaming machine that can display a display including a specific character display in a suitable manner in relation to a specific display .

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a variable winning means capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium can easily win a prize and a second state in which the game medium cannot or cannot hardly win a prize;
and a control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed to the first state,
The display means is
A background display corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed;
A display of an amount of the game value to be awarded can be displayed on the front side of the background display,
a first notification display that is displayed when the amount of the game value awarded reaches a first predetermined amount, and a second notification display that is displayed when the amount of the game value awarded reaches a second predetermined amount, on the front side of the background display;
The notification display is a display that ends after a specific period of time has elapsed since the display was started,
The character display included in the notification display is larger in display size than the character display included in the provided amount display,
The character display included in the provision amount display and the notification display includes a specific character display in which a specific area is formed surrounded by lines forming the character display,
The display position of the specific character display included in the indication of the amount of the imparted item is not changed during display,
The display position of the specific character display included in the notification display is changed during display,
the background display is not visible from the specific region of the specific character display included in the imparting amount display,
When a display position of a specific character display included in the notification display is changed, the background display is visible from the specific area of the specific character display,
The display means is
When the round of play is being played, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the variable winning means changed from the second state to the first state;
If the gaming medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded can be displayed at the start of the display of the awarded amount,
When the game medium wins the variable prize winning means within the predetermined period, a special display different from the predetermined display can be displayed at the start of the display of the amount of the award;
not displaying a round game display capable of identifying the started round game until the predetermined period has elapsed, and starting to display the round game display together with the start of the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed;
The notification display is displayed while the indication of the amount of the toner to be dispensed is displayed.
According to this configuration, the display including the specific character display can be appropriately displayed in relation to the background display.
In order to achieve the above object, the other gaming machine is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed by executing a variable display of first identification information and a variable display of second identification information, and is equipped with a display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area which is an area around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 which is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 is equipped with the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, etc.). and a background image corresponding to a jackpot gaming state can be displayed in the display area 20SH52, and an awarded amount display relating to the awarded amount of gaming value can be displayed in front of the background image in the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 can display an acquired number display 20SHK relating to the number of prize balls awarded in the front of the background image in the second display area 20SH52, and the like), and at least in the first display area, in front of the background image, a first notification display for notifying that the awarded amount of gaming value has reached a first predetermined amount and a second notification display for notifying that the awarded amount of gaming value has reached a second predetermined amount can be displayed as notification displays for notifying that the awarded amount of gaming value has reached a first predetermined amount (for example, the image display device 5 can display, in front of the background image at least in the first display area 20SH51, a message indicating the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot gaming state that As the winning number notification display 20SHKH for notifying that the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached "1000", when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", the winning number notification display "over 1000" can be displayed, and when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "2000", the winning number notification display "over 2000" can be displayed), the awarded amount display is updated every time a gaming value is awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the awarded number display 20SHK is updated every time a gaming ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state), the notification display is terminated when a specific period has elapsed since the start of the display (for example, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is terminated when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the display), and the characters used in the notification display are characters of a size larger than the characters used in the awarded amount display. (e.g., the characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger in size than the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK, etc.), the characters used in the award amount display and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area is formed surrounded by lines forming the characters (e.g., the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area is formed surrounded by lines forming the characters, etc.), the specific characters used in the award amount display are such that the background image is not visible from the specific area (e.g., the specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK are such that the background image is not visible from the specific area, etc.), and the specific characters used in the notification display are such that the background image is visible from the specific area (e.g., the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are such that the background image is visible from the specific area, etc.).
The notification display can be displayed in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 can display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, etc.),
Furthermore, the game machine is provided with a state control means capable of controlling to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-19), and an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of the variable display (e.g., a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-13), and the state control means updates the numerical information updated by the update means in response to the special number of times. The numerical information can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is met by the numerical information becoming a specific value corresponding to the specified value (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75, and as shown in FIG. 12-17, a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173), and the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS71).

This configuration allows the display including the specific characters to be displayed optimally in relation to the background image. Furthermore, it also allows the player to be rescued optimally. Specifically, even if the game state changes and a variable display of any identification information is executed, the numerical information continues to be updated, making it easier for the player to be rescued and increasing their motivation to play.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the invention relating to the following means A. Conventionally, gaming machines that can be controlled to a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, as shown in JP 2005-95449 A, have been known. For example, Patent Document 1 describes that when the number of special game games (number of executions of variable display) executed in a normal gaming state reaches 1000 times (special number of times) but no jackpot (advantageous state) occurs (special condition is established), the gaming state is controlled to a high probability state, the probability that a jackpot is determined to be the result of the special game is increased to about 1/100, and a jackpot is more likely to occur in the subsequent special game. Patent Document 1 also describes that when the number of special game games (number of executions of variable display) reaches 1000 times in a normal gaming state but no jackpot occurs, a time-saving state may be generated instead of the high probability state.

However, in conventional gaming machines, there was insufficient consideration given to the interest generated when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a special number, or in the period before and after that.

Therefore, the purpose of this invention is to provide an entertaining gaming machine.

(Means A) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the execution of variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, comprising state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-19), and The state control means is capable of controlling the state to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a part executing steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 14-17, a part executing steps 100IWS75 and 100IWS76 in the game control microcomputer 100). the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a portion executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100); a predetermined suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined suggestion performance (for example, a notice performance) when the variable display is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-49, a portion executing step 108IWS811 in the performance control CPU 120); and a control means for notifying the user that control of a special state is started based on the establishment of a special condition. The display device further includes a special notification effect execution means capable of executing a special notification effect (for example, changing the background image as shown in Figures 14-52 (C1) and (C2), blacking out when the fluctuation begins as shown in Figure 14-53 (B), or blacking out when the fluctuation ends as shown in Figure 14-54 (C)) to notify the user of a certain condition (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS638 as shown in Figure 14-23), and the predetermined suggestion effect execution means has a common ratio of executing predetermined suggestion effects in the period before the special condition is established (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A as shown in Figure 14-44. See Figure 14-50).
According to such a configuration, the special notification effect is suddenly executed, which gives the player a sense of surprise and increases his/her interest.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of lighting of a game effect lamp. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of processing before a jackpot is released. A flowchart showing an example of processing during a jackpot opening. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processes. This is a timing chart showing the timing of the opening of the large prize opening and the timing of various displays. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of a state in which a game ball is caught in a special variable winning ball device. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. This is a timing chart showing the timing of the opening of the large prize opening and the timing of various displays. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processes. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. A figure showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device, the open/closed state of the large prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an effect display. A figure showing background art related to a first form of the characteristic portion 20SH. A figure showing an example of the display form of Arabic numerals used to display the number of acquisitions, etc. in the first form of the feature part 20SH. A figure showing how the acquisition number display appears in the first form of the feature part 20SH. A figure showing an example of the presentation operation of the acquisition number display and acquisition number notification display in the first form of the feature part 20SH. A figure showing an example of the display form of Arabic numerals used to display the acquisition number notification in the second form of the feature part 20SH. A figure showing a modified example 1 of the display mode of Arabic numerals used to display the number of acquisitions in the second form of the feature part 20SH. A figure showing a modified example 2 of the display mode of Arabic numerals used to display the number of acquisitions in the second form of the feature portion 20SH. A figure showing an example of the display form of Arabic numerals used to display the result in the third form of the feature portion 20SH. A figure showing an example of the presentation period of various presentations in a jackpot gaming state in the third form of the feature unit 20SH. A figure showing examples of the presentation operation of various presentations in a jackpot gaming state in the third form of the feature unit 20SH. A figure showing an example of a setting suggestion provided by an ending background image in the third form of feature section 20SH. A figure showing background art related to the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH. A figure showing an example of the display form of Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of times in the fourth form of characteristic portion 20SH. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a display form of Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of times in the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH. A figure showing how the remaining number of times display appears in the fourth form of characteristic part 20SH. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the relationship between the variable display and the change in the display mode of the remaining number notification display in the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH. FIG. A figure showing an example of the remaining number of times display and remaining number of times notification display presentation operation in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH. A figure showing an example of a presentation action when a winning occurs during a round in feature portion 19SH. A figure showing an example of the positional relationship between multiple display layers on which various displays are displayed in the characteristic portion 19SH. A figure showing an example of a presentation operation when an over-winning occurs in feature portion 19SH. A figure showing an example of the positional relationship between multiple display layers on which various displays are displayed in the characteristic portion 19SH. A figure showing an example of a setting suggestion by the over winning effect in feature section 19SH. This figure shows an example of a presentation operation when there is a round in which the specified number of winning balls are not won in characteristic section 19SH and a round in which an over-winning ball occurs. A figure showing another example of the presentation action when there is a round in which the specified number of winning balls are not won and a round in which an over-winning ball occurs in the characteristic portion 19SH. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. A front view of a pachinko game machine in characteristic portion 108IW. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the probability of a jackpot and the probability of losing the time-saving function for each setting value. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the probability of a jackpot and the probability of losing the time-saving function for each setting value. An explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a time-saving type determination table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining types of time saving. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table in feature section 108IW. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table in feature section 108IW. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command. 13 is a flowchart showing a game control main processing in characteristic section 108IW. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of special symbols. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of special symbols. 13 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing special pattern change processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stopping process. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stopping process. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing. FIG. 11 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transitions in characteristic portion 108IW. A flowchart showing a specific example of the main processing for performance control in characteristic unit 108IW. 13 is a flowchart showing a specific example of a command analysis process. 13 is a flowchart showing a specific example of a command analysis process. 13 is a flowchart showing a customer waiting demo performance control process. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of a caption display execution lottery table and a caption mode determination lottery table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a presentation mode of a caption displayed while waiting for customers. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a pre-reading notice setting process. An explanatory diagram showing specific examples of a pre-reading preview performance execution decision table, a pre-reading preview performance type decision table, and a pre-reading preview performance mode decision table. This is an explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of each type of preview performance. This is a time chart to explain the period of change in the time-saving state via a jackpot and the time-saving state via a rescue, and the period of execution of the pre-reading preview performance. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process. An explanatory diagram showing specific examples of a preview performance execution decision table and a preview performance mode decision table. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display performance process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display performance process. A flowchart showing the special chart winning waiting process. This is a timing chart to explain the timing of execution of the presentation when executing a variable display that results in a rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of the presentation pattern leading up to the transition to rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of the presentation pattern leading up to the transition to rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of the presentation pattern leading up to the transition to rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of the presentation pattern leading up to the transition to rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode of the time-saving entry appearance presentation. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining specific examples of the presentation aspects of false countdown presentations and effect presentations. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process in the first modified example. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stopping process in the modified example 1. 13 is a flowchart showing the next change postponement process in the first modified example. This is a timing chart to explain the timing of execution of the presentation when executing a variable display that results in a rescue time reduction in variant example 1. An explanatory diagram for explaining variants 2 to 4 of the method of selecting a fluctuation pattern during a time-saving state based on rescue time-saving. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process in Example 2. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process in the second embodiment. An explanatory diagram showing specific examples of a preview performance execution decision table and a preview performance mode decision table in Example 2. A timing chart for explaining the timing of execution of the presentation when executing a variable display that results in a rescue time reduction in Example 2. An explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode up to the transition to rescue time reduction in Example 2. An explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode up to the transition to rescue time reduction in variant example 1 of Example 2. An explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode up to the transition to rescue time reduction in variant example 2 of Example 2.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which also applies to the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the display of multiple types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described below). The variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the playboard 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also referred to as the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a number of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations are provided at the lower left of the game area and one location is provided above the variable winning ball device 6B), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., three balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 3), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory number, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the very bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. As shown in the figure, the frame lamps 9b include a lower left lamp 9bL1 in the lower left part, an upper left lamp 9bL2 in the upper left part, a lower right lamp 9bR1 in the lower right part, and an upper right lamp 9bR2 in the upper right part. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2. In addition, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR are provided in the speakers 8L and 8R parts corresponding to each other. A display device lower lamp 9f is provided below the image display device 5 on the gaming board 2, and the display device lower lamp 9f includes a left display device lower lamp 9fL and a right display device lower lamp 9fR as shown in the figure. In addition, lamps 9g near the general winning openings are provided near the three general winning openings 10 located at the lower left of the game area.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the presentation is provided. The movable body 32 is also provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d and the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR, the lamp below the display device 9f, and the lamp near the general winning opening 9g may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamps 9. The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR, the lamp below the display device 9f, and the lamp near the general winning opening 9g are each composed of an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. Below the upper tray, a ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 500A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4).

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a big win symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big win, as described below) is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "big win", and if a specific special symbol different from the big win symbol (a small win symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as a "small win". Also, if a special symbol different from the big win or small win symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a "losing" symbol, it is a "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29.5 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 10), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot game state, the player can get prize balls by making the game ball enter the large prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot game state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot game state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player. In the jackpot game state, a so-called right hit is performed, in which the game ball is shot into the right-side game area so that the game ball enters the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7.

A jackpot type is set for a "jackpot." For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small wins".

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area in a big prize hole) during the big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, the game state may be controlled to a probability variable state after the big win game state.
(Progression of the performance, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be performed using audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting or extinguishing of the game effect lamp 9, the operation of the movable body 32, or any other effect device that includes some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

During a big win game state, a big win performance is executed to notify the player of the big win game state. As a big win performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or a promotion performance to indicate that the value of the big win game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small win game state, a small win performance to notify the player of the small win game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small win game state and a big win game state for some big win types (a big win type of a big win game state in the same manner as a small win game state, for example, a big win type in which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot know whether he is currently in a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small win game state and after the end of the big win game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 3. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, power from an AC power source, such as an external power source such as a commercial power source, at 100V AC, can be supplied to electrical components including the main board 11 and various control boards such as the performance control board 12 via the power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 according to the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be able to be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Yes), recovery processing (step S4) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (step S5). The recovery processing in step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S3; No), an initialization process (step S6) is executed, and then a setting change process (step S7) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S3, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by operating the ball-hitting handle, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to stop displaying a losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state, and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, control may be performed to notify the user that a setting check or change is in progress. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute the timer interrupt process periodically.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 5. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error process, it performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, management of the execution and reservation of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 5. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a miss pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and setting the jackpot opening port to an open state, based on the display result being "jackpot", etc. When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set one of a number of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 7 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 7 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a probability variable state in which probability variable control is performed, the probability of determining that it will be controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when the game state is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time-saving state.

In the first special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the setting value. In the second special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same value different from that in the first special chart display result judgment table, regardless of the game state or the setting value. Note that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be different depending on the setting value. The probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be the same regardless of the variable special chart.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot" and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes depending on each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33094 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33421 is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33421 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The game characteristics may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the game characteristics are such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability of ... On the other hand, the game may be of a type in which the rate at which the game ball passes through a predetermined switch during a jackpot game varies depending on the variable special chart (so-called V-type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a jackpot is 1/320 and the probability of a small jackpot is 1/50, and the game may be of a type in which the game ball passes through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during a high base (during time-saving control) (so-called one-type two-type mixed type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game is the same, but a setting may be provided in which the probability of a jackpot or small jackpot is higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3, but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is smaller (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the game is changed depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the setting value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a presentation switch (a switch for executing a predetermined presentation each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch may be used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a special bonus state or a jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 8 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 9 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 8 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. Also, when a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". Once the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special drawing hit waiting process ends.

The small win presentation process of step S174 is a process executed when the presentation process flag value is "4". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process in step S175 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the presentation process flag value is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S176 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol showing "- " may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of a performance (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a percentage of "0%". For example, it also includes one being a percentage of "0%" and the other being a percentage of "100%" or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 042AK)
Next, the gaming machine in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 10-1 to 10-21. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment starts displaying the number of winning balls after a predetermined period in which the attacker is opened in the first round of play, and if the attacker is not won within the predetermined period, a predetermined display is made to indicate that the number of winning balls has not increased, and if the attacker is won within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is made. Below, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 042AK having such characteristics will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as those explained in the basic explanation above will be omitted.

Figure 10-1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, and shows an example of the lighting when all of the game effect lamps 9, such as the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f (left display device lower lamp 9fL, right display device lower lamp 9fR), and general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g, are lit. In the feature part 042AK of this embodiment, which will be described in detail later, the game effect lamps 9, such as the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display bottom lamp 9f (left display bottom lamp 9fL, right display bottom lamp 9fR), and general winning hole vicinity lamp 9g, are lit in sequence from the lower left to the lower right, suggesting to the player that he should hit to the right.

Figure 10-2 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of Figure 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process shown in Figure 10-2, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot flag is on or not (step 042AKS001). At this time, if the jackpot flag is on (step 042AKS001; Yes), a jackpot start presentation waiting time is set (step 042AKS002). For example, in the process of step 042AKS002, a timer initial value that is predetermined corresponding to the jackpot start presentation waiting time may be set in a game control process timer provided in RAM 102.

Following the processing of step 042AKS002, settings are made to send the winning start designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 (step 042AKS003). For example, in the processing of step 042AKS003, setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the winning start designation command table prepared in advance for sending the winning start designation command may be stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. After that, the big win flag is cleared to the off state (step 042AKS004). Also, settings are made to end the probability change state or the time-saving state (step 042AKS005). For example, in step 042AKS005, a process of clearing the probability change flag or the time-saving flag to the off state, a process of clearing the special chart change count counter for counting the number of times the special chart game is executed in the probability change state or the time-saving state, etc. may be executed. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", which corresponds to the pre-opening process of the large prize opening (step 042AKS006), and the special symbol stop process is terminated.

If the big win flag is off in step 042AKS001 (step 042AKS001; No), it is determined whether the small win flag is on or not (step 042AKS007). At this time, if the small win flag is on (step 042AKS007; No), the waiting time for the small win start presentation is set (step 042AKS008). For example, in the processing of step 042AKS008, a timer initial value that is predetermined corresponding to the waiting time for the small win start presentation may be set in the game control process timer.

Following the processing of step 042AKS008, similar to the processing of step 042AKS003, settings are made to send a win start designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 (step 042AKS009). After that, the small win flag is cleared to the off state (step 042AKS010). Then, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "8", which is the value corresponding to the small win opening pre-processing (step 042AKS011).

Also, if the small hit flag is off in step 042AKS007 (step 042AKS007; No), the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0", which is a value corresponding to the normal processing of the special pattern (step 042AKS012). After executing either the processing of step 042AKS011 or step 042AKS012, a judgment is made as to whether or not to end the special pattern state or the time-saving state (step 042AKS013). For example, in the processing of step 042AKS003, the value of the special pattern change count counter (special pattern change count value) is updated, for example, by subtracting or adding 1, and a judgment is made as to whether or not the updated special pattern change count value matches a predetermined special game state end judgment value. At this time, if it matches the special game state end judgment value, the special pattern state or the time-saving state may be ended and controlled to the normal state by clearing the special pattern state flag or the time-saving flag to the off state, etc. On the other hand, if it does not match the special game state end judgment value, the state of the special game state flag or time-saving flag is maintained, and the processing of step 042AKS013 is terminated. After such a judgment of the end of the special game state or time-saving state is executed, the special symbol stop processing is terminated. The end judgment based on the special symbol change count value may be performed only when the time-saving state is in effect, and the special game state may be continued until the next variable display result becomes a "jackpot." Alternatively, for example, numerical data indicating a random number value for judging the end of the special game state may be extracted from a random counter provided in RAM 102, and a judgment of whether or not to end the special game state may be made by referring to a table for deciding the end of the special game state previously stored in ROM 101 or the like.

Figure 10-3 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S114 of Figure 6 as a jackpot opening pre-processing. In the jackpot opening pre-processing shown in Figure 10-3, the CPU 103 first judges whether the jackpot start flag is on or not (step 042AKS021). Here, the jackpot start flag is set to the on state in response to the jackpot flag being on in the special symbol stop processing of step S113 shown in Figure 6. If the jackpot start flag is on in step 042AKS021 (step 042AKS021; Yes), it is judged whether the jackpot start performance is waiting (step 042AKS022). As an example, in the special symbol stop processing of step S113 shown in Figure 3, when the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", a timer initial value previously determined corresponding to the jackpot start performance waiting time is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the processing of step S312, if the game control process timer value does not match a predetermined waiting time elapsed judgment value (such as "0"), it is determined that the jackpot start presentation is currently waiting, and if it does match, it is determined that the jackpot start presentation is not currently waiting.

If the jackpot start time performance is on standby in step 042AKS022 (step 042AKS022; Yes), the game control process timer value is updated, for example by subtracting 1 (step 042AKS023), and the jackpot opening pre-processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the jackpot start time performance is not on standby in step 042AKS022 (step 042AKS022; No), the jackpot start time flag is cleared (step 042AKS024), the large prize opening count counter is cleared (step 042AKS025), the jackpot type buffer value stored in RAM 102 is read (step 042AKS026), and the opening control pattern corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value is set. In the feature section 042AK of this embodiment, a common opening control pattern is set regardless of the type of jackpot, but for example, if there is a "sudden" jackpot type, it may be set to a different opening control pattern than the "probable" or "non-probable" jackpot types. Also, even if the jackpot type is "probable" or "non-probable", it may be set to a different opening control pattern depending on the jackpot type, for example, different opening control patterns may be set for the "probable" and "non-probable" jackpot types.

After executing the process of step 042AKS026, it is determined whether or not the game is waiting to open the big prize opening in the next round (waiting for the next opening) (step 042AKS027). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS027, it is determined whether or not the game control process timer value matches the next opening wait end judgment value, and if they do not match, it is determined that the game is waiting for the next opening, while if they match, it is determined that the game is not waiting for the next opening. If the game is waiting for the next opening in step 042AKS027 (step 042AKS027; Yes), proceed to step 042AKS023 to update the game control process timer value. Note that the game control process timer value updated in step 042AKS023 is the time set as the waiting time at the start of the big prize in step 042AKS002 shown in FIG. 10-2, or the time set as the interval time between each round in the post-big prize opening process in step S116 in FIG. 6.

If it is determined in step 042AKS027 that the machine is not waiting for the next opening (step 042AKS027; No), the machine performs settings to open the large prize opening in accordance with the set opening control pattern and the count value in the large prize opening number counter (step 042AKS028). As an example, in the processing of step 042AKS028, a timer initial value determined in advance in accordance with the large prize opening opening time is set in the game control process timer, and the large prize opening opening time, which is the upper limit of the time for which the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is in an open state, is set. In addition, the solenoid drive signal for a specified large prize opening door solenoid is started to be output via a specified solenoid circuit, and the large prize opening door solenoid is set to the ON state to open the large prize opening.

At this time, for example, regardless of whether the count value of the special prize opening counter is between "1" and "15," the timer initial value corresponding to a special prize opening opening time of 29.5 seconds is set in the game control process timer.

Then, the CPU 103 performs settings to send a command to specify that the large prize opening is in progress to the performance control board 12 (step 042AKS029). After executing the processing of step 042AKS029, the large prize opening count value is updated by adding 1 (step 042AKS030), and the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", which corresponds to the processing during the large prize opening (step 042AKS031), and the processing before the large prize opening is terminated.

Figure 10-4 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S115 of Figure 6 as the jackpot opening processing. In the jackpot opening processing shown in Figure 10-4, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a game ball has entered the jackpot opening (step 042AKS041), for example, by determining whether the count switch 23 has been turned on. If no game ball has entered the jackpot opening in step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; No), the process proceeds to step 042AKS044.

On the other hand, if a game ball enters the big prize opening in step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; Yes), the CPU 103 updates the winning ball count value by adding 1, and sets the main board 11 to send a winning designation command indicating that the game ball has entered the big prize opening to the performance control board 12 (step 042AKS042). The CPU 103 then determines whether the updated winning ball count value has reached a predetermined number (e.g., 10 balls) (step 042AKS043). If the winning number count value has not reached the predetermined number (step 042AKS043; No), the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 (step 042AKS044), and then it is determined whether 29.5 seconds have passed since the large prize opening was opened (step 042AKS045), for example, depending on whether the game control process timer value matches the timer value corresponding to 29.5 seconds. At this time, if 29.5 seconds have not passed (step 042AKS045; No), the large prize opening process is terminated.

If it is determined in step 042AKS043 that the updated winning number count value has reached a predetermined number (step 042AKS043; Yes), or if it is determined in step 042AKS045 that 29.5 seconds have passed since the large prize opening was opened (step 042AKS043; Yes), the solenoid for the large prize opening door to close the large prize opening is set to an off state (step 042AKS046), for example by stopping the output of a solenoid drive signal to a specified large prize opening door solenoid via a specified solenoid circuit, and the winning number count value is cleared (step 042AKS047).

After executing the processing of step 042AKS047, settings are made to send a command to the performance control board 12 to specify the process to be performed after the large prize opening (step 042AKS048), and the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", which corresponds to the process to be performed after the large prize opening (step 042AKS049), and the process during the large prize opening is terminated.

In this way, the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 10-2, the pre-jackpot opening process shown in FIG. 10-3, the jackpot opening process shown in FIG. 10-4 (including post-jackpot opening process and jackpot end process) are executed, and various performance control commands such as a win start command, a large prize opening open command, a prize winning command, and a large prize opening open command are set for transmission. Then, the command control process of step S27 in FIG. 5 is executed, and the set performance control commands are transmitted to the sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12, so that the performance control board 12 is aware of each timing such as the start of the jackpot, the opening (start of a round) and closing (end of a round) of the large prize opening, winning the large prize opening, and the end of the jackpot.

Figure 10-5 is a flow chart showing an example of various display processes performed in the jackpot performance process of step S176 in Figure 9. In the various display processes shown in Figure 10-5, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a jackpot end command has been received (step 042AKS051). The jackpot end command is a command sent from the main board 11 when it is determined in the post-jackpot opening process of step S116 in Figure 6 that the number of rounds in which the jackpot opening is open has reached the set upper limit number of times, and is a command to end the jackpot performance and execute the ending performance.

When it is determined that the winning end designation command has not been received (step 042AKS051; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the nth round (nth round predetermined period has elapsed) (step 042AKS052). Note that n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, and the initial value is "1", which is incremented by one in the processing of step 042AKS066 described later, and is cleared to "1" in step 042AKS068. The predetermined period is 0.6 seconds, and is set as a timer value when the round play starts, and when the timer value becomes "0", it is determined that the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the nth round. More specifically, in response to the large prize winning port being completely opened (detection that the large prize winning port door has moved to a position where it is completely open), a large prize winning port open designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 side, and the timer value starts counting for the predetermined period from the timing when the command is received.

In the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, as described below, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the first round of round play, the winning number display, which is a display of the number of balls won, and the round display, which shows the number of rounds, are performed. On the performance control board 12 side, during the period from the big win to the end of the game (the period from the fanfare to the ending), the process of adding 15 to the winning number is continuously performed each time a winning command indicating that a game ball has entered the big winning port is received. On the performance control board 12 side, when the winning command is received, a series of processes must first be performed, which are to analyze the command, add the winning number, and display the added winning number, and a predetermined period of time is required from the winning to the display. Therefore, if the predetermined period is too short, the series of processes may not be completed in time for winnings from the start of the first round of round play until the predetermined period has elapsed, and the process of displaying "0000" as the winning number display may not be able to keep up with the winning number display, and "0015" may not be displayed even if the winning number has been won ("0000" is displayed and then "0015", which gives the player a sense of incongruity). Therefore, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, a predetermined period of 0.6 seconds is set, and if a game ball that is present at the top of the big winning port at the time of opening wins a prize from the opening to the display of the round number, a period is secured in which "0015" is displayed directly without "0000" being displayed as the winning number display. On the other hand, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, the predetermined period is set to 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval when the balls are fired continuously, and even if the period from firing to winning the big winning port is taken into consideration, the time interval required for the game balls fired continuously to win the big winning port is the firing interval. Therefore, the number of winning balls that enter the large prize winning slot from the time the winning number is displayed until the winning number is displayed will be one. Therefore, by increasing the number of winning balls before the winning number display or the number of rounds display is performed, it is possible to prevent the winning number display from increasing at the timing when the round number display begins, which may give the player a sense of discomfort. Note that, in the example shown, the predetermined period in the characteristic section 042AK of this embodiment is 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval, but the predetermined period is not limited to 0.6 seconds and may be changed as appropriate.

If it is determined that a predetermined period of time has not elapsed since the start of the nth round (step 042AKS052; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether n=1, i.e., whether it is the first round (step 042AKS053). n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, and is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. As described above, the initial value is "1", and is sequentially incremented by 1 in the processing of step 042AKS066, and is cleared to "1" in step 042AKS068. In the processing of step 042AKS053, the value of n is checked to determine whether n=1.

If it is determined that n = 1 (step 042AKS053; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 performs a right-hit presentation that suggests to the player that he should hit the right, and controls the operation of a fanfare presentation that suggests that the jackpot game state has been reached (step 042AKS054). On the other hand, if it is determined that n ≠ 1 (step 042AKS053; No), the presentation control CPU 120 displays the round number corresponding to the n-1R and the number of wins, and controls the operation of the jackpot presentation for that n-1R (step 042AKS055). In the processing of step 042AKS055, for example, if n = 2, the round display indicating that it is the first round and the number of wins are displayed, and the operation of the jackpot presentation corresponding to the first round is controlled. In the processing of step 042AKS055, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5 as a jackpot performance, the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a pattern corresponding to the jackpot performance, and predetermined music or sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The illumination pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the jackpot performance may be preset.

After executing the processing of step 042AKS054 or step 042AKS055, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a winning designation command has been received, i.e., whether or not a game ball has entered the large winning port (step 042AKS056). Note that the processing of step 042AKS056 judges whether or not a winning has occurred from the start of the nth round up to a predetermined period of time. If a winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the various display processes.

When a winning command is received, that is, when a winning is entered into the big winning slot within a predetermined period from the start of the nth round (step 042AKS056; Yes), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance adds "15" to the count value of the number of winning balls (step 042AKS057). The count value of the number of winning balls is pre-stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 with the initial value set to "0", and is added by the processing of step 042AKS057 and the processing of step 042AKS063 described later. The number of winning balls is counted continuously during the so-called consecutive wins, and is cleared to "0" at the timing when the time-saving control ends without the variable display result becoming a "jackpot", that is, at the timing when the consecutive wins end. After executing the processing of step 042AKS057, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance lights up the attacca lamp 9c and outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning (step 042AKS058). In addition, the illumination of the attacca lamp 9c in the processing of step 042AKS058 (similar to step 042AKS064) is performed in a manner (a manner in which a winning is notified) that is greater than the number of illuminations per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacca lamp 9c that is illuminated during the performance during a big win. Therefore, it is easier to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning hole, and interest in the game can be improved. In addition, the illumination of the attacca lamp 9c may also be performed in a manner that the number of illuminations per unit time during the winning hole is greater than the number of illuminations during the performance during a big win. In addition, when a game ball enters the big winning hole, the attacca lamp 9c is illuminated and a winning sound is output regardless of whether the winning occurs within a predetermined period. Therefore, it is easier to recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning hole, and interest in the game can be improved.

After executing the processing of step 042AKS058, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance judges whether n=1, i.e., whether it is the first round (1R), as in step 042AKS053 (step 042AKS059). If n=1, i.e., if it is the first round (step 042AKS059; Yes), the various display processes are terminated. On the other hand, if n≠1, i.e., if it is not the first round (step 042AKS059; No), the count value of the number of balls won added in step 042AKS057 is displayed (the number of balls won is displayed), the number of balls won is updated and displayed (step 042AKS060), and the various display processes are terminated. In addition, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, when updating the number of balls won in the process of step 042AKS060, the count value of the number of balls won added in step 042AKS057 is not displayed as is, but rather a count-up display (announcement display of an increase in the number of balls won) is displayed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23) before the number of balls won is displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the number of balls won is increasing, which can increase the interest in the game.

If it is determined in step 042AKS052 of FIG. 10-5 that a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the nth round (step 042AKS052; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds and the number of wins corresponding to the nth round, and controls the operation of the presentation during the jackpot of that nth round (step 042AKS061). If n=1, i.e., if it is the first round, the number of rounds and the number of wins are displayed for the first time in step 042AKS061. In this case, if there is a win before the predetermined period has elapsed, the number of wins is updated and displayed in step 042AKS061. Specifically, if a game ball enters the large prize opening before the specified period has elapsed, the number of winnings is increased by "15" in step 042AKS057, so in step 042AKS061, a count-up display (announcement display indicating an increase in the number of winnings) is displayed as shown in Figure 10-11 (a-20), and then, as shown in Figure 10-11 (a-21), a winning number display (as a specific display) (display of "0015") other than the specified display indicating that the number of winnings has not increased in this jackpot (if the jackpot is in a winning streak, a display of "15" added to the number of winnings from the previous jackpot can be displayed after the count-up). On the other hand, if no game ball has entered the big prize winning hole before the predetermined period has elapsed, the number of winnings remains "0" and the number of winnings has not increased in the current big win, so as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-22), a winning number display (display of "0000") indicating that the number of winnings has not increased is performed as a predetermined display (if the game is in a streak, the number of winnings at the previous big win may be displayed as is). In addition to "0000", the winning number display (predetermined display) indicating that the number of winnings has not increased may be displayed as a non-numeric display, such as "---" or "not increased". In addition, in step 042AKS061, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5 as a big win performance, and the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a pattern corresponding to the big win performance, and a performance may be performed in which a predetermined song or sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The light-emitting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the big win performance may be set in advance. In this way, during the specified period after the big prize opening is opened, i.e., when the winning number display is not being performed, the attacca lamp 9c only lights up when the game ball enters the big prize opening. However, when the winning number display is being performed after the specified period has elapsed, the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-game machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately lit, and the performance effect lamp 9 is illuminated more than during the specified period. Therefore, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within the specified period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety, and it is possible to enhance the performance after the winning number display after the specified period, thereby improving the interest in the game. In addition, since the performance effect lamp 9 is illuminated at the same timing as the execution timing of the big prize performance, the performance can be enhanced all at once at the timing when the big prize performance is executed, thereby improving the interest in the game.

After executing the process of step 042AKS061, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a winning command has been received, i.e., whether or not a game ball has entered the large winning opening (step 042AKS062). If a winning command has been received, i.e., if a winning has occurred in the large winning opening (step 042AKS062; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 adds "15" to the count value of the number of balls won (step 042AKS063), lights up the Attacker Trump 9c, outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning, and performs a count-up display (notification display of an increase in the number of winnings) and then performs a winning number update display that displays the number of winnings (step 042AKS064).

After executing the processing of step 042AKS064, or if the winning designation command has not been received in step 042AKS062 (step 042AKS062; No), the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the next round after the nth round, the nth+1th round, has started (step 042AKS065). In step 042AKS065, for example, it may be judged by whether the large prize opening designation command indicating the start of the nth+1th round has been received from the main board 11. If the nth+1th round has not started, that is, if the large prize opening designation command has not been received and it remains in the nth round (step 042AKS065; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends various display processes as they are. On the other hand, when the n+1R has started, that is, when a command indicating the start of the n+1R has been received (step 042AKS065; Yes), n is incremented by "1" (step 042AKS066) and various display processes are terminated. For example, when n=1, that is, the first round, n=2 in step 042AKS066. Note that, even if n=2 and it is the second round, until a predetermined period has elapsed, steps 042AKS052 and 053 are judged as No, and in step 042AKS055, a round display corresponding to the first round, which is the n-1R, is performed, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, a round display corresponding to the second round, which is the nR, is performed (after step 042AKS052 is judged as Yes, it is displayed in the processing of step 042AKS061).

If it is determined in step 042AKS051 that a win end command has been received (step 042AKS051; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 sets the end of the jackpot presentation corresponding to the round in order to perform an ending presentation (step 042AKS067), clears n to 1 (step 042AKS068), and ends various display processes.

Next, the display timing and presentation operation examples of the round number display and the number of wins display will be specifically explained with reference to Figs. 10-6 to 10-14. Note that the illustrated example shows the case of the so-called first win (first big win), not during a consecutive win.

Figure 10-6 is a timing chart showing the timing of opening the big prize opening and the timing of various displays. Figures 10-7 to 10-14 are diagrams showing examples of the performance operation display on the image display device 5, the open/closed state of the big prize opening, and the lighting status of various lamps. As shown in Figures 10-6 and 10-7 (a-1), when the combination of decorative patterns that constitute a big prize is displayed in a stopped state, the big prize game state is entered. At this stage, as shown in Figure 10-7 (b-1), the big prize opening is closed. In addition, in order to inform the player that a big prize has been won, various performance effect lamps 9 such as the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f, and general prize opening vicinity lamp 9g are lit as shown in Figure 10-7 (c-1). In the illustrated example, the upper row is the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3, and the lower row is the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming board 2.

When a jackpot is hit, as shown in FIG. 10-6, a right-hit effect and a fanfare effect are performed to inform the player that he or she should hit the right until the end of the specified period of the first round (step 042AKS054 in FIG. 10-5). Note that the period from the jackpot to the start of the first round shown in FIG. 10-6 is sufficiently longer than the specified period. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 10-7(a-2), a fanfare effect image is displayed on the image display device 5, and at the same time, as shown in FIG. 10-7(c-2), all the effect lamps 9 are turned off. Then, the effect lamps 9 are turned on in the order of the lower left, upper left, center, upper right, and lower right, and a right-hit effect is performed in which "right hit" is displayed in large on the image display device. Note that the small right-hit display displayed in the upper right part of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 10-7(a-2) may be displayed continuously during the jackpot game state.

Specifically, in the right-hit performance, as shown in Fig. 10-7 (a-3) to Fig. 10-10 (a-19), the image display device 5 continues to display "right hit" superimposed on the fanfare image. Therefore, the following will explain the order in which the performance effect lamps 9 light up. When the right-hit performance starts, as shown in Fig. 10-7 (c-3), the general winning entrance vicinity lamp 9g located at the lower left of the play area lights up first, and then the lower left lamp 9bL1, which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower left part, lights up as shown in Fig. 10-7 (c-4). Next, as shown in Fig. 10-7 (c-5), the left display device lower lamp 9fL of the display device lower lamps 9f located at the lower position of the image display device 5 on the play board 2 lights up, and then the upper left lamp 9bL2, which is the frame lamp 9 in the upper left part, lights up as shown in Fig. 10-7 (c-6), and the speaker lamp 9eL corresponding to the speaker 8L part lights up as shown in Fig. 10-8 (c-7). In this way, the performance effect lamps 9 light up in order from the lower left to the upper left of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 10-8(b-7), the large prize opening is closed, so the launched game medium will not enter the large prize opening at this stage. The example shown in FIG. 10-8(b-7) shows the launched game ball passing through the second path above the large prize opening door and being guided to the discharge path.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-8), the movable body lamp 9d corresponding to the movable body 32 located in the upper center of the game board 2 lights up, and as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-9), the main lamp 9 located above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3 lights up, causing the performance effect lamp 9 located in the upper center of the pachinko game machine 1 to light up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-10), the speaker lamp 9eR corresponding to the speaker 8R lights up, and then, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-11), the upper right lamp 9bR2, which is the frame lamp 9 in the upper right part, lights up, and as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-12), the right display device lower lamp 9fR, which is one of the display device lower lamps 9f provided below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, lights up. Next, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-13), the lower right lamp 9bR1, which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower right part, lights up, and the attacca lamp 9c provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 lights up. In this way, the performance effect lamps 9 light up in order from the upper right side to the lower right side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a result, the performance effect lamps 9 light up in sequence from the lower left to the upper left, then the center, then the upper right to the lower right of the pachinko game machine 1, and the performance effect lamps 9 perform a right-hit performance that suggests to the player to hit to the right. In this example, both the performance effect lamps 9 on the game machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamps 9 on the game board 2 are used to suggest a right hit, but either one may be used. In addition, the performance effect lamps 9 on the game machine frame 3 may be lit only from the lower left to the center to the lower right, and the performance effect lamps 9 on the game board 2 may be lit only from the lower left to the center to the lower right, and both may be lit independently, simultaneously or with a time lag.

After the right-hit effect on the effect effect lamps 9 has ended, all effect effect lamps 9 are turned off as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15). Note that, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (a-15), the right-hit display on the image display device 5 continues (the right-hit effect itself is being executed).

Next, when the timing for opening the large prize opening comes as shown in FIG. 10-6, the first round starts, and the large prize opening is opened as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-16). At this stage, the right-hit display on the image display device 5 continues as shown in FIG. 10-10 (a-16), and all the performance effect lamps 9 remain off as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-16) until a predetermined period has elapsed (similar to FIG. 10-10 (a-19) and (c-19)). Even if all the performance effect lamps 9 are not turned off, any of the indicators such as luminosity, brightness, and illuminance may be lower than normal. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-16), even after the large prize opening is opened, the performance effect lamps 9 may be sequentially lit as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-3) to FIG. 10-9 (c-13) until a predetermined period has elapsed to suggest a right hit. In this case, the lighting speed of each effect lamp may be faster than before the large prize opening is opened (the lighting period may be shortened and the transition speed may be faster). Also, if the effect lamps 9 are lit in sequence after the large prize opening is opened to suggest a right hit, after the last to light up, the attacca lamp 9c, is lit, it may be left lit as is, instead of being turned off, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15). This makes it possible to make the player aware that the large prize opening has been opened.

When the large prize opening is completely opened as shown in FIG. 10-10(b-17), a count of 0.6 seconds is started as a predetermined period corresponding to the first round, and when the game ball enters the large prize opening as shown in FIG. 10-10(b-18), the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, and a winning designation command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. Note that even if a game ball (a game ball that has been hit quickly) is launched by a right-hit performance before the first round starts (before the large prize opening is opened), it can still win within the predetermined period corresponding to the first round if it is located above the large prize opening at the time the large prize opening is opened. On the side of the performance control board 12, the process of step 042AKS058 in FIG. 10-5 outputs a winning sound as shown in FIG. 10-10(b-18), and the attacca lamp 9c lights up in a manner to notify the player that a prize has been won as shown in FIG. 10-10(c-18). As described above, the attacca lamp 9c emits light in a manner that is greater than the number of times per unit time that the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacca lamp 9c emit light during the performance during a big win. In the example shown in FIG. 10-10(b-18), the launched game ball passes through the first path, which is the path toward the big winning hole, and is guided to the winning path in which the count switch 23 is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the game ball present in the big winning hole door portion is detected by the count switch 23 is less than 0.6 seconds, which is a predetermined period. This increases the likelihood that a game ball present above the large prize opening will be detected by the count switch 23 within a specified period of time after the large prize opening is opened, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

After the game ball enters the big prize slot as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), or after time has passed without a prize from the state shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-17), and a predetermined period has passed as shown in FIG. 10-10 (a-19), (b-19), and (c-19), it is time to display the number of rounds corresponding to the first round and the big win performance, as well as to display the number of wins, as shown in FIG. 10-6, so the processing of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 is executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), if the game ball enters the big prize hole before the specified period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-20), the round number "1R" is displayed to indicate that it is the first round, and a count-up display is also displayed. At the same time as these displays, as a big win performance (first round performance), as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-20), the display of the decorative symbols that constitute the big win, the display of "BOUNUS", and characters are displayed. Note that the decorative symbols that constitute the big win and the display of "BOUNUS" that are displayed as the big win performance (first round performance) are not shown (the same applies to FIG. 10-20 described later), but are displayed in a manner that suggests that the player should hit to the right, as shown in FIG. 10-21. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-1), when a fanfare or right-hit effect is performed and a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the opening of the big prize opening, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-2), the "7" decorative symbol constituting the big win is displayed facing forward, and a star-shaped image is displayed above the "B" in the "BOUNUS" display, as a big win effect. Next, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-3), the "7" decorative symbol constituting the big win is tilted toward the back right, and a star-shaped image is moved to the top of the "O" in the "BOUNUS" display. Next, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-4), the "7" decorative symbol constituting the big win faces forward, and a star-shaped image is moved to the top of the "N" in the "BOUNUS" display. After that, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-5), the "7" symbol, which is a decorative symbol that constitutes a jackpot, tilts toward the left rear, and a star-shaped image moves to the top of the "U" in the "BOUNUS" display. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-21 (A-6), the "7" symbol, which is a decorative symbol that constitutes a jackpot, faces forward again, and a star-shaped image moves to the top of the "S" in the "BOUNUS" display, and the display returns to FIG. 10-21 (A-2). In this way, in the jackpot performance, the decorative symbol that constitutes a jackpot is moved toward the right rear, the front, and the left rear, and the star-shaped image is moved from the left character in the "BOUNUS" display to the right, suggesting to the player that he should hit to the right. The display of the movement of the decorative symbol that constitutes a jackpot and the shifting display of the star-shaped image are called effect displays, and effect displays also include, for example, a clockwise rotation of a specified image and a character gradually turning to the right. In other words, the effect display should be displayed in a manner that suggests a right hit. In this way, the effect display suggests that a right hit should be made, making it easier to recognize a right hit.

In the big win performance, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (c-20), the performance effect lamp 9 lights up according to a preset lighting pattern according to the big win performance. In this example, it is assumed that a lighting pattern is set to alternately light up the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming board 2. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-21), "0015" is displayed as the winning number display. In this way, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19), the performance effect lamp 9 does not light up until the big win opening is opened and a predetermined period has passed, and as shown in FIG. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the performance effect lamp 9 lights up after the winning number display after the predetermined period has passed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from quickly firing and to promote the timing of firing.

On the other hand, if a certain period of time has passed without the game ball entering the big prize slot, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-22), the count-up display is not performed and "0000" is displayed as the number of wins. Note that the following are common regardless of whether or not a prize is won: the round number display "1R" is displayed to indicate one round, the decorative symbols that make up the big prize are displayed as a big prize performance (first round performance), "BOUNUS in progress" is displayed, and a character is displayed, and the performance effect lamp 9 lights up according to a preset light pattern according to the big prize performance.

Next, as time passes, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), when the tenth game ball enters the big prize opening in the first round, the maximum period during which the big prize opening can be opened is reached. In addition, with this winning, the processing of step 042AKS064 shown in FIG. 10-5 is executed, a count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23), and the number of winnings is displayed as "0150" as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-24). In addition, with this winning, a winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), and in addition to the lighting of the performance effect lamp 9 corresponding to the big win performance, the attacca lamp 9c is lit in a manner to notify the winning as shown in FIG. 10-12 (c-23). In addition, the maximum period during which the big prize opening can be opened is a period that is sufficient to count from a predetermined period after 10 game balls have entered. Specifically, the upper limit period is 29.5 seconds after release, and 28.9 seconds even after the specified period has passed. Since the interval between successive shots is 0.6 seconds, this period is sufficient to allow 10 wins. Therefore, players can feel at ease knowing that there is enough time to win.

When the tenth game ball enters the big prize opening in the first round, this is the upper limit of the time period during which the big prize opening can be opened, and so the big prize opening is controlled to be closed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-24). After that, until the second round shown in FIG. 10-6 begins, the big prize opening is controlled to be completely closed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-25). Meanwhile, until the predetermined period of the second round has elapsed (until the predetermined period has elapsed since n=2), as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-25), the round number display and big prize performance corresponding to the first round continue to be performed (the number of wins display is updated according to the wins), and the performance effect lamp 9 lights up in response to the big prize performance as shown in FIG. 10-12 (c-25).

In addition, when the tenth game ball enters the large prize opening in the first round and the upper limit period is reached, the large prize opening is controlled to be in a closed state. At this time, the so-called over-winning may occur, in which the eleventh game ball enters the large prize opening following the tenth game ball. Even in the case of the over-winning, the count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23), and the winning number display of "0165" is displayed. In this case, the count-up display and winning number display corresponding to the over-winning are performed after the count-up display and winning number display corresponding to the tenth winning, but as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-25), the count-up display and winning number display corresponding to the over-winning are completed within the period from when the large prize opening is completely closed to when it becomes open corresponding to the second round. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that an over-winning has occurred in the first round, which can increase the interest in the game. In addition, since the update of the winning number display in the opening corresponding to the first round does not overlap with the update of the winning number display in the opening corresponding to the second round, it is easy to determine which round the winning corresponds to. The winning sound corresponding to an over winning may be a sound (over winning sound) different from the normal winning sound. In this case, the over winning sound may be output when the count value exceeds the upper limit of "10". The attacca lamp 9c may also be illuminated in a manner corresponding to an over winning, different from the illumination in the normal winning mode.

Then, the timing comes for the large prize opening to be opened again as shown in FIG. 10-6 in response to the second round, and the large prize opening is controlled to be opened again as shown in FIG. 10-13 (b-26). At this time, step 042AKS065 in FIG. 10-5 is judged as Yes, that is, a command to specify that the large prize opening is open, indicating the start of the n+1th round, is received, and the processing of 042AKS066 is executed, resulting in n=2. At this stage, the processing of step 042AKS055 in FIG. 10-5 is executed, so that the large prize presentation and round number display corresponding to the first round are performed as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-26) and (c-26) (see also FIG. 10-6).

Next, when the big prize opening is completely open and the game ball enters the big prize opening as shown in FIG. 10-13 (b-27), unlike the first round, in the processing of step 042AKS060 in FIG. 10-5, a count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-27), and the number of winning balls is displayed as "0165" as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-28). In addition, in response to the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-13 (b-27), and in addition to the lighting of the performance effect lamp 9 corresponding to the big win performance, the attacca lamp 9c is lit as shown in FIG. 10-13 (c-27). In this way, in rounds other than the first round, even if the winning occurs during the specified period, the number of winning balls is updated and displayed during the specified period. Then, when the predetermined period of the second round has elapsed, the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 is executed, so that, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-30), the round number display of "2R" indicating that it is the second round is performed, and the big win performance corresponding to the second round is executed. In this case, the number "1" in the round number display of "1R", which is the first round, is changed to "2". That is, "R" is continuously displayed from the first round. Also, the display of "1R" is continuously displayed until the predetermined period of the second round has elapsed. Also, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, an example is shown in which a common big win performance is executed regardless of the number of rounds (the same applies to the lighting control of the performance effect lamp 9), but the big win performance executed in each round may be different. The same applies to the lighting of the performance effect lamp 9. In this way, the big prize opening is opened before the round number display indicating the second round is displayed, so the game balls of the player who has been continuously shot from the first round can be placed in the big prize opening at an early stage. Therefore, in each round of a multiple round game, it is possible to increase the possibility of the game balls shot in succession being placed in the big prize opening that was opened earlier than the round display.

On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 10-13 (a-26), (b-26), and (c-26), the large prize opening is controlled to open in response to the second round, and as shown in Fig. 10-13 (a-29), (b-29), and (c-29), if a predetermined period of time has passed since the large prize opening was completely opened without a game ball winning, as shown in Fig. 10-13 (a-31), (b-31), and (c-31), the number of winnings won in the first round will continue to be displayed as is, as shown in Fig. 10-14 (a-31), (b-31), and (c-31). From then on, the same process is performed until the predetermined final round, and when it is determined in step 042AKS051 of Fig. 10-5 that a winning end designation command has been received, a setting is made to end the large prize presentation corresponding to the round in order to perform the ending presentation. In this way, from the second round onwards, if no prize is won within the specified period, the number of balls won displayed in the previous round will continue to be displayed, whereas if a prize is won within the specified period, the number of balls won will be added to the number of balls won displayed in the previous round. Therefore, it is easy to recognize a prize in the large prize slot even from the second round onwards.

For example, in the final round, when the tenth game ball enters the large prize opening and the upper limit period is reached, the large prize opening is controlled to be closed, but in this case, the big win game state may end with the eleventh game ball stuck in the special variable prize ball device 7 (more specifically, between the large prize door and the glass door frame 3a) as shown in FIG. 10-15. In this case, the game ball will enter the large prize opening at the start of the first round in the next big win (when the large prize opening corresponding to the first round is opened), and the game ball will win during the specified period of the first round. In this case, too, the attacca lamp 9c is turned on in a manner to notify the winning as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18), and after the specified period has elapsed, a count-up display is performed and then "0015" is displayed as the winning number display as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-20) and (a-21). In such a case, there is a possibility that the launched game ball will win again during the specified period (the second ball may win), and in that case, after the specified period has elapsed, as shown in Figures 10-11 (a-20) and (a-21), a count-up display is performed, and then the winning number display directly shows "0030" instead of "0000" or "0015". This can provide a sense of surprise to the player, and increase the interest in the game.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 with characteristic part 042AK in this embodiment can achieve the following effects.

The presentation control CPU 120 displays the number of winnings in the processing of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 a predetermined period of time after the large prize opening is opened and the first round is started. If a game ball does not enter the large prize opening within the predetermined period of time after the first round is started, a predetermined display is displayed after the predetermined period indicating that the number of winnings has not increased, and if a game ball enters the large prize opening within the predetermined period of time after the first round is started, a specific display of the number of winnings different from the predetermined display is displayed after the predetermined period of time. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game by displaying a specific display if a prize is won within the predetermined period of time, without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

In addition, if a game ball enters the big prize slot within a predetermined period of time after the start of the first round, the presentation control CPU 120 will not display the number of balls won as the predetermined display of "0000", but will directly display the number of balls won as the specific display of "0015". This will prevent confusion for the player and a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, if a game ball enters the big prize slot within a predetermined period of time after the start of the first round, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a count-up display as a notification display that the number of prizes has increased, and then displays the number of prizes displayed as a special display: "0015." This makes it easier to recognize that a prize has been won and that the number of prizes is increasing.

The performance control CPU 120 also starts counting the timer value for a specified period from the timing when it receives a command to specify that the large prize opening is open, sent from the main board 11 in response to the large prize opening being opened, and displays the number of winnings after the specified period has elapsed. This allows the specified period to be counted appropriately, and a specific display to be made if a prize is won within the specified period, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

In addition, by closing the large prize opening door, the pachinko game machine 1 guides the launched game ball through the second path above the large prize opening door to the discharge path, while by opening the large prize opening door, the launched game ball is guided through the first path to the large prize opening and detected by the count switch 23. The special variable prize ball device 7 is configured so that the time it takes for a game ball present in the large prize opening door portion to be detected by the count switch 23 is a predetermined period of 0.6 seconds or less. This increases the likelihood that a game ball present above the large prize opening will be detected by the count switch 23 within the predetermined period from the opening of the large prize opening, and prevents a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

As shown in FIG. 10-6, the presentation control CPU 120 displays to the player that he should hit to the right by performing a right-hit presentation as shown in FIG. 10-7 (a-3) during the period from when the jackpot is hit until the jackpot opening is opened. This makes it easier to recognize the playing method and increases the player's interest in the game, as the playing area to be launched during the jackpot is suggested.

The open state of the large prize opening is when the large prize opening is completely open, that is, when the large prize opening door has moved to a position where it is completely open. In response to detecting that the large prize opening door has moved to a position where it is completely open, a large prize opening open command is sent from the main board 11. This counts the specified period from when the large prize opening is completely open, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

In addition, for game balls (fast-hit game balls) that are released by performing a right-hit effect before the start of the first round (before the large prize opening is open), if they are above the large prize opening when the opening is opened, they can win within a specified period corresponding to the first round, and if a prize is won within the specified period, the effect control CPU 120 will display the number of balls won as a special display after the specified period. This prevents game balls that were fast-hit from going to waste.

For example, in the final round, when the tenth game ball enters the large prize opening and the upper limit period is reached, the large prize opening is controlled to be closed, but in this case, as shown in FIG. 10-15, the big win game state may end with the eleventh game ball stuck in the special variable prize ball device 7 (more specifically, between the large prize door and the glass door frame 3a). In this case, when the next big win occurs, the game ball will enter the large prize opening at the start of the first round (when the large prize opening corresponding to the first round is opened), and the entry of game balls during the specified period of the first round occurs, and the performance control CPU 120 displays the number of winnings as a specific display after the specified period has elapsed. This can prevent players from feeling dissatisfied when an irregular event occurs.

The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute a fanfare presentation to suggest that a jackpot game state has been reached during the time when the jackpot opening changes from a closed state to an open state. After the jackpot opening is opened and a specified period of time has passed, the number of rounds played can be displayed along with the number of wins, and a jackpot presentation corresponding to round play can be executed. This can add variety to the presentation and increase interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-10(b-18), if a game ball enters the large prize opening during a specified period after the large prize opening is opened, the presentation control CPU 120 lights up the attacca lamp 9c as shown in FIG. 10-10(c-18). Also, as shown in FIG. 10-12(b-23), if a game ball enters the large prize opening outside the specified period, the presentation control CPU 120 lights up the attacca lamp 9c as shown in FIG. 10-12(c-23). This makes it possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player, and makes it easier to visually confirm that a prize has been won within the specified period.

The performance control CPU 120 also causes the attacca lamp 9c in the processing of step 042AKS058 in FIG. 10-5 (similar to step 042AKS064) to light up in a manner (a manner to notify the player that a prize has been won) that is greater than the number of times per unit time that game effect lamps 9 other than the attacca lamp 9c that light up during the jackpot performance. This makes it easier to visually confirm that the game ball has entered the jackpot opening, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), if a game ball enters the large prize opening during a specified period after the large prize opening is opened, the presentation control CPU 120 outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning. Also, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), if a game ball enters the large prize opening outside the specified period, the presentation control CPU 120 outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning. This makes it easier to recognize that a game ball has entered the large prize opening, which can increase interest in the game.

In addition, for rounds after the first round, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the round number corresponding to the round in the processing of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the round. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player, as a specific display is made if a prize is won within the predetermined period of time, and also increases the possibility of consecutively launched game balls winning a prize in a large prize slot that opens earlier than the round display in each round of multiple round play.

In addition, when a round of play from the second round onwards is being played, if the gaming medium does not enter the large prize opening within a specified period of time after the large prize opening is opened, the presentation control CPU 120 continues to display the number of balls won that was displayed in the previous round of play, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-31), while if the gaming medium enters the large prize opening within the specified period of time, it adds the number of balls won that were awarded in response to that winning to the number of balls displayed in the previous round of play, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-30). This makes it easier to recognize a winning entry into the large prize opening even in the second round onwards.

In addition, even if an over-winning occurs, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays the count-up display as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23) and displays the number of winnings of "0165". In this case, after the count-up display and the number of winnings display corresponding to the 10th winning, the count-up display and the number of winnings display corresponding to the over-winning are displayed next, but as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-25), the count-up display and the number of winnings display corresponding to the over-winning are completed within the period from when the large winning port is completely closed to when it is opened corresponding to the second round. This makes it easy to determine which opening the winning corresponds to, since the update of the number of winnings display at the time of one opening does not overlap with the update of the number of winnings display at the time of the next opening.

In addition, during a specified period after the large prize opening is opened, i.e., when the number of winning balls is not displayed, the presentation control CPU 120 only lights up the attacca lamp 9c when the game ball enters the large prize opening, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18). However, when the number of winning balls is displayed after the specified period has elapsed, the presentation effect lamp 9 on the multi-game machine frame 3 and the presentation effect lamp 9 on the game board 2 are alternately lit, as shown in, for example, FIG. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-21), and the presentation effect lamp 9 is illuminated more than during the specified period. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety, and to enhance the presentation after the number of winning balls is displayed after the specified period, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Also, the CPU 120 for controlling the effects can execute a right-hit effect and a fanfare effect before the start of the first round as shown in FIG. 10-6, and after the big prize opening is opened, the effect lamps 9 may be sequentially lit to suggest a right hit as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-3) to FIG. 10-9 (c-13) until a predetermined period has elapsed, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the effect lamps 9 on the frame 3 for the multi-game machine and the effect lamps 9 on the game board 2 are alternately lit as shown in FIG. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-21). This allows the effect lamps 9 to be used to suggest a right hit. Also, when the effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit to suggest a right hit after the big prize opening is opened, the last lighted attakka lamp 9c may be left lit as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15) without being turned off, and this allows the player to be aware that the big prize opening has been opened.

In addition, the maximum period for which the big prize opening can be opened is set to a period long enough for 10 game balls to win, even if it is counted from the end of a specified period. This gives players a sense of security because they are guaranteed a sufficient amount of time for a prize to be won.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 does not light up the presentation effect lamp 9 as shown in Fig. 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19) until the large prize opening is opened and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, i.e., until the number of winnings is displayed, but instead lights up the presentation effect lamp 9 after the number of winnings after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in Fig. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22). This makes it possible to restrain the player from firing too quickly and to encourage the timing of firing.

The presentation control CPU 120 also illuminates the presentation effect lamp 9 at the same timing as the execution of the jackpot presentation after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in Fig. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22). This allows the presentation to be instantly livened up at the timing when the jackpot presentation is executed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-21, when the number of winning symbols is displayed, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation displays a transitional effect display of decorative symbols and star-shaped images that constitute a jackpot in a manner that suggests hitting to the right. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that they should hit to the right, as the effect display suggests that they should hit to the right.

(Modification of characteristic portion 042AK)
In the above embodiment, as shown in Fig. 10-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), after the right-hit effect by the effect effect lamps 9, which indicate that the player should hit the right by lighting up the effect effect lamps 9 in sequence, is completed, all the effect effect lamps 9 are turned off, but this is only one example. For example, after the state shown in Fig. 10-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), the state shown in Fig. 10-16 (a-16A), (b-16A), and (c-16A) may be transitioned to, and at the timing when the large prize winning hole is opened (Fig. 10-16 (b-16A)), the attacca lamp 9c provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 may be turned on as shown in Fig. 10-16 (c-16A). According to this, it is possible to easily make the player visually recognize that the large prize winning hole is opened. The attacca lamp 9c may be continuously turned on until a predetermined period has elapsed or during the opening period.

In the above embodiment, when updating the round display from the first round to the second round, the number "1" in the round number display of "1R" which is the first round is changed to "2", and "R" is continuously displayed from the first round and "1R" is continuously displayed until the specified period of the second round has elapsed. However, this is only an example. For example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, when the open state corresponding to the first round ends, that is, when the big prize winning port becomes closed, the "1" in the "1R" display may be erased and only "R" may be displayed. Then, when the specified period of the second round has elapsed, "2" may be displayed, and the round display of "2R" indicating the second round may be displayed. The same applies to the second round and after. This allows the end of each round to be visually confirmed, and the game can be made more interesting.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the maximum number of winning balls during the period in which the large winning port can be opened is 10 (the maximum number of winning balls is 10), but for example, the maximum number of winning balls may be set to 1, and if 2 balls are won during the specified period before the number of rounds is displayed, it may be considered an over winning ball. In this case, a sound different from the normal winning sound may be output as the winning sound for an over winning ball during the specified period, and the attacca lamp 9c may be illuminated in a manner indicating the occurrence of an over winning ball.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the winning number display counted the number of game balls entering the jackpot, but in addition to this, winnings into the general winning port 10 during a jackpot may also be counted. Note that since right-handed shots are performed during a jackpot, the general winning port into which the winning ball is entered is the general winning port 10 located above the variable winning ball device 6B. Figure 10-18 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processes in which winnings into the general winning port 10 during a jackpot are also counted. Note that explanations of parts similar to those in Figure 10-5 will be omitted.

In the various display processes shown in FIG. 10-18, if it is determined in step 042AKS056 that a winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), it is further determined whether or not a general winning designation command indicating that a game ball has won a general winning port 10 has been received (step 042AKS081). Then, if a general winning designation command has been received, i.e., if a winning ball has been won in the general winning port 10 (step 042AKS081; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of balls won (step 042AKS082). After executing the process of step 042AKS082, or if a general winning designation command has not been received, i.e., if no winning ball has been won in the general winning port 10 (step 042AKS081; No), the process proceeds to step 042AKS059. In addition, when a ball wins at the general winning port 10, a winning sound (different from the winning sound when a ball wins at the large winning port) may be output to indicate that the game ball has won at the general winning port 10.

In addition, in the various display processes shown in FIG. 10-18, if it is determined in step 042AKS062 that a winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS062; No), it is further determined whether or not a general winning designation command indicating that a game ball has won into the general winning port 10 has been received (step 042AKS083). Then, if a general winning designation command has been received, i.e., if there has been a winning into the general winning port 10 (step 042AKS083; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of balls won (step 042AKS083) and updates and displays the number of balls won (step 042AKS085). Even when updating and displaying the number of balls won in step 042AKS085, a count-up display (announcement display indicating that the number of balls won is increasing) is performed before the number of balls won is displayed. After executing the processing of step 042AKS085, or if the general winning designation command has not been received, i.e., if there has been no winning in the general winning port 10 (step 042AKS083; No), the processing proceeds to step 042AKS065. In addition, when a game ball wins in the general winning port 10, a winning sound (a winning sound different from the winning sound when a game ball wins in the large winning port) may be output to indicate that the game ball has won in the general winning port 10.

Next, an example of the performance operation when the winning of the general winning port 10 is also counted will be described with reference to Fig. 10-19 and Fig. 10-20. Fig. 10-19 and Fig. 10-20 are diagrams showing an example of the performance operation display on the image display device 5, the open/closed state of the large winning port, and the lighting state of various lamps. (a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17) shown in Fig. 10-19 are the same as (a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17) shown in Fig. 10-10. As shown in the figure, when the large winning port is in the open state, a count of 0.6 seconds as a predetermined period is started. When a game ball enters the general winning port 10, the state transitions to the state shown in Fig. 10-19 (a-18A), (b-18A), and (c-18A). Then, after the game ball has entered the general prize opening 10 as shown in FIG. 10-19 (b-18A), or if time passes from the state shown in FIG. 10-19 (b-17) without the game ball entering either the large prize opening or the general prize opening 10, and a predetermined period of time has passed as shown in FIG. 10-19 (a-19A), (b-19A) and (c-19A), if the game ball has entered the general prize opening 10, the state transitions to that shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-20A), (b-20A) and (c-20A), and as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-20A), the round number "1R" is displayed to indicate that this is the first round, and a count-up display is also displayed. At the same time as these displays, the jackpot performance (first round performance) is displayed as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-20A), which includes the decorative symbols that make up the jackpot, the message "BOUNUS in progress," and characters. During the jackpot performance, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (c-20A), the performance effect lamp 9 lights up according to a preset lighting pattern for the jackpot performance. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-21A), "0003" is displayed as the number of wins.

On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time has passed without a game ball winning the general winning slot 10, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-22A), no count-up display is performed, and "0000" is displayed as the winning number display. Note that the following are common regardless of whether or not a prize is won: the round number display of "1R" is performed to indicate that it is one round, the display of the decorative symbols that make up the jackpot, the display of "BOUNUS" and characters as a jackpot performance (first round performance), and the lighting of the performance effect lamp 9 according to a preset lighting pattern according to the jackpot performance.

In this way, even if a game ball enters the general winning port 10 during the specified period after the big winning port is opened at the start of the first round, as in the above embodiment, after the specified period has elapsed, "0003" is displayed as the winning number display corresponding to the winning of the general winning port 10. Also, if no game balls enter the general winning port 10 during the specified period, "0000" is displayed as the specified display indicating that no prize balls have been awarded. Therefore, since the winning number display corresponding to the winning is also displayed for game balls that have entered the general winning port 10 during the specified period, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling anxious.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 042AK)
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 042AK is a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player, and includes a display means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.), a variable winning means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change the gaming medium to a first state in which it is easy to win a prize and a second state in which it is difficult or impossible for the gaming medium to win a prize, and a control means (e.g., a CPU 103 that performs a round game) that can execute a round game multiple times to change the variable winning means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state, and the display means is capable of displaying an amount of award related to the amount of gaming value awarded as a result of the gaming medium winning the variable winning means (e.g., a display of the number of wins). and the like), when the first of the multiple rounds of play is played, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state (for example, in the first round, the winning number display is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning port has been opened), and if the gaming medium does not win a prize in the variable winning means within the predetermined period of time, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the award amount display after the predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, "0000" is displayed as the winning number display), and if the gaming medium wins a prize in the variable winning means within the predetermined period of time, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the award amount display after the predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display).

With this configuration, if a win occurs within a specified period, a specific display is displayed, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the display means may be configured to display the specific display without displaying the predetermined display if the gaming medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period (for example, displaying "0015" instead of "0000").

This configuration can prevent players from becoming confused and losing interest in the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, when a gaming medium wins in the variable winning means within the specified period, the display means may display a count-up indication indicating that the gaming value has been awarded, and then display the specific indication according to the awarded gaming value (for example, displaying a count-up indication as a notification indication that the number of winnings is increasing, and then displaying "0015").

This configuration makes it easier for players to recognize that they have won a prize and the number of prizes they have won is increasing.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above, the display means may start displaying the award amount display after the predetermined period of time has elapsed after receiving a command indicating that the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state (for example, by starting counting the timer value for a predetermined period from the timing of receiving a command to specify that the large winning port is open, transmitted from the main board 11).

With this configuration, the specified period is counted appropriately, and if a win occurs within the specified period, a specific display is made, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

(5) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (4) above, the variable winning means may include a path forming means including a first path that leads the gaming medium to the winning path when the first state is reached (for example, by opening the large prize opening door, the launched gaming ball is led through the first path to the large prize opening), and a second path that leads the gaming medium to the discharge path when the second state is reached (for example, by closing the large prize opening door, the launched gaming ball is led through the second path above the large prize opening door to the discharge path), and a detection means (for example, a count switch 23, etc.) that is formed within the winning path and detects the winning of the gaming medium, and the time that the gaming medium travels from the path forming means to the detection means may be within the specified period (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the gaming ball present at the large prize opening door is detected by the count switch 23 is within the specified period of 0.6 seconds, etc.).

This configuration increases the likelihood that a gaming ball present above the large prize opening will be detected within a specified period of time after the large prize opening is opened, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

(6) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (5) above, after the machine is controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means enters the first state, an operation prompting display may be displayed to encourage the player to perform an operation (for example, during the period from when a jackpot is hit until the jackpot opening is opened, a right-hit display may be displayed to inform the player that he or she should hit the right, as shown in FIG. 10-7(a-3)).

This configuration suggests the operations that should be performed during advantageous states, making it easier to understand how to play and increasing interest in the game.

(7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (6) above, the first state may be a state in which the variable prize door included in the variable prize means is completely open (for example, the open state of the large prize opening is a state in which the large prize opening is completely open, that is, the large prize opening door has moved to a position in which it is completely open, and a large prize opening open command is sent from the main board 11 in response to detecting that the large prize opening door has moved to a position in which it is completely open).

With this configuration, the specified period is counted from the time the big prize opening is fully open, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player.

(8) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (7) above, if the gaming medium launched by the operation prompting display before the start of the first round of play in the advantageous state wins in the variable winning means, the specific display may be displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, a gaming ball launched by a right-hit performance before the start of the first round may win at the timing when the large winning opening is opened, and if the gaming medium wins within the predetermined period, the number of winnings may be displayed as a specific display after the predetermined period).

This configuration can prevent game media that are released before a round of play begins from going to waste.

(9) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (8) above, when the advantageous state ends in a state where a gaming medium is sandwiched when the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state in the last round of the multiple rounds in the advantageous state (for example, the big win game state ends with the eleventh gaming ball sandwiched between the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big win door and the glass door frame 3a) as shown in FIG. 10-15 in the final round), and the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state in the first round when the advantageous state is again controlled, the specific display may be displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, when the next big win occurs, the gaming ball enters the big win port at the start of the first round, and the number of wins is displayed as a specific display after the predetermined period has elapsed).

This configuration can prevent players from feeling dissatisfied when an irregular event occurs.

(10) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (9) above, when the machine is controlled to the advantageous state, during the time when the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect that suggests that the machine has been controlled to the advantageous state (for example, during the time when the large prize opening goes from a closed state to an open state, it is possible to execute a fanfare effect that suggests that the large prize game state has been entered), and when the display of the amount of prize awarded starts after the specified period has elapsed, it is possible to execute a round game display that can identify the round game being played and a round-in-progress effect corresponding to the round game (for example, after the large prize opening goes into an open state and a specified period has elapsed, it is possible to display the number of rounds together with the number of prizes won, and execute a large prize-in-progress effect corresponding to the round game).

This configuration can add variety to the presentation and increase interest in the game.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 043AK)
The characteristic part 042AK includes the following characteristic part 043AK. (1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 043AK is a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player, and includes a display means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.), a variable winning means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change between a first state in which the gaming medium is easy to win a prize and a second state in which the gaming medium is impossible or difficult to win a prize,
and a control means (e.g., a CPU 103 that performs a round game, etc.) capable of executing a round game multiple times in which, when controlled to the advantageous state, the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed back to the second state, and the display means is capable of displaying an amount of granted relating to the amount of gaming value granted as a result of a gaming medium winning in the variable winning means (e.g., displaying the number of winnings), and when the first of the multiple round games is played, the amount of granted is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state (e.g., in the first round, displaying the number of winnings after a predetermined period has elapsed after a large winning opening is opened), and if a gaming medium does not win in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, the gaming value is granted as the amount of granted display after the predetermined period has elapsed. the predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game medium has not won (for example, by displaying "0000" as the number of winnings), and if the game medium wins in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the amount of award after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, by displaying "0015" as the number of winnings), and further includes a light-emitting means (for example, a performance effect lamp 9) and a light-emitting control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) for controlling the light-emitting means, and the light-emitting control means controls the light-emitting means with a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the game medium winning when the game medium wins in the variable winning means after the predetermined period has elapsed and when the game medium wins in the variable winning means before the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, when a game ball wins in a large winning port, the attacca lamp 9c is illuminated regardless of whether the winning occurs within the predetermined period).

With this configuration, if a prize is won within a specified period of time, a specific display is made, which prevents a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player, and also makes it easier for the player to visually confirm that a prize has been won within the specified period of time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the light emitting means may include a specific light emitting means (such as an attacca lamp 9c) located near the variable winning means that emits light when a gaming medium enters the variable winning means, and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means (such as a performance effect lamp 9 other than the attacca lamp 9c), and the light emitted by the specific light emitting means when a gaming medium enters the variable winning means may be emitted more times per unit time than the light emitted by the predetermined light emitting means (for example, the light emitted by the attacca lamp 9c in the processing of step 042AKS058 (similarly in step 042AKS064) may be emitted in a manner (a manner in which a win has been notified) that is greater than the light emitted per unit time by the gaming effect lamp 9 other than the attacca lamp 9c that emits light during the performance during a jackpot).

This configuration makes it easier to visually confirm that the game ball has entered the big prize slot, increasing interest in the game.

(3) The gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above may further include a sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R, etc.), which outputs a winning sound corresponding to a winning when the gaming medium enters the variable winning means, and which outputs the winning sound both when the gaming medium enters the variable winning means after the specified period has elapsed and when the gaming medium enters the variable winning means before the specified period has elapsed (for example, when a gaming ball enters a large winning port, the winning sound may be output regardless of whether the winning occurs within the specified period).

This configuration makes it easier to recognize when a game ball has entered the big prize slot, increasing interest in the game.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 044AK)
The characteristic part 042AK includes the following characteristic part 044AK. (1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 044AK is a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, and includes a display means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.), a variable winning means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change the gaming medium between a first state in which it is easy to win a prize and a second state in which it is difficult or impossible to win a prize, and a round game that changes the variable winning means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state when the gaming machine is controlled to the advantageous state. and a control means (e.g., a CPU 103 for performing a round game, etc.) that can be executed a plurality of times, the display means being capable of displaying an amount of granted relating to the amount of granted gaming value granted as a result of a gaming medium winning at the variable winning means (e.g., displaying the number of winnings), and being capable of displaying a round game display that can identify the round game being played (e.g., displaying the number of rounds), and displaying a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state when the first of the plurality of round games is played. and when a second or subsequent round game is played among a plurality of round games, the round game display corresponding to the second or subsequent round game is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state (for example, in the second round, the round number display is displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened). If a gaming medium does not win a prize in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the awarded amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0000" is displayed as the winning number display). If a gaming medium wins a prize in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the awarded amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display).

With this configuration, if a prize is won within a specified period of time, a specific display is made, which prevents a decline in the player's interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player, and increases the chances that consecutively shot game balls will win a prize in a large prize slot that opens earlier than the round display in each round of multiple rounds of play.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, when the second or subsequent round of play is played, if the gaming medium does not enter the variable winning means within a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, the award amount display displayed in the previous round of play continues to be displayed (for example, when the second or subsequent round of play is played, if the gaming medium does not enter the large winning port within a predetermined period of time after the large winning port is opened, the winning number display displayed in the previous round of play continues to be displayed, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-31)). When the second or subsequent round of play is played, if the game medium wins in the variable winning means within a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, the amount of the award corresponding to the game value awarded in response to the winning may be added to the amount of the award displayed in the previous round of play and displayed (for example, if the game medium wins in the large winning slot within a predetermined period of time, the number of balls won awarded in response to the winning may be added to the number of balls won displayed in the previous round of play and displayed, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-30)).

This configuration makes it easier to recognize when a jackpot has been won in the big prize slot even during the second or subsequent rounds of play.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, the display means may be capable of updating the displayed display of the amount of prize awarded in response to a gaming medium winning in the variable prize winning means, and the updating of the display of the amount of prize awarded may be completed once the variable prize winning means changes from the first state to the second state, and before it changes to the first state again (for example, the count-up display and the display of the number of prizes won corresponding to the over prize may be completed within the period from when the large prize winning port is completely closed to when it changes to the open state corresponding to the second round).

With this configuration, the update of the winning number display when one opening occurs does not overlap with the update of the winning number display when the next opening occurs, making it easy to determine which opening corresponds to the winning prize.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 045AK)
The characteristic part 042AK includes the following characteristic part 045AK. (1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 045AK is a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, and includes a display means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.), a variable winning means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change the gaming medium to a first state in which it is easy to win a prize and a second state in which it is difficult or impossible to win a prize, and a control means (e.g., a CPU 103 that performs a round game, etc.) that can execute a round game multiple times to change the variable winning means from the second state to the first state and then to the second state when the gaming machine is controlled to the advantageous state, The display means is capable of displaying a grant amount display relating to the amount of gaming value granted as a result of the gaming medium winning at the variable winning means (for example, by displaying the number of wins), and when the first of the multiple rounds of play is played, displays the grant amount display after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state (for example, in the first round, displays the number of wins after a predetermined period has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened), and if the gaming medium does not win at the variable winning means within the predetermined period, displays the grant amount display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been granted after the predetermined period has elapsed. a predetermined display (for example, displaying "0000" as the number of winnings), and if the gaming medium wins in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the amount of award after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, displaying "0015" as the number of winnings), and the game machine further comprises a plurality of light-emitting means (for example, performance effect lamps 9, etc.) and a light-emitting control means (for example, performance control CPU 120, etc.) for controlling the light-emitting means, and the light-emitting control means is more likely to display a specific display when the variable winning means is in the first state and the amount of award after the predetermined period has elapsed than a specific display when the variable winning means is in the first state and the amount of award after the predetermined period has elapsed. The present invention is characterized in that the light-emitting means is controlled to emit more light than when the award amount display is not displayed before the period has elapsed (for example, during a specified period, i.e., when the number of winnings is not displayed, only the attacca lamp 9c is lit when the game ball enters the large winning hole, as shown in Figure 10-10 (c-18), but when the number of winnings is displayed after the specified period has elapsed, the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-game machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately lit, as shown in Figures 10-11 (c-20) and (c-21), and more performance effect lamps 9 are emitted than during the specified period).

With this configuration, if a prize is won within a specified period, a specific display is made, which prevents a decline in interest in the game without causing anxiety to the player, and also enhances the presentation after the number of prizes is displayed after the specified period, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, after the game machine is controlled to the advantageous state, and before the variable winning means enters the first state, an operation prompting display for encouraging the player to perform an operation can be displayed (for example, by displaying a right-hit display), and the light-emitting means includes a specific light-emitting means (for example, an attacca lamp 9c, etc.) located in the vicinity of the variable winning means that emits light when a gaming medium enters the variable winning means, and a predetermined light-emitting means other than the specific light-emitting means (for example, a performance effect lamp 9 other than the attacca lamp 9c, etc.), and when the variable winning means is in the first state, if the award amount display before the predetermined period has elapsed is not displayed, the specific light-emitting means is illuminated while the predetermined light-emitting means is illuminated in a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the operation prompting display, and the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed is displayed. When the special light emitting means and the predetermined light emitting means are illuminated in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, after the big prize opening is opened, the performance effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit as shown in FIG. 10-7(c-3) to FIG. 10-9(c-13) until a predetermined period has elapsed to suggest a right hit, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the performance effect lamps 9 on the frame 3 for the multi-game machine and the performance effect lamps 9 on the game board 2 are alternately lit as shown in FIG. 10-11(c-20) and (c-21), and when the performance effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit after the big prize opening is opened to suggest a right hit, after the last lit up attacca lamp 9c is lit, it is not turned off as shown in FIG. 10-9(c-15) and remains lit).

This configuration can encourage operation using the specified light emitting means, and can also make the player aware that the variable winning means has entered the first state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, the round of play may be terminated when a specific number of gaming media are won, and transition to the next round of play (for example, the winning of 10 gaming balls is the upper limit of the period during which the large prize opening can be opened), and the time from the lapse of the specified period until the variable prize winning means enters the second state may be a sufficient time for the gaming media to win the specific number of games (for example, the upper limit of the period during which the large prize opening can be opened may be a sufficient period even if counted from the lapse of the specified period for 10 gaming balls to win).

This configuration gives players a sense of security because it guarantees them sufficient time to win.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, one round of play ends when a specific number of game balls are won, and transitions to the next round of play (for example, the winning of 10 game balls is the upper limit of the period during which the large prize opening can be opened), and the time from the end of the specified period until the variable prize winning means enters the second state is sufficient for the game media to win the specific number of game balls (for example, the upper limit of the period during which the large prize opening can be opened is sufficient for 10 game balls to win, even if counted from the end of the specified period), and the variable prize winning When the means is in the first state, the light emission of the light emitting means may be restricted if the display of the amount of the award before the predetermined period has elapsed is not displayed, and the light emitting means may be made to emit light only after the display of the amount of the award after the predetermined period has elapsed is displayed (for example, as shown in Figures 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19), the performance effect lamp 9 may not be illuminated until the large prize opening is opened and the predetermined period has elapsed, i.e., until the number of prizes is displayed, and as shown in Figures 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the performance effect lamp 9 may be illuminated only after the display of the number of prizes after the predetermined period has elapsed).

This configuration discourages players from firing too quickly and encourages them to fire at the right time.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (4) above, when the machine is controlled to the advantageous state, during the time when the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, it may be possible to execute a suggestive effect that suggests that the machine has been controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare effect may be executed), and when the display of the award amount display starts after the specified period has elapsed, it may be possible to execute a round game display that can identify the round game being played and a mid-round effect corresponding to the round game (for example, a round number display, a number of wins display, and a jackpot mid-play effect may be executed after the specified period has elapsed), and the light-emitting means may be illuminated at the same timing as the execution of the mid-round effect (for example, as shown in Figures 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the effect lamp 9 may be illuminated at the same timing as the execution of the jackpot mid-play effect).

This configuration allows the performance to be instantly heightened when the mid-round performance is executed, increasing interest in the game.

(6) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (5) above, a general winning means (e.g., a general winning port 10, etc.) through which a gaming medium can win a prize is further provided, and the display means is capable of displaying the amount of gaming value awarded as a result of the gaming medium winning in the general winning means as the awarded amount display (e.g., displaying an acquisition number display in response to a winning in the general winning port 10, etc.), and if the gaming medium does not win in the general winning means within the specified period, a specified display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded is displayed as the awarded amount display after the specified period has elapsed (e.g., If no game balls enter the general winning opening 10 during a fixed period, a predetermined display of "0000" may be displayed to indicate that no prize balls have been awarded), and if a game medium enters the general winning means within the specified period, a display corresponding to the winning of the general winning means may be displayed as the awarded amount display after the specified period has elapsed (for example, if a game ball enters the general winning opening 10 during a specified period after the large winning opening is opened, after the specified period has elapsed, a display of "0003" may be displayed as the number of winnings corresponding to the winning of the general winning opening 10).

With this configuration, even if a player wins a general prize during a specified period, a display corresponding to the winning of the general prize is also displayed, preventing players from feeling anxious.

(7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (6) above, the variable winning means may be provided in a predetermined area in the game area (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 may be provided in the game area on the right side), the display means may display a first image (for example, a decorative symbol constituting a jackpot) at the same timing as the display of the amount of the prize, and the first image may be displayed with an effect at the same timing as the display of the amount of the prize during the advantageous state (for example, an effect display that moves the decorative symbol constituting a jackpot), and the effect display may be displayed in a manner that suggests the predetermined area (for example, an effect display that moves the decorative symbol constituting a jackpot to the rear right, front, and rear left, suggesting a right hit).

With this configuration, the effect display suggests the play area to be launched, making it easier for the player to recognize the play area to be launched.

(Description of the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine relating to the first embodiment of the characteristic part 20SH will be described with reference to Figs. 11-1 to 11-4. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the first embodiment of the characteristic part 20SH, an acquisition number display relating to the number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot gaming state and an acquisition number notification display for notifying that the number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot gaming state has reached a predetermined number can be displayed. The characters used in the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. The specific characters used in the acquisition number display are not visible from the specific area against the background image during a jackpot. The specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display are visible from the specific area against the background image during a jackpot.

The following describes the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the first form of the characteristic part 20SH having such features. Note that descriptions of parts similar to those described above will be omitted.

(Background Art Related to the First Aspect of Characteristic Part 20SH)
FIG. 11A is a diagram showing the background art related to the first aspect of the characteristic portion 20SH.

When a pachinko game machine is controlled to a jackpot game state, it may display an acquisition number display relating to the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. 11-1(A). In the example shown in FIG. 11-1(A), the acquisition number display shows "120 points" corresponding to the number of acquired balls being 120.

The winning number display uses numbers to indicate the number of winning balls, and characters other than numbers to make it clear that it is a winning number display. The numbers used to display the winning number are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc. The winning number display shown in Figure 11-1 (A) uses the word "points" to make it clear that it is a winning number display, and the number "120" to indicate the number of winning balls.

Some of the characters used to display the number of acquisitions form a special area. Here, a special area is an area that is surrounded by the lines that form the character, and does not connect to the area outside the lines that form the character. Here, "not connecting to the area outside the lines that form the character" includes cases where the "special area" is completely isolated from the "area outside the lines that form the character" by the "lines that form the character", and cases where the "special area" is not completely isolated from the "area outside the lines that form the character" by the "lines that form the character", but appears to be a separate area at first glance. In the following explanation, characters that form a special area are referred to as "special characters".

For example, in the case of Arabic numerals, "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" correspond to specific characters. That is, in the case of the Arabic numerals "0", "6", "8", and "9", the specific region is an approximately circular region surrounded by the curves that form the character. In the case of the Arabic numeral "8", two specific regions are formed. In the case of the Arabic numeral "4", the specific region is a triangular region surrounded by the three straight lines that form the character.

When the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, as shown in FIG. 11-1(A), a jackpot background image relating to the jackpot gaming state is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device. In the example shown in FIG. 11-1(A), a jackpot background image of a flying "butterfly" is displayed. The jackpot background image is an image that is displayed behind other displays displayed on the image display device in the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot background image contains many lines that represent animated pictures and effects.

The number of wins display is displayed small in an edge area of the display area of the image display device that does not impede the visibility of the background image during a jackpot. When the background image during a jackpot changes over time, the lines of the background image during a jackpot may overlap the back of the number of wins display. If a specific character is displayed in the number of wins display, such as the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by a two-dot chain line in Figure 11-1 (A), when the lines of the background image during a jackpot overlap the back of a specific area of the specific character, the lines of the background image during a jackpot may blend in with the lines that form the specific character, causing the specific character to appear as a different character than it actually is.

Figure 11-1 (B) is an enlarged view of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by a two-dot chain line in Figure 11-1 (A). In the example shown in Figures 11-1 (A) and (B), the "butterfly" lines of the background image during a jackpot overlap the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used to display the number of wins, and the "butterfly" lines of the background image during a jackpot blend in with the lines that form the specific character "0," making the specific character "0" look like the Arabic numeral "8" instead of the Arabic numeral "0."

In this way, if the characters showing the number of balls won are mistaken for characters that are different from the actual characters, the number of balls awarded during a jackpot game cannot be accurately recognized. However, it is difficult to adjust the position of the lines included in the background image during a jackpot so that the lines do not overlap with specific areas of specific characters.

The first form of characteristic part 20SH was created in consideration of this background. The first form of characteristic part 20SH is described below.

(Display of Acquisition Number in First Form of Characteristic Part 20SH)
FIG. 11-2(A) is a diagram showing an example of a display form of Arabic numerals used to display the number of acquisitions in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH.

In the first form of the characteristic part 20SH, the specific regions 20SHI1 of the Arabic numerals used to display the number of acquisitions, which correspond to the specific characters "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9", are displayed in a non-transparent display mode that differs from the display mode of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. In the example shown in FIG. 11-2(A), the color of the lines 20SHS1 of the Arabic numerals used to display the number of acquisitions is "black", while the specific regions 20SHI1 of the specific characters "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" are displayed in "white".

In addition, the display mode of the specific region 20SHI1 is not limited to a color different from the color of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters, but may be a display mode that has a high contrast with the display mode of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters to the extent that the specific region 20SHI1 and the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters can be accurately distinguished.

For example, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color that has a high contrast with the color of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. In that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a brightness that has a low contrast with the brightness of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture that has a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture that has a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters.

Also, for example, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a brightness that has a high contrast with the brightness of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color that has a low contrast with the color of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture that has a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture that has a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters.

Also, for example, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may have a high contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may have a low contrast with the color of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may have a low contrast with the brightness of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may have a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters.

Also, for example, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture with high contrast relative to the texture of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color with low contrast relative to the color of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a brightness with low contrast relative to the brightness of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture with low contrast relative to the texture of the lines 20SHS1 that form the characters.

Of the characters used to display the number of balls won, numbers other than Arabic numerals to display the number of balls won, and specific characters other than numerals to recognize that the number of balls won is displayed, are displayed in a display mode in which the specific area is not transparent and is different from the display mode of the lines that form the characters, as in the Arabic numerals shown in Figure 11-2 (A).

(Display of Acquisition Number in the First Form of Characteristic Part 20SH)
FIG. 11-2(A) is a diagram showing an example of a display form of Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH.

When the number of prize balls awarded during a jackpot game reaches a predetermined number, the pachinko game machine 1 displays a winning number notification display to notify the player of this fact.

Here, the time-saving control and the probability variable control executed after the end of the jackpot game state are ended when a predetermined number of special game games are played, or when the jackpot game state is entered before a predetermined number of special game games are played. However, for example, the number of time-saving control and the probability variable control may be different for each type of jackpot, and in the case of a specific type of jackpot, the high probability control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state may be continuously executed until another jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game state. In such a case, the jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state, resulting in a so-called consecutive state.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in a consecutive win state, when the number of prize balls awarded in multiple jackpot game states in the consecutive win state reaches a predetermined number, a winning number notification display is displayed to notify that fact.

The winning number notification display uses numbers to display the predetermined number of balls awarded during a jackpot game state when that number is reached, and characters other than numbers to make it clear that it is a winning number notification display. The numbers used in the winning number notification display are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc.

Among the characters used in the acquisition number notification display, there are some that correspond to specific characters. In the first form of the characteristic part 20SH, as shown in FIG. 11-2(B), the specific regions of the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display are displayed in a transparent display mode. In the example shown in FIG. 11-2(B), the specific regions 20SHI2 of the Arabic numerals "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" that correspond to specific characters among the Arabic numerals used in the acquisition number notification display are displayed in a transparent display mode.

Of the characters used in the winning number notification display, numbers other than Arabic numerals for displaying a predetermined number when the number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot game state is reached, and specific characters other than numerals for recognizing that it is a winning number notification display, are displayed in a transparent display mode in specific areas, like the Arabic numerals shown in Figure 11-2 (B).

(Appearance of Acquisition Number Display in First Form of Characteristic Part 20SH)
Fig. 11-3(A) is a diagram showing how the acquisition number display appears in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH. Fig. 11-3(B) is an enlarged view of the part of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by a two-dot chain line in Fig. 11-1(A).

In the example shown in Figures 11-3 (A) and (B), the "butterfly" line of the background image during a jackpot overlaps the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used in the number of wins display 20SHK, but because specific area 20SHI1 is displayed in "white," the background image during a jackpot cannot be seen from specific area 20SHI1. Therefore, in specific area 20SHI1, the "butterfly" line 20SHHS of the background image during a jackpot does not blend in with the line 20SHS1 that forms the specific character "0," and the specific character "0" can be accurately recognized as the Arabic numeral "0."

In addition to the number of winnings display 20SHK, the image display device 5 displays a jackpot display 20SHO to let the player know that it is in a jackpot game state, a decorative pattern display 20SHZ that shows the confirmed decorative pattern that is the jackpot combination that is derived and displayed when it is in a jackpot game state, a round number display 20SHR that shows the number of rounds in the round game in the jackpot game state, and a right hit display 20SHM that suggests to the player that he should hit to the right. Like the number of winnings display 20SHK, the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative pattern display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right hit display 20SHM are also displayed small in the edge area of the display area of the image display device 5 so as not to obstruct the visibility of the background image during a jackpot.

The characters used in the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-hand hit display 20SHM may include characters of the same type as those used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display, and characters of a different type than those used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display. In this embodiment, the characters in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are "numbers" and "katakana" as shown in FIG. 11-4. On the other hand, the jackpot display 20SHO uses "alphabet" and "kanji", which are characters of a different type than those used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display. Also, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ uses "numbers", which are characters of the same type as those used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display. The round number display 20SHR uses "numbers", which are the same type of characters as those used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display, and "alphabet", which are different types of characters from those used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display. The right-hand hit display 20SHM uses "kanji", "hiragana", and "symbols", which are different types of characters from those used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display.

Some of the characters used in the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative pattern display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right-hit display 20SHM are specific characters, regardless of the type of character. The specific areas of the specific characters used in the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative pattern display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right-hit display 20SHM are non-transparent, just like the specific area 20SHI1 of the number of wins display 20SHK, and are displayed in a different display mode from the line 20SHS1 that forms the characters, so the background image during a jackpot cannot be seen from the specific area 20SHI1.

(Example of the performance of the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 11-4 is a diagram showing an example of the presentation operation of the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the display area of the image display device 5 is divided into a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52, which is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51, and various displays are performed by distinguishing between them. In the example shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the area inside the two-dot chain line is the first display area 20SH51, and the area outside the two-dot chain line is the second display area 20SH52.

As shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the performance control CPU 120 displays a background image during a jackpot in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5. The performance control CPU 120 also displays an acquisition number display 20SHK in front of the background image during a jackpot in the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5. Also, as shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the second display area 20SH52 also displays a jackpot display, a decorative pattern display, a round number display, and a right hit display.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the big prize opening, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. In FIG. 11-4(A), the number of points won 20SHK is displayed, indicating "990 points," so it can be recognized that 990 game balls have been paid out as prize balls in the big win game state. The performance control CPU 120 updates the number in the number of points won 20SHK each time a game ball is paid out in the big win game state.

In this situation, suppose a gaming ball enters the big prize slot and 15 gaming balls are paid out as prize balls.

In response to the dispensing of 15 game balls, the performance control CPU 120 counts up the number of winning balls display 20SHK by one from "990" to "1005", as shown in Figures 11-4 (B) to (G). In this case, the number of winning balls display 20SHK will go through the round number "1000", which is a so-called "kiriban". In other words, the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached "1000 balls".

Here, the presentation control CPU 120 displays an acquisition number notification display each time "1000" game balls are paid out in the jackpot game state. For example, the presentation control CPU 120 displays an acquisition number notification display of "Over 1000" when the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", and displays an acquisition number notification display of "Over 2000" when the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state reaches "2000".

When the number in the acquisition number display 20SHK reaches the round number "1000", the performance control CPU 120 displays a part of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH on the right edge of the display area of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (D). Then, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (E) to (G), the performance control CPU 120 moves the display position of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, which is displayed in each frame of the image while the number in the acquisition number display 20SHK changes from "1000" to "1005", from the right edge of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the center of the first display area 20SH51. Then, when the number in the acquisition number display 20SHK reaches "1005", the performance control CPU 120 stops and displays the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (G). In this case, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH only needs to be displayed in at least the first display area 20SH51, and may be displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52.

By this type of display control, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed so that it frames in from the outside to the inside of the display area of the image display device 5.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of displaying the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, the performance control CPU 120 ends the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH. In the example shown in FIG. 11-4 (H), the performance control CPU 120 moves the display position of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH displayed in each frame of the video from the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 toward the left edge of the display area.

By this display control, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed so that it frames out from the inside to the outside of the display area of the image display device 5, and the display ends when it is no longer displayed in the display area of the image display device 5.

The performance control CPU 120 may determine that the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH has started when the number on the acquisition number display 20SHK reaches a "round number" and that a part of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH has been displayed, and may perform display control to end the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH when a predetermined period of time has passed from that timing. The performance control CPU 120 may also determine that the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH has started when the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH has been stopped and displayed in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, and may perform display control to end the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH when a predetermined period of time has passed from that timing.

As mentioned above, the specific area of the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed in a transparent display mode. Therefore, as shown in Figures 11-4 (E) to (H), the background image during a jackpot can be seen from the specific area of the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH. For example, in the example shown in Figures 11-4 (E) to (H), the background image during a jackpot can be seen from the specific area of the Arabic numeral "0", which is the specific character used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH.

In addition, the characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger than the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in Figures 11-4 (D) to (H).

The presentation mode when the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is stopped and displayed in the first display area 20SH51 is not limited to the presentation mode in which the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is framed in, stopped, and then framed out. For example, instead of the presentation in which the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is framed in, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may be presented to jump out from the back side of the screen to the front side, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may be presented to gradually emerge, or a character may appear and display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in a speech bubble showing the character's lines. Also, instead of making the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH frame out, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may be made to be sucked from the front side of the screen to the back side, or the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may be made to gradually disappear, or when the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed in a speech bubble showing the character's lines, the character may be made to leave.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the first form of the characteristic part 20SH can be controlled to a jackpot game state. The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 which is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display a background image during a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. The image display device 5 can also display an acquisition number display 20SHK relating to the number of awarded prize balls in front of the background image during a jackpot in the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 can display, at least in the first display region 20SH51, an acquisition number notification display 20SHKH for notifying that the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "round number" on the front side of the background image during the jackpot, an acquisition number notification display of "over 1000" when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000 balls", and an acquisition number notification display of "over 2000" when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "2000 balls". The acquisition number display 20SHK is updated every time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state. On the other hand, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH ends its display when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of display. The characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger in size than the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK. The characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters that form a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters. The specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK do not allow the background image during a jackpot to be seen from the specific area. On the other hand, the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH allow the background image during a jackpot to be seen from the specific area.

With this configuration, the winning number display 20SHK and the winning number notification display 20SHKH, which include the specific characters, can be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image during a jackpot. For example, when a player checks the number of winning balls in a jackpot game state, the winning number display 20SHK is displayed in small characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, and if the background image during a jackpot can be seen from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters may appear different from the actual characters. However, by making the background image during a jackpot invisible from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters can be accurately recognized. Also, unlike the winning number display 20SHK, the winning number notification display 20SHKH is not constantly displayed during a jackpot game state, but is displayed for a limited period of time to congratulate the player when the number of prize balls awarded during a jackpot game state reaches a "round number." Since it is displayed in large letters in the wide first display area 20SH51, by making the background image during a jackpot visible from a specific area of the specific letters, it is possible to show at least a little of the background image during a jackpot in the prominent display position of the first display area.

As mentioned above, the specific characters include the Arabic numerals "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9".

This configuration allows the number of wins display 20SHK and the number of wins notification display 20SHKH, which use Arabic numerals, to be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image during a jackpot.

Also, as described above, when the image display device 5 displays the acquisition number display 20SHK, it displays the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH.

With this configuration, even when the winning number notification display 20SHKH is displayed, the number of winning balls in the jackpot game state can be accurately ascertained from the winning number display 20SHK.

As described above, the image display device 5 can also display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52.

This configuration makes the winning number notification display 20SHKH easier for the player to see, and can conveniently notify the player that the number of winning balls awarded during a jackpot game has reached the "kiriban" number.

As described above, the image display device 5 can display the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-hit display 20SHM in front of the background image during a jackpot in the second display area 20SH52. The characters used in the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-hit display 20SHM include characters of the same type as the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, and characters of a different type from the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, and each type of character includes a specific character that forms a specific area surrounded by lines that form the character. Furthermore, the specific characters used in the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative pattern display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right-hand hit display 20SHM cannot be seen from the specific area in the background image during the jackpot.

With this configuration, the specific characters can be accurately recognized for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-hand hit display 20SHM.

As described above, the image display device 5 can display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH by stopping it in the first display area 20SH51, and when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is framed in to the stopping position in the first display area 20SH51, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is framed out.

This configuration can improve the presentation effect when the winning number notification display 20SHKH is displayed.

(Second form of characteristic portion 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine relating to the second embodiment of the characteristic portion 20SH will be described with reference to Fig. 11-5 to Fig. 11-7. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the second embodiment of the characteristic portion 20SH, the ratio of the size of the specific region of the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH to the region of the lines forming the characters is smaller than that of the specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK.

The following describes the pachinko gaming machine 1 with respect to the second form of the characteristic part 20SH having such features. Note that the description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Display of Acquisition Number in Second Form of Characteristic Part 20SH)
FIG. 11-5(A) is a diagram showing an example of a display form of Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characteristic part 20SH.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the second form of the characteristic part 20SH uses three-dimensional characters to display the winning number notification. Here, three-dimensional characters are a character format that makes the characters appear to jump out in front of the player. The line area that forms the three-dimensional characters includes an area 20SHS21 that represents the characters, and an area 20SHS22 that represents the depth of the three-dimensional characters.

Among these three-dimensional characters, there are some that correspond to specific characters. In the example shown in FIG. 11-5(A), the specific regions 20SHI3 of the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used to display the number of wins notification, which correspond to specific characters "0," "4," "6," "8," and "9," are displayed in a transparent display mode, and when displayed in front of the background image during a jackpot, the background image during a jackpot can be seen from the specific regions 20SHI3.

(Comparison between non-3D characters and 3D characters)
FIG. 11-5(B) is an explanatory diagram for comparing non-three-dimensional characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions with three-dimensional characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions.

Comparing the non-three-dimensional characters used to display the number of acquisitions and the three-dimensional characters used to notify the number of acquisitions, the size of the line area 20SHI1 forming the non-three-dimensional characters is the same as the size of the area 20SHS21 expressing the characters in the line area forming the three-dimensional characters. In the case of a non-three-dimensional specific character, the area surrounded by the inner outline of the line area 20SHI1 forming the characters becomes the specific area 20SHI1. On the other hand, in the case of a three-dimensional specific character, the line area forming the characters includes the area 20SHS22 expressing the depth of the characters, so the area surrounded by the inner outline of the area 20SHS21 expressing the characters and the outline of the area 20SHS22 expressing the depth of the characters located on the inner side becomes the specific area 20SHI3. Therefore, the size of the three-dimensional specific characters used to display the number of acquisitions is smaller than the non-three-dimensional specific characters used to display the number of acquisitions by the size of the area 20SHS22 that represents the depth of the characters, which is located on the inner side of the area 20SHS21 that represents the characters, and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area that forms the characters is smaller.

(Modification of Acquisition Number Notification Display in the Second Form of Characteristic Part 20SH)
FIG. 11-6(A) is a diagram showing a first modified example of the display mode of Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characteristic part 20SH.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-6(A), the specific region 20SHI4 for the specific characters "0," "4," "6," "8," and "9" among the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used in the winning number notification display is displayed in "white," and when it is displayed in front of the background image during a jackpot, the background image during a jackpot cannot be seen from the specific region 20SHI3.

(Comparison between non-three-dimensional characters and three-dimensional characters in Modification Example 1)
FIG. 11-6(B) is an explanatory diagram for comparing non-three-dimensional characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions and three-dimensional characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions in the first modified example.

In the first modified example, when comparing the non-three-dimensional characters used to display the number of acquisitions and the three-dimensional characters used to notify the number of acquisitions, the size of the line area 20SHI1 forming the non-three-dimensional characters is the same as the size of the area 20SH31 expressing the characters in the line area forming the three-dimensional characters. In the non-three-dimensional specific characters, the area surrounded by the inner outline of the line area 20SHI1 forming the characters becomes the specific area 20SHI1. On the other hand, in the three-dimensional specific characters, the line area forming the characters includes the area 20SH32 expressing the depth of the characters, so the area surrounded by the inner outline of the area 20SH31 expressing the characters and the outline of the area 20SH32 expressing the depth of the characters on the inner side becomes the specific area 20SHI4. Therefore, the three-dimensional specific characters used to display the number of acquisitions are smaller in size than the non-three-dimensional specific characters used to display the number of acquisitions by the size of the area 20SH32 that represents the depth of the character and is located on the inner side of the area 20SH31 that represents the character, and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area that forms the character is smaller.

(Modification of Acquisition Number Notification Display in the Second Form of Characteristic Part 20SH)
FIG. 11-7(A) is a diagram showing a modified example 2 of the display mode of Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characteristic part 20SH.

In variant 2, as shown in FIG. 11-7(A), the characters used to display the number of acquisitions are displayed in a three-color gradation in the line area that forms the characters, and are displayed in one of display modes A to G, which have different combinations of the three-color gradation.

The line region forming the character in display mode A is colored in a three-color gradation with the upper region 20SHSU being "red," the central region 20SHSC being "orange," and the lower region 20SHSD being "yellow." The line region forming the character in display mode B is colored in a three-color gradation with the upper region 20SHSU being "orange," the central region 20SHSC being "yellow," and the lower region 20SHSD being "green." The line region forming the character in display mode C is colored in a three-color gradation with the upper region 20SHSU being "yellow," the central region 20SHSC being "green," and the lower region 20SHSD being "light blue." The line region forming the character in display mode D is colored in a three-color gradation with the upper region 20SHSU being "green," the central region 20SHSC being "light blue," and the lower region 20SHSD being "blue." The area of the lines forming the characters in display mode E is colored in a three-color gradation with the upper area 20SHSU being "light blue," the center area 20SHSC being "blue," and the lower area 20SHSD being "purple." The area of the lines forming the characters in display mode F is colored in a three-color gradation with the upper area 20SHSU being "blue," the center area 20SHSC being "purple," and the lower area 20SHSD being "red." The area of the lines forming the characters in display mode G is colored in a three-color gradation with the upper area 20SHSU being "purple," the center area 20SHSC being "red," and the lower area 20SHSD being "yellow."

The image display device 5 changes the style of the characters used to display the number of acquisitions notification over time in the following order: Display style A → Display style B → Display style C → Display style D → Display style E → Display style F → Display style G → Display style A → ....

Figure 11-7 (B) shows an example of the color change that accompanies the operation of the acquisition number notification display in variant 2.

In variant 2, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (B), the speed at which the display mode of the acquisition number notification display changes differs between when the acquisition number notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 and when the acquisition number notification display is moving (frame-in/frame-out).

In the example shown in FIG. 11-7(B), the acquisition number notification display changes from display mode A to display mode D while moving (frame-in) from the right edge of the display area of the image display device 5 to the center of the first display area 20SH51 over 0.35 seconds. The acquisition number display then changes from display mode D to display mode G while stopped and displayed for 1 second in the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. The acquisition number notification display then changes from display mode G to display mode C while moving (frame-out) from the center of the first display area 20SH51 to the left edge of the display area of the image display device 5 over 0.35 seconds.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the second form of the characteristic part 20SH can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 which is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display a background image during a jackpot corresponding to a jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. The image display device 5 can also display an acquisition number display relating to the number of awarded prize balls in front of the background image during a jackpot in the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 can display, at least in the first display region 20SH51, an acquisition number notification display of "over 1000" when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000 balls" as an acquisition number notification display for notifying that the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "kiriban", and can display an acquisition number notification display of "over 2000" when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "2000 balls". The acquisition number display is updated every time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state. On the other hand, the acquisition number notification display ends when a predetermined period has elapsed since the display started. The characters used for the acquisition number notification display are characters of a size larger than the characters used for the acquisition number display. The characters used for the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. The specific characters used to display the number of winnings are not visible from the specific area against the background image during a jackpot. The specific characters used to display the number of winnings notification have a smaller ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area that forms the characters than the specific characters used to display the number of winnings.

With this configuration, the winning number display and winning number notification display, including the specific characters, can be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image during a jackpot. For example, when a player checks the number of winning balls in a jackpot game state, the player checks the winning number display, but the winning number display is displayed in small characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, and if the background image during a jackpot can be seen from the specific area of the specific characters, there is a possibility that the specific characters will appear different from their original characters. However, by making the background image during a jackpot invisible from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters can be accurately recognized.

The characters used to display the number of wins are three-dimensional characters. The line area that forms the three-dimensional characters includes an area that represents the characters and an area that represents the depth of the characters.

This configuration can enhance the presentation effect of the winning number notification display.

As mentioned above, the specific characters used to display the winning number notification can be seen from the specific area 20SHI3 along with the background image during the jackpot.

With this configuration, the winning number notification display is not displayed at all times during a jackpot game state like the winning number display, but is displayed only for a specified period of time to congratulate the player when the number of prize balls awarded during a jackpot game state reaches the "kiriban" number. Since it is displayed in large letters in the wide first display area 20SH51 and the ratio of the size of the specific area 20SHI3 to the size of the line areas 20SHS21, 20SHS22 that form the letters is small, not only can the risk of misidentifying the letters be reduced even if the background image during a jackpot is visible from the specific area 20SHI3 of the specific letters be reduced, but also the presentation effect can be enhanced by making the background image during a jackpot visible from the specific area 20SHI3 of the specific letters.

As mentioned above, the specific characters used to display the winning number notification in variant 1 are not visible from specific area 20SHI4 against the background image during a jackpot.

With this configuration, the winning number notification display is not displayed at all times during a jackpot game state like the winning number display, but is displayed only for a specified period of time to congratulate the player when the number of prize balls awarded during a jackpot game state reaches the "kiriban" number, and is displayed in large letters in the wide first display area 20SH51, and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area that forms the letters is small, so not only can the sense of incongruity be reduced even if the background image during a jackpot is not visible from the specific area of the specific letters, but by making the background image during a jackpot not visible from the specific area of the specific letters, it is possible to prevent the letters from being misinterpreted.

As described above, the characters used in the acquisition number notification display in variant example 2 are displayed with a three-color gradation in the line areas that form the characters. The image display device 5 changes the appearance of the characters used in the acquisition number notification display over time in the following order: Display appearance A → Display appearance B → Display appearance C → Display appearance D → Display appearance E → Display appearance F → Display appearance G → Display appearance A → ... The speed at which the display appearance of the acquisition number notification display changes differs between when the acquisition number notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 and when the acquisition number notification display is moving (frame-in/frame-out).

With this configuration, the display mode changes depending on the movement speed of the acquisition number notification display, enhancing the presentation effect.

(Explanation of the third form of the characteristic portion 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the characteristic part 20SH will be described with reference to Fig. 11-8 to Fig. 11-11. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment of the characteristic part 20SH, the specific characters used in the result display are visible in a specific area of the ending background image.

The following describes the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the third form of the characteristic part 20SH having such features. Note that descriptions of parts similar to those described above will be omitted.

(Arabic numerals used in results display)
FIG. 11-8 is a diagram showing an example of a display form of Arabic numerals used for displaying the result in the third form of the characteristic portion 20SH.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 finishes the final round of play, it executes an ending presentation corresponding to the end of the jackpot play state. At this time, the image display device 5 displays an ending background video. In addition, while the image display device 5 is displaying the ending background video, it displays a result display announcing the total number of winning balls awarded in the jackpot play state.

The result display uses numbers to show the total number of winning balls awarded during a jackpot game, and characters other than numbers to make it clear that it is a result display. The numbers used to display the result are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc.

Among the characters used in the result display, there are some that correspond to specific characters. In the third form of the characteristic part 20SH, as shown in FIG. 11-8, the specific regions of the specific characters used in the result display are displayed in a transparent display mode. In the example shown in FIG. 11-8, the specific regions 20SHI5 of the Arabic numerals "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" that correspond to specific characters among the Arabic numerals used in the result display are displayed in a transparent display mode.

Of the characters used to display the results, numbers other than Arabic numerals to indicate the total number of winning balls awarded in a jackpot game state, and characters other than numerals to recognize that it is a result display, are also displayed in a transparent display mode in specific areas, such as the Arabic numerals shown in Figure 11-8.

(Various effects during big win game mode)
11-9 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation period of various presentations in a big win gaming state. FIG. 11-10 is a diagram showing an example of presentation operation of various presentations in a big win gaming state.

When reserved information is stored in a jackpot gaming state, the presentation control CPU 120 can execute a reserved consecutive win notification that indicates that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state in accordance with the reserved information stored. For example, in a jackpot gaming state of 10 rounds in total, the presentation control CPU 120 starts a reserved consecutive win notification at timing T1 when 9 rounds of round play end and the 10th round, which is the final round, begins, as shown in Figures 11-9 and 11-10 (A) to (B).

When the reserved consecutive wins notification is executed, as shown in FIG. 11-10(B), the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5 displays an effect image of the reserved consecutive wins notification in front of the jackpot background image, which corresponds to the progress of a round of play in the jackpot game state. In the example shown in FIG. 11-10(B), a "flame" effect image 20SHE is displayed as the effect image of the reserved consecutive wins notification.

In the example shown in Figure 11-10 (B), the "flame" lines of the effect image overlap the back side of the specific area of the specific character "0" used in the acquisition number display 20SHK, but because the specific area is displayed in "white," the effect image cannot be seen from the specific area. Therefore, in the specific area, the "flame" lines of the effect image do not blend in with the lines that form the specific character "0," and the specific character "0" can be accurately recognized as the Arabic numeral "0."

As shown in FIG. 11-9 and FIG. 11-10(B) to (C), at the timing T2 when the final round of play ends and the ending performance begins, the performance control CPU 120 ends the pending consecutive win notification and begins the ending performance. When the ending performance begins, the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 begins displaying an ending background video at a specified brightness. In the example shown in FIG. 11-10(C), an ending background video of cherry blossom petals falling from the back of the screen is displayed in the first display area 20SH51. Also, the words "Jackpot End" are displayed in front of the ending background video to indicate that the jackpot play state has ended.

Here, the performance control CPU 120 ends the pending consecutive wins notification before the ending background video starts to be displayed at timing T2. Therefore, when the ending background video is being displayed, the effect video 20SHE of the pending consecutive wins notification is not displayed. In other words, the effect video 20SHE of the pending consecutive wins notification is displayed when the ending background video is not being displayed.

The ending background video only needs to be an image displayed in at least the first display area 20SH51, and may be displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, as shown in FIG. 11-10(D). In the example shown in FIG. 11-10(D), cherry blossom petals are fluttering across the entire screen as the ending background video.

As shown in Figures 11-9 and 11-10 (D) to (E), at time T3 when the result display begins, the performance control CPU 120 reduces the brightness of the ending background video to a specific brightness darker than a predetermined brightness, pauses the progression of the ending background video, and displays it as a still image. The performance control CPU 120 then displays the result display 20SHRE in front of the ending background video at a brightness brighter than the specific brightness of the still image of the ending background video. In the example shown in Figure 11-10 (E), the fluttering cherry blossoms stop, and the result display 20SHRE is displayed in white letters.

As mentioned above, the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE are displayed in a transparent manner in the specific area 20SHI5. Therefore, the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE and the ending background video can be seen from the specific area 20SHI5.

The characters used in the result display 20SHRE are larger than the characters used in the number of wins display 20SHK, as shown in Figures 11-10 (A), (B), and (E). The result display 20SHRE only needs to be displayed in at least the first display area 20SH51, and may be displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, as shown in Figure 11-10 (E).

(The setting is hinted at in the ending background video)
FIG. 11-11 is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion presentation using an ending background video.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the probability of winning a jackpot changes according to the setting value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6, the probability of winning a jackpot changes by using a display result judgment table according to the setting value. The setting value has six levels from "1" to "6", with "1" being the lowest ball payout rate, and the ball payout rate increases as the value increases in the order of "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". In other words, when the setting value is set to "1", the player has the lowest advantage, and the advantage increases stepwise as the value increases in the order of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". In this embodiment, the setting values "1" to "3" are referred to as "low settings", and the setting values "4" to "6" are referred to as "high settings".

The pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the third form of the characteristic section 20SH is configured to be able to change the setting value, and is also configured to be able to display the above-mentioned ending background image as a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value. For example, when the setting value is set low, the effect control CPU 120 displays an ending background image of cherry blossom snow falling from the back of the screen, as shown in FIG. 11-11(A). On the other hand, when the setting value is set high, the effect control CPU 120 displays an ending background image of large amounts of cherry blossom snow falling from cherry trees in full bloom on the left and right, as shown in FIG. 11-11(B).

Note that the setting suggestion by the ending background video does not have to definitively suggest whether the setting value is set to low or high. For example, when the setting value is set to low, the ending background video shown in FIG. 11-11(B) may be displayed at a sufficiently low rate, and when the setting value is set to high, the ending background video shown in FIG. 11-11(A) may be displayed at a sufficiently low rate.

The ending background video may be presented in a different manner depending on whether the setting is "6," which is the most advantageous setting for the player, or not. The ending background video may be presented in a different manner depending on whether the setting is an odd number or an even number.

Here, the above-mentioned consecutive wins in the reserved lottery notification is one of several types of notification effects that predict the probability of a jackpot, but the setting suggestion effect based on the consecutive wins in the reserved lottery notification is not executed.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the third form of the characteristic part 20SH can be controlled to a jackpot game state. The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 which is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display a jackpot background image corresponding to the progress of a round game in the jackpot game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. The image display device 5 can also display an ending background image corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state in at least the first display area 20SH51. In addition, when the ending background image is not displayed, the image display device 5 can display an effect image 20SHE of a reserved consecutive ball announcement, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state in response to the stored reserved information, in front of the background image during the jackpot in the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 can display an acquisition number display 20SHK relating to the number of awarded prize balls in front of the background image during the jackpot in the second display area 20SH52. In addition, when the ending background image is displayed, the image display device 5 can display a result display 20SHRE, which notifies the total number of awarded prize balls in the jackpot game state, in front of the ending background image at least in the first display area 20SH51. The characters used in the result display 20SHRE are larger in size than the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK. The characters used in the number of wins display 20SHK and the result display 20SHRE include specific characters that form a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters. The specific characters used in the number of wins display 20SHK cannot be seen from the specific area, and the background video during a jackpot and the effect video 20SHRE of the pending consecutive win notice cannot be seen from the specific area. On the other hand, the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE can be seen from the specific area 20SHI5, where the ending background video can be seen.

According to this configuration, the winning number display 20SHK including the specific characters can be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image during a jackpot or the effect image 20SHE of the consecutive wins in reserve, and the result display 20SHRE including the specific characters can be displayed appropriately in relation to the ending background image. For example, when a player checks the number of winning balls in a jackpot game state, the winning number display 20SHK is displayed in small characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52 and may overlap with the effect image 20SHE of the consecutive wins in reserve. If the background image during a jackpot or the effect image 20SHE of the consecutive wins in reserve is visible from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters may appear different from the original characters. However, by making the background image during a jackpot or the effect image 20SHE of the consecutive wins in reserve invisible from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters can be accurately recognized. On the other hand, the result display 20SHRE is displayed in large letters in the wide first display area 20SH51 and does not overlap with the effect image 20SHE of the pending consecutive win notice. Therefore, by making the ending background image visible from a specific area of the specific letters, it is possible to show at least a little of the ending background image in the prominent display position of the first display area 20SH51.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be set to one of multiple setting values "1" to "6" that have different jackpot winning probabilities. The image display device 5 can display an ending background image in a manner that suggests the set value that has been set. The effect image 20SHRE of the reserved consecutive win notification is one of multiple types of notification effects that predict the jackpot reliability, but does not execute a setting suggestion effect based on the reserved consecutive win notification.

With this configuration, there is a possibility that a setting suggestion effect will be executed using the ending background video, which increases the significance of the ending background video being visible from the specific area 20SHI5 of the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE.

As described above, the image display device 5 starts displaying the ending background video at a predetermined brightness. Then, at timing T3 when the image display device 5 starts displaying the result display 20SHRE, the image display device 5 pauses and displays the ending background video at a specific brightness that is darker than the predetermined brightness, and displays the result display 20SHRE at a brightness that is brighter than the specific brightness.

This configuration can improve the visibility of the result display 20SHRE.

(Explanation regarding the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine relating to the fourth embodiment of the characteristic part 20SH will be described with reference to Figs. 11-12 to 11-16. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the fourth embodiment of the characteristic part 20SH, a remaining number display relating to the remaining number of ST times in a probability variable state and a remaining number notification display which notifies the predetermined number of times when the remaining number indicated by the remaining number display becomes a predetermined number can be displayed. The characters used in the remaining number display and the remaining number notification display include specific characters which form a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters. The specific characters used in the remaining number display are not visible from the specific area against the background image during ST. The specific characters used in the remaining number notification display are visible from the specific area against the background image during ST.

The following describes the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH having such features. Note that descriptions of parts similar to those described above will be omitted.

(Background art related to the fourth aspect of the characteristic portion 20SH)
11 and 12 are diagrams showing background art related to the fourth aspect of the characteristic portion 20SH.

Pachinko gaming machines are basically designed so that when comparing advantageous states for the player, such as a special state, time-saving state, or jackpot gaming state, with the normal state, the period during which the player plays in the advantageous state is longer than the period during which the player plays in the normal state.

For example, in a pachinko game machine, when the upper limit number of reserved information is stored, regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game, a shortened variation with a shorter variable display time is more likely to be executed than when the upper limit number of reserved information is not stored. And in a special state with time-saving control, the variable winning ball device changes to an open state, making it easier for winning to occur than in the normal state, so shortened variation is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and it is possible to progress the game faster than in the normal state. Therefore, the period during which play is performed in the normal state is longer than the period during which play is performed in a special state with time-saving control.

The probability variable control ends when either of the following conditions is met first after the end of the jackpot game state: a specified number of STs of special game are played, or the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot." Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display does not become "jackpot" while the probability variable control is being performed, if the specified number of STs of special game are played, the probability variable control ends. The specified number of STs is, for example, 70 times.

In addition, by performing the time-saving control, the variable display time of the special pattern in the special pattern game is shortened compared to when the time-saving control is not performed. The time-saving control ends when either of the following conditions is met first: the special pattern game is played a predetermined number of times after the end of the jackpot game state, or the display result of the variable display becomes a "jackpot." Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display does not become a "jackpot" when the time-saving control is being performed, the time-saving control ends when the special pattern game has been played a predetermined number of times. The predetermined number of times is, for example, 70 times.

The set value for the number of STs and the set value for the number of time-savings may be different values.

When a pachinko game machine is controlled to a high probability state, it may display a remaining number display regarding the remaining number of ST times in the high probability state, as shown in FIG. 11-12(A). In the example shown in FIG. 11-12(A), the remaining number display shows "30 times remaining" since there are 30 ST times remaining.

The remaining number of times display uses numbers to show the remaining number of ST times, and characters other than numbers to make it clear that it is a remaining number of times display. The numbers used to show the remaining number of times are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc. The remaining number of times display shown in Figure 11-12 (A) uses the characters "remaining" and "times" to make it clear that it is a remaining number of times display, and the number "30" to show the remaining number of ST times.

Some characters used to display the remaining number of times also form special regions.

When the pachinko machine is in the high probability state, as shown in FIG. 11-12(A), the ST background image corresponding to the high probability state is displayed over the entire display area of the image display device. In the example shown in FIG. 11-12(A), the ST background image is displayed in a manner that makes it appear as if the screen is cracked. The ST background image is an image that is displayed behind the other images displayed on the image display device in the high probability state. The ST background image contains many lines that represent animation pictures and effects.

The remaining number of times display is displayed small in an edge area that does not impede the visibility of the variable display of the decorative pattern in the display area of the image display device. When the background image during ST changes over time, the lines of the background image during ST may overlap the back of the remaining number of times display. Furthermore, when a specific character is displayed in the remaining number of times display, such as the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by a two-dot chain line in Figure 11-12 (A), if the lines of the image during ST overlap the back of a specific area of the specific character, the lines of the background image during ST may blend in with the lines that form the specific character, causing the specific character to appear different from its original character.

Figure 11-12 (B) is an enlarged view of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by a two-dot chain line in Figure 11-12 (A). In the example shown in Figures 11-12 (A) and (B), the lines of the background image during ST are superimposed on the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used to display the remaining number of plays, and the lines of the background image during ST are assimilated with the lines that form the specific character "0", so that the specific character "0" appears as the Arabic numeral "8" instead of the Arabic numeral "0".

In this way, if the characters showing the remaining number of times are mistaken for characters that are different from the actual characters, the remaining number of ST times in the special probability state cannot be accurately recognized. However, for example, it is difficult to adjust the position of the lines in the background image during ST so that the lines do not overlap with specific areas of specific characters.

The fourth form of characteristic part 20SH was made in consideration of this background, and the fourth form of characteristic part 20SH will be described below.

(Display of remaining number of times in the fourth embodiment of the characteristic portion 20SH)
11-13 are diagrams showing an example of a display form of Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of times in the fourth embodiment of the characteristic portion 20SH.

In the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH, the specific region 20SHI6 of the Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of times, which correspond to the specific characters "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9", is displayed in a non-transparent display mode different from the display mode of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. In the example shown in FIG. 11-13, the color of the lines 20SHS6 of the Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of times is "black", while the specific region 20SHI6 of the specific characters "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" is displayed in "white", and when it is displayed in front of the background image during ST, the background image during ST cannot be seen from the specific region 20SHI6.

In addition, the display mode of the specific region 20SHI6 is not limited to a color different from the color of the lines 20SHS6 that form the character, but may be a display mode that has a high contrast with the display mode of the lines 20SHS6 that form the character to the extent that the specific region 20SHI6 and the lines 20SHS6 that form the character can be accurately distinguished.

For example, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color that has a high contrast with the color of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. In that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a brightness that has a low contrast with the brightness of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture that has a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture that has a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters.

Also, for example, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a brightness that has a high contrast with the brightness of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color that has a low contrast with the color of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture that has a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture that has a low contrast with the texture of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters.

Also, for example, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture with high contrast to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color with low contrast to the color of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a brightness with low contrast to the brightness of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture with low contrast to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters.

Also, for example, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture with high contrast relative to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color with low contrast relative to the color of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a brightness with low contrast relative to the brightness of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture with low contrast relative to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 that form the characters.

Of the characters used to display the remaining number of times, numbers other than Arabic numerals to display the remaining number of ST times, and specific characters other than numerals to recognize that they are displaying the remaining number of times, are displayed in a display mode in which the specific area is not transparent and is different from the display mode of the lines that form the characters, as in the Arabic numerals shown in Figures 11-13.

(Display of remaining number of times in the fourth embodiment of characteristic portion 20SH)
FIG. 11-14 is a diagram showing an example of a display form of Arabic numerals used for the remaining number notification display in the fourth embodiment of the characteristic part 20SH.

When the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times, the pachinko gaming machine 1 displays a remaining number of times notification display to notify the predetermined number of times.

The remaining number of times notification display uses numbers to display the specified number of remaining times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a specified number, and characters other than numbers to make it clear that it is a remaining number of times notification display. The numbers used in the remaining number of times notification display are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc.

The remaining number of times display is displayed in multiple different modes with different transparency, as shown in FIG. 11-14. The remaining number of times display shown in FIG. 11-14(A) is a display mode in which the line areas forming the characters of the remaining number of times display are not transparent, and the background of the characters is not visible through the line areas. The remaining number of times display shown in FIG. 11-14(B) is a display mode in which the line areas forming the characters of the remaining number of times display are transparent, and the background of the characters is visible through the line areas.

The remaining number of times notification is also displayed in three-dimensional characters. In a display mode in which the background of the characters is not visible, the line area forming the three-dimensional characters includes area 20SHS71 representing the characters and area 20SHS72A representing the depth of the three-dimensional characters. In a display mode in which the background of the characters is visible through, area 20SHS71 representing the characters is displayed through transparency, so that the area that was displayed as area 20SHS72A representing the depth of the three-dimensional characters in a display mode in which the background of the characters is not visible is displayed as area 20SHS72B representing the bottom surface of the three-dimensional characters.

Among these three-dimensional characters, there are some that correspond to specific characters. In the example shown in FIG. 11-14, the specific regions 20SHI7 of the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used to display the remaining number of plays, which correspond to the specific characters "0," "4," "6," "8," and "9," are displayed in a transparent display mode, and when they are displayed in front of the background image during ST, the background image during ST can be seen from the specific regions 20SHI7.

As shown in FIG. 11-14, the specific area 20SHI7 of the remaining number display differs depending on whether the remaining number display is displayed in a non-transparent manner or a transparent manner. In the example shown in FIG. 11-14, the remaining number display is displayed in a non-transparent manner, and the area of the lines forming the characters includes the area 20SHS72A that represents the depth of the characters, so the area surrounded by the inner outline of the area 20SHS71 that represents the characters and the outline of the area 20SHS72A that represents the depth of the characters located on the inner side of that becomes the specific area 20SHI7. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 11-14(B), the remaining number display is displayed in a transparent manner, and the area 20SHS71 that represents the characters is displayed transparently, so the area surrounded by the inner outline of the area 20SHS72B that represents the bottom surface of the three-dimensional character becomes the specific area 20SHI7.

(Appearance of remaining number display in the fourth form of characteristic portion 20SH)
Fig. 11-15(A) is a diagram showing how the remaining number display appears in the fourth embodiment of the characteristic part 20SH. Fig. 11-15(B) is an enlarged view of the part of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by a two-dot chain line in Fig. 11-15(A).

In the example shown in Figures 11-15 (A) and (B), the lines of the background image during ST are superimposed on the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used in the remaining number display 20SHST, but because specific area 20SHI6 is displayed in "white," the background image during ST cannot be seen from specific area 20SHI6. Therefore, in specific area 20SHI6, it does not blend in with the lines 20SHHS2 of the background image during ST, and the specific character "0" can be accurately recognized as the Arabic numeral "0."

In addition to the remaining number of times display 20SHST, the image display device 5 also displays the number of times acquired 20SHK, the right-hit display 20SHM, and the probability of winning 20SHRU to notify the player that they are in a probability of winning state. Like the remaining number of times display 20SHST, the number of times acquired 20SHK, the right-hit display 20SHM, and the probability of winning 20SHRU are also displayed small in the edge area that does not obstruct the visibility of the decorative patterns in the display area of the image display device 5.

The characters used in the number of wins display 20SHK, right-hit display 20SHM, and probability variable display 20SHRU may include characters of the same type as those used in the remaining number of times display 20SHST and the remaining number of times notification display, and characters of a different type than those used in the remaining number of times display 20SHST and the remaining number of times notification display. In this embodiment, the characters used in the remaining number of times display 20SHST and the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are "numbers," "hiragana," and "kanji," as shown in FIG. 11-17. On the other hand, the probability variable display 20SHRU uses "alphabet," which is a different type of character than those used in the remaining number of times display 20SHST and the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH. The number of wins display 20SHK uses "numbers," which are the same type of characters as those used in the remaining number of wins display 20SHST and the remaining number of wins notification display 20SHSTH, and "katakana," which is a different type of character from those used in the remaining number of wins display 20SHST and the remaining number of wins notification display 20SHSTH. The right-hit display 20SHM uses "hiragana" and "kanji," which are the same type of characters as those used in the remaining number of wins display 20SHST and the remaining number of wins notification display 20SHSTH, and "symbols," which are a different type of character from those used in the remaining number of wins display 20SHST and the remaining number of wins notification display 20SHSTH.

Some characters used in the acquisition count display 20SHK, right-hit display 20SHM, and probability bonus display 20SHRU are specific characters, regardless of the type of character. The specific regions of the specific characters used in the acquisition count display 20SHK, right-hit display 20SHM, and probability bonus display 20SHRU, like the specific region 20SHI6 of the remaining number display 20SHST, are non-transparent and are displayed in a different display mode from the line 20SHS6 that forms the characters, so the background image during ST cannot be seen from the specific region 20SHI6.

(Example of the remaining number display and remaining number notification display in the fourth embodiment of the characteristic portion 20SH)
Fig. 11-16 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the relationship between the variable display and the remaining number of times notification display in the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH. Fig. 11-17 is a diagram showing an example of the remaining number of times display and the remaining number of times notification display in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH.

As shown in FIG. 11-17, the performance control CPU 120 displays the remaining number of times display 20SHST in the second display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 11-17(A) to (B), the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the number indicating the remaining number of ST times in the remaining number of times display 20SHST each time a variable display is executed.

As shown in Figures 11-16 and 11-17 (A) to (B), when the variable display is started where the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display becomes a predetermined number of times, the performance control CPU 120 starts displaying the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH, which notifies the predetermined number of times, in a non-transparent display mode. For example, when the variable display is started where the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display becomes 60, 50, 40, 30, 20, or 10, the performance control CPU 120 starts displaying the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH, which notifies the number of times, in a non-transparent display mode. As shown in Figures 11-17 (B) to (D), the characters used in the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH are larger in size than the characters used in the remaining number of times display 20SHST. In the example shown in FIG. 11-17, when the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH is displayed, the number of times of winning display 20SHK is also displayed, but the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH is displayed in a display area different from the display area in which the number of times of winning display 20SHK is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-16 and FIG. 11-17(B) to (C), when a first period has elapsed since the display of the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH was started, the performance control CPU 120 changes the display mode of the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH from a non-transparent display mode to a transparent display mode. Then, as shown in FIG. 11-16 and FIG. 11-17(B) to (E), when a second period has elapsed since the display mode of the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH was changed, the performance control CPU 120 ends the display of the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can perform variable display based on multiple types of variation patterns with different variable display times.

The remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is a display for notifying the user of a specified number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display becomes a specified number. Therefore, if the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed across multiple variable displays, the user may misinterpret the remaining number of ST times.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to be able to end the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in one variable display, the total period of the first period in which the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in a non-transparent display mode and the second period in which the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in a transparent display mode is set to be shorter than the variable display time of the type of variation pattern with the shortest variable display time.

With this configuration, as shown in FIG. 11-16, in a variable display where the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display becomes a predetermined number, regardless of the type of variable display based on the change pattern, the display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH can be terminated in that one variable display.

Here, the first display region 20SH51 includes the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left," "middle," and "right" described above. Meanwhile, the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in front of the identification information in at least each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the first display region 20SH51. Therefore, if the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed while the non-transparent remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, there is a possibility that the display result cannot be recognized.

In this embodiment, therefore, in order to allow the display result of the variable display to be recognized, the first period during which the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in a non-transparent display mode is set to end before the timing at which the display result of the variable display of the type of variation pattern with the shortest variable display time is derived.

With this configuration, as shown in Figure 11-16, in a variable display where the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display becomes a predetermined number, the display result of the variable display can be easily recognized regardless of the type of variable display based on the variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-17(D), the remaining number of times indicator 20SHSTH is displayed when the display result of the variable display is derived, but since the display mode of the remaining number of times indicator 20SHSTH has changed to a transparent display mode, the identification information in the background of the characters can be seen from the area of the lines that form the characters of the remaining number of times indicator 20SHSTH.

In this embodiment, the change in the display mode of the remaining number of times indicator 20SHSTH is controlled so that the remaining number of times indicator 20SHSTH is displayed in a transparent display mode when the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. However, if a pseudo consecutive performance is executed in a variable display where the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times indicator 20SHST is a predetermined number, the remaining number of times indicator 20SHSTH may be displayed in a transparent display mode when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH can be controlled to a probability variable state accompanied by time-saving control that allows the game to proceed faster than in a normal state. The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5. The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display a background image during ST in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. The image display device 5 can also display a remaining number display 20SHST relating to the remaining number of STs in the probability variable state in front of the background image during ST in the second display area 20SH52. Furthermore, the image display device 5 can display, at least in the first display region 20SH51, a remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH for notifying the predetermined number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST becomes a predetermined number, on the front side of the background image during ST. The remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH for notifying "60" when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST becomes 60, and the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH for notifying "50" when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST becomes 50, as the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH for notifying the predetermined number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST becomes 50. The remaining number of times display 20SHST is updated every time the variable display is executed. On the other hand, the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH ends its display when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of display. The characters used in the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are characters of a larger size than the characters used in the remaining number of times display 20SHST. The characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH include a specific area surrounded by lines that form the characters. The specific characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST are not visible from the specific area 20SHI6 against the background image during ST. On the other hand, the specific characters used in the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH are visible from the specific area 20SHI7 against the background image during ST.

With this configuration, the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH, which include specific characters, can be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image during ST. For example, when a player checks the remaining number of STs in a probability variable state, the player checks the remaining number display 20SHST, but the remaining number display 20SHST is displayed in small characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, and if the background image during ST is visible from the specific area 20SHI6 of the specific characters, there is a possibility that the specific characters will appear to be different characters from the original characters. However, by making the background image during ST invisible from the specific area 20SHI6 of the specific characters, the specific characters can be accurately recognized. Furthermore, the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is not displayed at all times like the remaining number of times display 20SHST, but is displayed only for a specified period of time to alert the player that the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST has reached a specified number, and since it is displayed in large letters in the wide first display area 20SH51, by making the background image during ST visible from the specific area 20SHI7 of the specific letters, it is possible to show at least a little of the background image during ST in the prominent display position of the first display area 20SH51.

As described above, the image display device 5 can display the characters used in the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH in a transparent display mode in which the image on the back is visible through the lines that form the characters.

This configuration allows the player to see the background image while the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, so that unnecessary stress is not caused to the player.

As described above, the first display area 20SH51 includes the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. The image display device 5 can display the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH on the front side of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R.

This configuration allows the player to see the variable display of the decorative symbols while the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH is displayed, so that unnecessary stress is not caused to the player.

Also, as described above, when the display result of the variable display is being derived and displayed, the image display device 5 displays the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a transparent display mode.

With this configuration, even if the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed while the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, the display result of the variable display can be recognized.

As described above, the image display device 5 can display the winning number display 20SHK relating to the number of prize balls awarded. The image display device 5 then displays the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a display area different from the display area in which the winning number display 20SHK is displayed.

This configuration can prevent the visibility of the number of wins display 20SHK from being reduced due to the remaining number of wins notification display 20SHSTH being displayed.

In the above explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine capable of playing a game in which medals are inserted, a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

(Description of Means Related to Characteristic Part 20SH)
(1) A gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the characteristic portion 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.), and is equipped with a display means (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area that is a region around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (e.g., the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area (e.g., the image display device 5 displays a background image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, etc.). and the like), and in the second display area, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying, in front of the background image during a jackpot, an amount display relating to the amount of gaming value that has been granted (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying, in front of the background image during a jackpot, an acquired number display 20SHK relating to the number of prize balls granted), and at least in the first display area, in front of the background image, as notification displays for notifying that the amount of gaming value granted has reached a predetermined amount, a first notification display for notifying that the amount of gaming value granted has reached a first predetermined amount and a second notification display for notifying that the amount of gaming value granted has reached a second predetermined amount (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying, in front of the background image during a jackpot, at least in the first display area 20SH51, an acquired number display 20SHK relating to the number of prize balls granted in a jackpot gaming state As the winning number notification display 20SHKH, when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", the winning number notification display "over 1000" can be displayed, and when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "2000", the winning number notification display "over 2000" can be displayed), the awarded amount display is updated every time a gaming value is awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the winning number notification display 20SHK is updated every time a gaming ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state), the notification display ends when a specific period has elapsed since the start of the display (for example, the winning number notification display 20SHKH ends when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the display), and the characters used in the notification display are characters of a size larger than the characters used in the awarded amount display (for example, the winning number notification display 20SH the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger in size than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK), the characters used for the award amount display and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area is formed surrounded by lines forming the characters (for example, the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area is formed surrounded by lines forming the characters), the specific characters used for the award amount display are such that the background image is not visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK are such that the background image during a jackpot is not visible from the specific area), and the specific characters used for the notification display are such that the background image is visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are such that the background image during a jackpot is visible from the specific area).

According to this configuration, the given amount display and the notification display including the specific characters can be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image. For example, when a player checks the given amount of the gaming value given in the advantageous state, the player checks the given amount display, but the given amount display is displayed in small characters in the narrow second display area, and if the background image is visible from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters may appear different from the original characters. However, by making the background image invisible from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters can be accurately recognized. In addition, the notification display is not displayed at all times in the advantageous state like the given amount display, but is displayed only for a specified period of time to congratulate the player when the given amount of the gaming value given in the advantageous state reaches a specified amount, and is displayed in large characters in the wide first display area. Therefore, by making the background image visible from the specific area of the specific characters, it is possible to show at least a little of the background image in the conspicuous display position of the first display area.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, the specific characters may include the Arabic numerals 0, 4, 6, 8, and 9 (for example, the specific characters may include the Arabic numerals "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9").

This configuration allows the display of the amount of the grant and the notification using Arabic numerals to be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, the display means may display the notification display when the award amount display is displayed (for example, the image display device 5 may display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH when the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed).

With this configuration, even when the notification display is displayed, the amount of gaming value awarded during the jackpot gaming state can be accurately ascertained from the award amount display.

(4) In any of the gaming machines described above in (1) to (3), the display means may be capable of displaying the notification display in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 may be capable of displaying the winning number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52).

This configuration makes the notification display more noticeable to the player, and can conveniently notify the player that the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state has reached a predetermined amount.

(5) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (4) above, the display means is capable of displaying a specific display relating to the advantageous state in front of the background image in the second area (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying a jackpot display 20SHO, a decorative pattern display 20SHZ, a round number display 20SHR, and a right-hit display 20SHM in front of the background image during a jackpot in the second display area 20SH52, etc.), and the characters used in the specific display include characters of the same type as the characters used in the award amount display and the notification display, and characters of a different type from the characters used in the award amount display and the notification display, and both types of characters include specific characters in which a specific area is formed surrounded by lines forming the characters (for example, a jackpot display The characters used in the display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-hand hit display 20SHM include characters of the same type as the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, and characters of different types from the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, and both types of characters include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed, etc.), and the specific characters used in the specific displays are such that the background image cannot be seen from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-hand hit display 20SHM are such that the background image cannot be seen from the specific area during a jackpot, etc.).

This configuration allows specific characters to be accurately recognized even in specific displays.

(6) The gaming machine according to the second form of the characteristic part 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (e.g., can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.), and is equipped with a display means (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area that is a region around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (e.g., the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area (e.g., the image display device 5 displays a jackpot background image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, and the like), in the second display area, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying, in front of the background image during a jackpot, an awarded amount display relating to the awarded amount of gaming value (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying, in front of the background image during a jackpot, an acquired number display relating to the number of prize balls awarded, and the like), and at least in the first display area, in front of the background image, a first alert display notifying that the awarded amount of gaming value has reached a first predetermined amount and a second alert display notifying that the awarded amount of gaming value has reached a second predetermined amount, as alert displays notifying that the awarded amount of gaming value has reached a first predetermined amount and a second alert display notifying that the awarded amount of gaming value has reached a second predetermined amount (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying, in front of the background image during a jackpot, at least in the first display area 20SH51, an acquired number alert display notifying that the number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot gaming state has reached a "round number" number, as alert displays notifying that the number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot gaming state has reached a round number). When the number of prize balls awarded in the advantageous state reaches "1000", an acquisition number notification display of "over 1000" can be displayed, and when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "2000", an acquisition number notification display of "over 2000" can be displayed), the acquisition amount display is updated every time gaming value is awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the acquisition number display is updated every time gaming balls are paid out as prize balls in the jackpot game state), the notification display ends when a specific period has elapsed since the start of its display (for example, the acquisition number notification display ends when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of its display), and the characters used in the notification display are characters of a larger size than the characters used in the acquisition amount display (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number notification display are characters of a larger size than the characters used in the acquisition number display). The characters used in the award amount display and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area is formed surrounded by lines that form the characters (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display include specific characters in which a specific area is formed surrounded by lines that form the characters), the specific characters used in the award amount display are such that the background image is not visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number display are such that the background image during a jackpot is not visible from the specific area), and the specific characters used in the notification display have a smaller ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area that forms the characters than the specific characters used in the award amount display (for example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display have a smaller ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area that forms the characters than the specific characters used in the acquisition number display).

With this configuration, the award amount display and notification display including the specific characters can be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image. For example, when a player checks the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state, the player checks the award amount display, but the award amount display is displayed in small characters in the narrow second display area, and if the background image is visible from the specific area of the specific characters, there is a possibility that the specific characters will appear different from their original characters. However, by making the background image invisible from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters can be accurately recognized.

(7) In the gaming machine of (6) above, the characters used in the notification display may be three-dimensional characters (for example, the characters used in the winning number notification display may be three-dimensional characters), and the line area forming the three-dimensional characters may include an area that represents the characters and an area that represents the depth of the characters.

This configuration can enhance the dramatic effect of the notification display.

(8) In the gaming machine of (6) or (7) above, the specific characters used in the notification display may be configured so that the background image is visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the winning count notification display may be configured so that the background image is visible from the specific area 20SHI3 during a jackpot).

With this configuration, the notification display is not displayed at all times in an advantageous state like the awarded amount display, but is displayed only for a specified period of time to congratulate the player when the amount of gaming value awarded in an advantageous state reaches a specified amount, and is displayed in large letters in the wide first display area, and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area that forms the letters is small, so not only can the risk of misidentifying the letters be reduced even if the background image is visible from the specific area of the specific letters be reduced, but the presentation effect can be enhanced by making the background image visible from the specific area of the specific letters.

(9) In the gaming machine of (6) or (7) above, the specific characters used in the notification display may be such that the background image cannot be seen from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the winning count notification display in variant 1 may be such that the background image during a jackpot cannot be seen from specific area 20SHI4).

With this configuration, the winning number notification display is not displayed at all times during a jackpot game state like the winning number display, but is displayed only for a specified period of time to congratulate the player when the number of prize balls awarded during a jackpot game state reaches the "kiriban" number, and is displayed in large letters in the wide first display area 20SH51, and since the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area that forms the letters is small, not only can the sense of incongruity be reduced even if the background image is not visible from the specific area of the specific letters, but by making the background image not visible from the specific area of the specific letters, the letters can be prevented from being misidentified.

(10) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (9) above, the display means may be capable of changing the state of the notification display to a specific state (for example, the image display device 5 may be capable of displaying the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH by stopping it in the first display area 20SH51, etc.), and when the specific period of time has elapsed since the state of the notification display changed to the specific state, the state of the notification display may be changed to a state different from the specific state (for example, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is framed in to the stopping position in the first display area 20SH51, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may be framed out, etc.).

This configuration can improve the presentation effect when the notification display is displayed.

(11) In the gaming machine of (10) above, the characters used in the notification display are displayed in a plurality of different colors in the line areas forming the characters (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number notification display in variant 2 relating to the second form of characteristic part 20SH are displayed in a three-color gradation in the line areas forming the characters), and the display means is capable of changing the combination of the plurality of colors over time (for example, the image display device 5 changes the form of the characters used in the acquisition number notification display in the following order: Display form A → Display form B → Display form C → Display form D → Display form E → Display form F). The display may be changed over time in the order of display mode E → display mode F → display mode G → display mode A → ...), and the speed at which the combination of the multiple types of colors changes when the notification display is displayed in the specific mode may be different from when it is displayed in a mode other than the specific mode (for example, the speed at which the display mode of the acquisition number notification display changes may be different when the acquisition number notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 and when the acquisition number notification display is moving (frame-in/frame-out)).

With this configuration, the display mode changes depending on the movement speed of the notification display, enhancing the dramatic effect.

(12) The gaming machine according to the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state in which the game can proceed faster than the normal state (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a probability variable state with time-saving control in which the game can proceed faster than the normal state, etc.), and is equipped with a display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area that is a region around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 that is a region around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying a background image corresponding to the special state in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 is equipped with a first display area 20SH5 In the second display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, a background image during ST can be displayed, etc.), and in the second display area, a variation count display relating to the number of variations in the special state can be displayed in front of the background image (for example, the image display device 5 can display a remaining number display 20SHST relating to the remaining number of STs in the probability variable state in front of the background image during ST in the second display area 20SH52), and at least in the first display area, in front of the background image, as a number notification display for notifying the number of variations when the value of the variation count display becomes a predetermined value, a first number notification display for notifying the number of variations when the value of the variation count display becomes a first predetermined value, and a second number notification display for notifying the number of variations when the value of the variation count display becomes a second predetermined value (for example, the image display device 5 can display a remaining number display 20SHST relating to the remaining number of STs in the probability variable state in front of the background image during ST in at least the first display area 20SH51, When the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST reaches a predetermined number, a remaining number of times display 20SHSTH that notifies the predetermined number of times can be displayed, such as a remaining number of times display 20SHSTH that notifies "60" when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST reaches 60, and a remaining number of times display 20SHSTH that notifies "50" when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST reaches 50), the variable number of times display is updated every time the variable display is executed (for example, the remaining number of times display 20SHST is updated every time the variable display is executed), the number of times display is terminated when a specific period of time has elapsed since the start of display (for example, the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH is terminated when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of display), and characters used for the number of times display are characters of a size larger than the characters used for the variable number of times display (for example, the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH is The characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST are larger than the characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST, etc.), the characters used for the variable number of times display and the number of times notification display include specific characters that form a specific area surrounded by lines that form the characters (for example, the characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST and the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH include a specific area surrounded by lines that form the characters, etc.), the specific characters used for the variable number of times display are such that the background image is not visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST are such that the background image during ST is not visible from the specific area 20SHI6, etc.), and the specific characters used for the number of times notification display are such that the background image is visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used for the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are such that the background image during ST is visible from the specific area 20SHI7, etc.).

According to this configuration, the change count display and the number of times notification display including the specific characters can be displayed appropriately in relation to the background image. For example, when a player checks the change count in a special state, the change count display is displayed in small characters in the narrow second display area, and if the background image is visible from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters may appear different from the original characters. However, by making the background image invisible from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters can be accurately recognized. In addition, the number of times notification display is not displayed at all times like the change count display, but is displayed only for a specific period in order to alert the player that the remaining number of times indicated by the change count display is a specified number, and since it is displayed in large characters in the wide first display area, by making the background image visible from the specific area of the specific characters, it is possible to show at least a little of the background image in the conspicuous display position of the first display area.

(13) In the gaming machine of (12) above, the display means can display the characters used in the remaining number of times display in a transparent manner in which the image behind the characters can be seen through the line area forming the characters (for example, the image display device 5 can display the characters used in the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH in a transparent display manner in which the image behind the characters can be seen through the line area forming the characters).

This configuration allows the player to see the background image while the count notification display is displayed, preventing unnecessary stress from being caused to the player.

(14) In the gaming machine of (13) above, the first display area includes a variable display area in which the identification information is variably displayed (for example, the first display area 20SH51 includes the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right"), and the display means is capable of displaying the number of times notification display in front of the identification information in the variable display area (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in front of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R).

With this configuration, the variable display of the identification information can be seen while the count notification display is being displayed, so that unnecessary stress is not caused to the player.

(15) In the gaming machine of (14) above, when the identification information is displayed in a recognizable manner, the display means displays the number of times notification display in the transparent manner (for example, when the display result of the variable display is displayed in a derived manner, the image display device 5 displays the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a transparent display manner, etc.).

With this configuration, even if the identification information is displayed in a recognizable manner while the count notification display is being displayed, the display result of the variable display can be recognized.

(16) In any of the gaming machines (12) to (15) above, the display means is capable of displaying an amount of the gaming value that has been awarded (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying an acquired number display 20SHK that indicates the number of prize balls that have been awarded), and displays the number of times notification display in a display area different from the display area in which the amount of the award display is displayed (for example, the image display device 5 displays a remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a display area different from the display area in which the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed).

This configuration can prevent the visibility of the dispensed amount display from decreasing due to the number of times the notification display is displayed.

(17) The gaming machine according to the first form of the characteristic part 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.), and is equipped with a display means (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area that is an area around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (e.g., the display area of the image display device 5 is , a first display area 20SH51, and a second display area 20SH52 which is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51, etc.), the display means is capable of displaying a first background video corresponding to the progress of the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 displays, in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, a background image during a jackpot corresponding to the fact that the advantageous state is ending, etc.), at least in the first display area, a second background image corresponding to the fact that the advantageous state is ending (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying an ending background image corresponding to the fact that the jackpot gaming state is ending, at least in the first display area 20SH51, etc.), and when the second background image is not being displayed, in the second display area, a specific suggestion image giving a suggestion regarding the progress of the game can be displayed on the front side of the first background image (for example, when the ending background image is not being displayed, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying an effect image 20SHE of a consecutive win notice in a reserve that suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state in accordance with the reserved information stored, on the front side of the background image during a jackpot, in the second display area 20SH52, etc.), and The image display device 5 is capable of displaying an amount of value awarded (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying an acquired number display 20SHK relating to the number of prize balls awarded in front of the background image during a jackpot in the second display area 20SH52), and when the second background image is displayed, at least in the first display area, in front of the second background image, a result notification display that notifies the amount of gaming value awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying a result display 20SHRE that notifies the total number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot gaming state in front of the ending background image in at least the first display area 20SH51 when an ending background image is displayed), and characters used in the result notification display are characters of a larger size than characters used in the amount of value awarded display (for example, the characters used in the result display 20SHRE are larger than the characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK). The characters used in the award amount display and the result notification display include specific characters that form a specific area surrounded by lines that form the characters (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the result display 20SHRE include specific characters that form a specific area surrounded by lines that form the characters), the specific characters used in the award amount display are such that the first background image and the previous specific suggestion image are not visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK are such that the background image during a jackpot and the effect image 20SHRE of the pending consecutive win notice are not visible from the specific area), and the specific characters used in the result notification display are such that the second background image is visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE are such that the ending background image is visible from the specific area 20SHI5).

According to this configuration, the display of the amount of the game value provided including the specific character can be displayed in a suitable manner in relation to the first background image and the specific suggestion image, and the display of the result notification including the specific character can be displayed in a suitable manner in relation to the second background image. For example, when a player checks the amount of the game value provided in an advantageous state, the display of the amount of the game value provided checks the display of the amount of the game value provided. However, since the display of the amount of the game value provided is displayed in small characters in the narrow second display area and may overlap with the specific suggestion image, if the first background image or the specific suggestion image is visible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character may appear to be different from the original character. However, by making the background image during a jackpot and the specific suggestion image invisible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character can be accurately recognized. On the other hand, since the display of the result is displayed in large characters in the wide first display area and does not overlap with the specific suggestion image, by making the second background image visible from the specific area of the specific character, it is possible to show at least a little of the second background image in the conspicuous display position of the first display area.

(18) The gaming machine of (17) above is provided with a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of different setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is capable of setting one of a plurality of different setting values "1" to "6" with different odds of winning a jackpot, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying the second background video in a manner suggesting the setting value set by the setting means (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying an ending background video in a manner suggesting the set value), and the specific suggestion video is one of a plurality of suggestion videos that suggest the advantageous state, and does not suggest the setting value set by the setting means (for example, the effect video 20SHRE of the consecutive wins in reserve is one of a plurality of preview effects that predict the reliability of a jackpot, but the setting suggestion effect due to the consecutive wins in reserve is not executed, etc.).

With this configuration, the second background image may suggest a setting value, which increases the significance of the second background image being visible from a specific area of the specific characters used to display the result notification.

(19) In the gaming machine of (17) or (18) above, the display means starts displaying the second background video at a predetermined brightness (for example, the image display device 5 starts displaying the ending background video at a predetermined brightness, etc.), and at the timing when the display of the result notification display starts, the second background video is paused and displayed at a specific brightness darker than the predetermined brightness, and the result notification display is displayed at a brightness brighter than the specific brightness (for example, the image display device 5 pauses and displays the ending background video at a specific brightness darker than the predetermined brightness, and displays the result notification display at a brightness brighter than the specific brightness, at the timing T3 when the display of the result display 20SHRE starts).

This configuration can improve the visibility of the result notification display.

(Explanation regarding characteristic portion 19SH)
Next, the gaming machine related to the characteristic part 19SH will be described with reference to Figs. 12-1 to 12-6. The image display device 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic part 19SH can display an acquisition number display related to the number of prize balls awarded when the game ball enters the big prize opening in a big win gaming state, and an expected acquisition number display related to the total number of prize balls scheduled to be awarded in the big win gaming state. The image display device 5 can also display an effect display that makes the expected acquisition number display invisible or difficult to see when an over-winning occurs. Then, the image display device 5 updates the value of the expected acquisition number display when the expected acquisition number display becomes invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display. Meanwhile, the performance control CPU 120 starts the over-winning performance before the expected acquisition number display becomes invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display.

The following describes the pachinko gaming machine 1 with respect to the characteristic part 19SH having such features. Note that the description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Presentation action when a win occurs during a round of play)
Fig. 12-1 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation operation when a winning occurs during a round of play. Fig. 12-2 is a diagram showing an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance of this embodiment is controlled to a jackpot gaming state as shown in Fig. 12-1 (A), it displays, as the winning number display 20SHK, a winning number display 20SHK1 relating to the number of prize balls awarded when a gaming ball enters a big prize opening in the jackpot gaming state, and a planned number of prize balls display 20SHK2 relating to the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot gaming state. In the example shown in Fig. 12-1 (A), the winning number display 20SHK is displayed in the form of a fraction, such as "135/1500," with the winning number display 20SHK1 with "135" in the numerator and the planned number of prize balls display 20SHK2 with "1500" in the denominator, separated by a central dividing line "/". In other words, the winning number display 20SHK shown in Figure 12-1 (A) indicates that the number of prize balls awarded when the game ball entered the big prize opening during a big win game state was 135 balls, and that the total number of prize balls expected to be awarded during a big win game state is 1,500 balls.

In this embodiment, the number of winnings display 20SHK is also displayed in the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5, which also displays the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-hit display 20SHM. In addition, the image display device 5 displays a background image during a jackpot, in which the character 20SHCA appears, in response to the progress of a round of play in the jackpot game state. Note that the background image during a jackpot is displayed on a display layer that is arranged behind the display layer in which the number of winnings display 20SHK is displayed, as shown in FIG. 12-2.

When a prize ball is awarded as a result of a game ball entering the big prize opening during a big win game state, the presentation control CPU 120 updates the value of the number of winnings display 20SHK according to the presentation mode shown in Figures 12-1 (B) to (F).

When a prize ball is awarded as a result of a game ball entering the big prize opening during a big win game state, the performance control CPU 120 first starts displaying an effect display in a display area close to the position of the special variable prize ball device 7 that forms the big prize opening, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (B). Here, in this embodiment of the pachinko game machine 1, the special variable prize ball device 7 is located in the lower right position of the image display device 5 as seen by the player. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 12-1 (B), the effect display 20SHEF that imitates a tornado is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area of the image display device 5. At this timing, the number of winnings display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the number of winnings display 20SHK has not been updated.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF towards the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 12-1(C). In the example shown in FIG. 12-1(C), since the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, the effect display 20SHEF, which starts to be displayed at the bottom right edge of the display area, moves towards the top of the display area. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 12-1(C), the size of the effect display 20SHEF increases as it moves. Note that even at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK has not been updated.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (D). Here, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed on a display layer that is arranged in front of the display layer on which the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed, as shown in FIG. 12-2. Therefore, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes invisible. Note that at this timing, although the acquisition number display 20SHK is invisible, the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK has not been updated, as shown in FIG. 12-2 (D).

In the example shown in FIG. 12-1 (D), the effect display 20SHEF has been moved to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, making the acquisition number display 20SHK invisible, but a portion of the acquisition number display 20SHK may be visible to the extent that the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK cannot be recognized. In other words, the acquisition number display 20SHK may be difficult to see by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK.

Then, as shown in Figures 12-1 (D) to (E) and 12-2 (D) to (E), the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 when the acquisition number display 20SHK is not visible or is difficult to see by displaying the effect display 20SHEF in the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK. Here, in this embodiment, as described above, when a game ball enters the big prize opening, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. Therefore, in the example shown in Figures 12-1 (D) to (E) and 12-2 (D) to (E), the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" to "150".

Then, the performance control CPU 120 ends the display of the effect display 20SHEF, as shown in FIG. 12-1 (F). In the example shown in FIG. 12-1 (F), the display of the effect display 20SHEF has ended, making the acquisition number display 20SHK visible, and it can be confirmed that the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 has been updated.

According to this presentation mode, first, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed, thereby drawing attention to the effect display 20SHEF. Then, as the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, attention to the acquisition number display 20SHK can be increased. Then, by updating the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 when the acquisition number display 20SHK is not visible or is difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF, when the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends and the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes visible, it can be conveniently recognized that the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1, which was the focus of attention, has been updated.

(Example of the performance when an over-winning occurs)
Fig. 12-3 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation operation when an over-winning occurs Fig. 12-4 is a diagram showing an example of a positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed.

In this embodiment of the pachinko game machine 1, when the tenth game ball enters the large prize opening during one round of play, the large prize opening is controlled to be closed, but in this case, a so-called over-winning may occur, in which the eleventh game ball enters the large prize opening following the tenth game ball. When an over-winning occurs, the presentation control CPU 120 updates the value of the winning number display 20SHK in a presentation mode as shown in FIG. 12-3.

When an over-winning occurs, the performance control CPU 120 first starts displaying an effect display in the display area close to the position of the special variable winning ball device 7 that forms the large winning hole, as shown in Figures 12-3 (A) to (B) in the same way as when the 10th winning occurs. In the example shown in Figure 12-3 (B), an effect display 20SHEF that resembles a tornado is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area of the image display device 5. At this time, the winning number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the winning number display 20SHK has not been updated.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF towards the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 12-3(C). In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(C), since the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, the effect display 20SHEF, which starts to be displayed at the bottom right edge of the display area, moves towards the top of the display area. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 12-3(C), the size of the effect display 20SHEF increases as it moves. Note that even at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK has not been updated.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-3(C), the presentation control CPU 120 starts an over-winning presentation to notify the user that an over-winning has occurred before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area of the winning number display 20SHK, in other words, before the effect display 20SHEF makes the winning number display 20SHK invisible or difficult to see. In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(C), an over-winning presentation video featuring the character CHCB is displayed on the image display device 5.

The performance control CPU 120 can execute a performance using another performance device as the over winning performance. For example, as shown in FIG. 12-3(C), the performance control CPU 120 outputs an over winning sound from speakers 8L and 8R that is different from the sound that occurs when a prize is normally won, as the over winning performance. In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(C), the over winning sound "beep beep beep" is output from speakers 8L and 8R. The performance control CPU 120 can also light up the attacca lamp 9c in a different light emission pattern from the sound that occurs when a prize is normally won, as the over winning performance.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 12-3 (D). Here, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed on a display layer that is arranged in front of the display layer on which the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed, as shown in FIG. 12-4. Therefore, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes invisible. Note that at this timing, although the acquisition number display 20SHK is invisible, the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK has not been updated, as shown in FIG. 12-4 (D).

In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(D), the effect display 20SHEF has been moved to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, making the acquisition number display 20SHK invisible, but a portion of the acquisition number display 20SHK may be visible to the extent that the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK cannot be recognized. In other words, the acquisition number display 20SHK may be difficult to see by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK.

Then, as shown in Figures 12-3(D)-(E) and 12-4(D)-(E), the performance control CPU 120 updates the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 when the acquisition number display 20SHK is not visible or is difficult to see by displaying the effect display 20SHEF in the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK. In the example shown in Figures 12-3(D)-(E) and 12-4(D)-(E), the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 is updated from "150" to "165", and the value of the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated from "1500" to "1515".

Then, the performance control CPU 120 ends the display of the effect display 20SHEF, as shown in FIG. 12-3(F). In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(F), the end of the display of the effect display 20SHEF makes the acquisition count display 20SHK visible, and it can be confirmed that the values of the acquisition count display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition count display 20SHK2 have been updated.

According to this presentation mode, first, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed, thereby drawing attention to the effect display 20SHEF. Then, as the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, attention to the acquisition number display 20SHK can be increased. Then, by updating the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 when the acquisition number display 20SHK is not visible or is difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF, when the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends and the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes visible, it can be conveniently recognized that the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2, which were the focus of attention, have been updated.

In particular, when an over-winning occurs, not only the value of the winning number display 20SHK1 but also the value of the expected winning number display 20SHK2 are updated, so that the player can easily recognize that the total number of prize balls expected to be awarded in the jackpot game state has increased by the number of prize balls awarded due to the over-winning.

After the display of the effect display 20SHEF has ended, the performance control CPU 120 ends the over winning performance, as shown in FIG. 12-3(G). In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(G), the display of the over winning performance image that was displayed on the image display device 5 as the over winning performance ends, and the background image during the jackpot in which the character 20SHCA appears is displayed.

(Setting suggested by over-winning effect)
As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot changes according to the setting value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 6, the probability of winning a jackpot changes by using a display result judgment table according to the setting value. The setting value has six levels from "1" to "6", with "1" being the lowest ball payout rate, and the ball payout rate increases as the values increase in the order of "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". In other words, when the setting value is set to "1", the player has the lowest advantage, and the advantage increases stepwise as the values increase in the order of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". In this embodiment, the setting values "1" to "3" are referred to as "low settings", and the setting values "4" to "6" are referred to as "high settings".

In this embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the setting value can be changed, and the above-mentioned over winning effect can be executed as a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value. For example, when the setting value is set low, the effect control CPU 120 displays an over winning effect video featuring the character CHCB on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 12-5 (A), and outputs an over winning sound "beep beep" from the speakers 8L and 8R. On the other hand, when the setting value is set high, the effect control CPU 120 displays an over winning effect video featuring the character CHCC on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 12-5 (B), and outputs an over winning sound "beep beep" from the speakers 8L and 8R.

The setting suggestion effect using the over winning effect does not have to definitively suggest whether the setting value is a low setting or a high setting. For example, when the setting value is a low setting, the over winning effect shown in FIG. 12-5(B) may be executed at a sufficiently low rate, and when the setting value is a high setting, the over winning effect shown in FIG. 12-5(A) may be executed at a sufficiently low rate.

The over prize presentation may be different depending on whether the setting is "6", which is the most advantageous setting for the player, or not. The over prize presentation may be different depending on whether the setting is an odd number or an even number.

(If there are rounds where the required number of prizes are not awarded and rounds where over-winning occurs)
FIG. 11-6 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation operation in a case where there is a round in which the specified number of winning balls are not won and a round in which an over-winning ball occurs in the characteristic portion 19SH.

As mentioned above, the jackpot game state will remain open until either a specified period of time has elapsed or the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot opening reaches a specified number, whichever comes first.

In the example shown in Figures 12-6 (A) to (B), nine winning balls were won in one round of play, but 29.5 seconds passed before the number of game balls entering the big winning hole reached 10, and the first round of play ended, and the second round of play began. In this example, in response to the nine winning balls during one round of play, the winning number display 20SHK, "135/1500", is displayed, as shown in Figure 12-6 (B). Note that in this example, it will be explained that the total number of winning balls expected to be awarded in the big win play state in which 10 rounds of play are executed, is 1500.

Then, suppose that in the second round of play, the number of game balls that enter the big prize opening reaches 10, ending the second round of play, and that in the third round of play, 10 prize balls are also won. In other words, suppose that 300 prize balls are awarded in the second and third rounds of play. In this case, the value of the winning number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" at the start of the second round to "435", as shown in Figure 12-6 (C).

And let us say that an over win occurs during the 3rd round of play. In that case, as shown in FIG. 12-6 (D), the display of the effect display 20SHEF starts, and while the effect display 20SHEF is moving, the over win performance is executed.

As shown in FIG. 12-6 (E), the effect display 20SHEF makes the acquired number display 20SHK invisible or difficult to see, but while the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult to see, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK is updated. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-6 (F), when the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends, the acquired number display 20SHK becomes visible. In this example, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "435" to "450", and the value of the expected number of acquisitions display 20SHK2 is updated from "1500" to "1515".

And then, in each of the 4th to 10th rounds, the number of game balls that have entered the big prize slot reaches 10, and the round play ends. In that case, the value of the winning number display 20SHK1 is updated from "450" at the start of the 4th round to "1500", as shown in FIG. 12-6 (G).

When all 10 rounds of play are completed, an ending presentation is executed as shown in FIG. 12-6 (H), and the result display 20SH announces that the total number of winning balls awarded during the jackpot play state is 1,500.

In this example, the total number of prize balls expected to be awarded in a jackpot game state in which 10 rounds of round play are played is 1500 balls, but because over-winning occurred in 3 rounds of round play, the final value of the expected winning number display 20SHK2 is "1515". However, because there were only 9 winning balls in 1 round of round play, the final value of the winning number display 20SHK1 is "1500" instead of "1515".

According to this embodiment, if there are rounds in which the specified number of winning balls is not won and rounds in which an over-winning occurs, the value of the winning number display 20SHK1 will be less than the value of the expected winning number display 20SHK2, so by checking the final winning number display 20SHK, it is easy to see that there were rounds in which the specified number of winning balls was not won and rounds in which an over-winning occurred.

Figure 11-7 shows another example of the presentation action when there is a round in which the specified number of winning balls are not won and an over-winning ball occurs in characteristic part 19SH.

In the example shown in Figures 12-7 (A) to (B), nine winning balls were won in one round of play, but 29.5 seconds passed before the number of game balls entering the big winning hole reached 10, and the first round of play ended, and the second round of play began. In this example, in response to the nine winning balls during the first round of play, the winning number display 20SHK, "135/1500", is displayed, as shown in Figure 12-7 (B). Note that in this example, it will be explained that the total number of winning balls expected to be awarded in the big win play state in which 10 rounds of play are executed, is 1500.

Then, suppose that in the second round of play, the number of game balls that enter the big prize opening reaches 10, ending the second round of play, and that in the third round of play, 10 prize balls are also won. In other words, suppose that 300 prize balls are awarded in the second and third rounds of play. In this case, the value of the number of winning balls display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" at the start of the second round to "435", as shown in Figure 12-7 (C).

Let us now assume that an over win occurs during the third round of play. In this case, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (D), the display of the effect display 20SHEF begins, and the over win performance is executed while the effect display 20SHEF is moving.

As shown in FIG. 12-7(E), the effect display 20SHEF makes the acquired number display 20SHK invisible or difficult to see, but while the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult to see, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated. As shown in FIG. 12-7(F), when the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends, the acquired number display 20SHK becomes visible. In this example, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "435" to "450", but the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is not updated and remains at "1500".

And then, in each of the 4th to 10th rounds, the number of game balls that have entered the big prize slot reaches 10, and the round play ends. In that case, the value of the winning number display 20SHK1 is updated from "450" at the start of the 4th round to "1500", as shown in FIG. 12-7 (G).

When all 10 rounds of play are completed, an ending presentation is executed as shown in FIG. 12-7 (H), and the result display 20SH announces that the total number of winning balls awarded during the jackpot play state is 1,500.

In this example, the total number of prize balls expected to be awarded in a jackpot game state in which 10 rounds of round play are played is 1500 balls, but although over-winning has occurred in 3 rounds of round play, the value of the final expected number of winning balls display 20SHK2 remains "1500". However, since there were only 9 winning balls in 1 round of round play, the value of the final number of winning balls display 20SHK1 is "1500".

According to this embodiment, when there is a round in which the specified number of winning balls is not won and a round in which an over-winning ball occurs, it is possible to prevent any sense of incongruity caused by the values of the winning number display 20SHK1 and the expected winning number display 20SHK2.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 19SH can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a special variable winning ball device 7 that can be changed between an open state in which the gaming ball can easily win a prize and a closed state in which the gaming ball cannot or has difficulty winning a prize. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a CPU 103 that can execute a round game in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed from a closed state to an open state and then changed to a closed state when it is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a presentation control CPU 120 that can execute an over-winning presentation when an over-winning occurs in one round game. The image display device 5 can display the winning number display 20SHK1, which indicates the number of prize balls awarded when the game ball enters the special variable winning ball device 7, and the expected winning number display 20SHK2, which indicates the total number of prize balls to be awarded in a jackpot game state. The image display device 5 can also display an effect display 20SHEF, which makes the expected winning number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see, when an over-winning occurs. The image display device 5 updates the value of the effect display 20SHEF when the expected winning number display 20SHK2 is invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF. Meanwhile, the performance control CPU 120 starts the over-winning performance before the expected winning number display 20SHK2 is invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF.

This configuration makes it possible to reduce the sense of discomfort felt when the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated, compared to when the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated while the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 remains visible.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with speakers 8L and 8R. The performance control CPU 120 can execute over-winning performances using the image display device 5 and the speakers 8L and 8R.

This configuration can enhance the presentation effect of the over-winning effect.

As described above, when a game ball enters the special variable winning ball device 7, the image display device 5 starts displaying the effect display 20SHEF in a display area close to the special variable winning ball device 7, and moves the effect display 20SHEF to make the number of balls won display 20SHK1 and the number of balls expected to be won display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see.

With this configuration, the entry of the gaming ball into the special variable winning device 7 can be expressed by a display effect on the image display device 5, which can increase interest. In addition, the effect display 20SHEF makes it difficult or impossible to see not only the expected number of wins display 20SHK2 but also the number of wins display 20SHK1, so the feeling of discomfort can be more effectively suppressed.

As described above, the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are visible when the effect display 20SHEF is moving, and become invisible or difficult to see when the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed.

With this configuration, when the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area in which the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed, the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 automatically come into view, so that attention to the effect display 20SHEF can also draw attention to the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 in their state before the values were updated.

As described above, the presentation control CPU 120 starts the over-winning presentation before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area in which the winning number display 20SHK1 and the expected winning number display 20SHK2 are displayed.

With this configuration, the over-winning effect can be executed to let the player know in advance that an over-winning has occurred, so it is possible to more effectively prevent a sense of discomfort from arising when the expected number of wins display 20SHK2 is updated.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be set to one of several different setting values "1" to "6" that have different jackpot winning probabilities. The image display device 5 can then execute an over-winning effect in a manner that suggests the set value that has been set.

This configuration can increase attention to the over-winning effects.

As described above, the presentation control CPU 120 ends the over prize presentation after the display of the effect display 20SHEF has ended.

With this configuration, the updated value of the expected number of wins display 20SHK2 becomes visible while the over-winning effect is continuing, so the sense of discomfort caused by the expected number of wins display 20SHK2 being updated can be more effectively suppressed.

(Modifications of Characteristic Part 19SH)
The gaming machine relating to the characteristic portion 19SH is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

For example, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like, the CPU 103 executes a process for when the power supply is stopped just before the machine becomes unable to operate due to the power supply being stopped. In this process for when the power supply is stopped, a process for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a process for protecting the data in the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes the addition of an error detection code and a process for backing up various data. The data that is backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game, but also the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. Even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like, by executing such a process for when the power supply is stopped, the CPU 103 can continue playing the game before the power outage after the power is restored.

On the other hand, the presentation control CPU 120 does not back up the various data required to proceed with the presentation. Therefore, after the power outage is restored, the presentation control CPU 120 cannot continue the presentation based on the game information before the power outage.

For example, if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped during a round of play due to an unexpected power outage or the like, the presentation control CPU 120 will not execute a presentation corresponding to the round of play after the power outage is restored. In that case, the presentation control CPU 120 will not display the number of winnings display 20SHK1 and the number of expected winnings display 20SHK2 during the round of play after the power outage is restored, or will display the number of winnings display 20SHK1 and the number of expected winnings display 20SHK2 in a manner that does not display specific values such as "???/????". Furthermore, even if a win occurs during a round of play after the power outage is restored, the presentation control CPU 120 will not display the effect display 20SHEF because the image display device 5 has not executed a presentation corresponding to the round of play. On the other hand, if the performance control CPU 120 can determine that an over win has occurred in one round of play after the power outage is restored, it will not execute the over win performance using the image display device 5, but can execute the over win performance using the speakers 8L, 8R and the attacca lamp 9c. Note that the performance control CPU 120 can determine that an over win has occurred, for example, by a performance control command that notifies the player that an over win has occurred.

With this configuration, in a situation where the values of the number of wins display 20SHK1 and the number of expected wins display 20SHK2 cannot be confirmed after the power outage is restored, the effect display 20SHEF is not displayed to avoid any sense of incongruity, while if an over-winning occurs, this fact can be notified.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 19SH)
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 19SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.), and includes a display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5, etc.), a variable winning means that can be changed between a first state in which the gaming medium is easy to win a prize and a second state in which the gaming medium is impossible or difficult to win a prize (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a special variable winning ball device 7 that can be changed between an open state in which the gaming ball is easy to win a prize and a closed state in which the gaming ball is impossible or difficult to win a prize, etc.), and a lane that changes the variable winning means from the second state to the first state and then changes the variable winning means to the second state when the variable winning means is controlled to the advantageous state. The game machine is provided with a control means capable of executing a round game (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a CPU 103 capable of executing a round game in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed from a closed state to an open state and then changed back to the closed state when the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to a jackpot game state), a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect when more than a predetermined number of game media win in the variable winning means in one of the round games (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a performance control CPU 120 capable of executing an over winning effect when an over winning occurs in one of the round games), and the display means displays the awarded game value awarded when the game media win in the variable winning means. and a second award amount display relating to the amount of gaming value to be awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the image display device 5 can display an acquired number display 20SHK1 relating to the number of prize balls awarded when a gaming ball enters the special variable winning ball device 7, and an expected number of awards display 20SHK2 relating to the total number of prize balls to be awarded in a jackpot gaming state), and can display a specific display that makes the second award amount display invisible or difficult to see when more than the predetermined number of gaming media have won in the variable winning means (for example, the image display device 5 can display an effect display that makes the expected number of awards display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see when an over-winning occurs). the image display device 5 updates the value of the effect display 20SHEF when the effect display 20SHEF makes the expected number to be won display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see), and the specific performance execution means starts the specific performance before the second award amount display becomes invisible or difficult to see due to the specific display (the performance control CPU 120 starts an over winning performance before the effect display 20SHEF makes the expected number to be won display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see),

This configuration makes it possible to reduce the sense of discomfort that may occur when the value of the second amount of provision display is updated, compared to when the value of the second amount of provision display is updated while the second amount of provision display remains visible.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, a sound output means is provided (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with speakers 8L and 8R, etc.), and the specific effect execution means is capable of executing, as the specific effect, an effect by the display means and an effect by the sound output means (e.g., the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing, as an over winning effect, an effect by the image display device 5 and an effect by the speakers 8L and 8R, etc.).

This configuration can enhance the effect of specific performances.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, when the gaming medium wins the variable winning means, the display means starts displaying the specific display in a display area close to the variable winning means, and moves the specific display to make the first award amount display and the second award amount display invisible or difficult to see (for example, when the gaming ball wins the special variable winning ball device 7, the image display device 5 starts displaying the effect display 20SHEF in a display area close to the special variable winning ball device 7, and moves the effect display 20SHEF to make the number of winnings display 20SHK1 and the number of expected winnings display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see, etc.).

With this configuration, the entry of the game ball into the variable winning means can be expressed by a display effect on the display means, which can increase interest. In addition, the specific display makes it impossible or difficult to see not only the second award amount display but also the first award amount display, so that the occurrence of a sense of incongruity can be more effectively suppressed.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above, the first and second award amount displays are visible when the specific display is moving, and become invisible or difficult to see when the specific display reaches the display area in which the first and second award amount displays are displayed (for example, the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are visible when the effect display 20SHEF is moving, and become invisible or difficult to see when the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area in which the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed, etc.).

With this configuration, when the specific display approaches the display area in which the first and second grant amount displays are displayed, the first and second grant amount displays automatically come into view, so that attention to the specific display can also draw attention to the first and second grant amount displays before their values were updated.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4) above, the specific effect execution means starts the specific effect before the specific display reaches the display area where the first award amount display and the second award amount display are displayed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 starts the over winning effect before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the number of winnings display 20SHK1 and the number of expected winnings display 20SHK2 are displayed).

With this configuration, the player can recognize in advance that a specific presentation has been executed and that more than a predetermined number of gaming media have been won into the variable winning means, which more effectively prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable when the second award amount display is updated.

(6) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above, a setting means is provided that can set one of a plurality of different setting values with different degrees of advantage to the player (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 can set one of a plurality of setting values "1" to "6" with different odds of winning a jackpot, etc.), and the specific effect execution means can execute the specific effect in a manner that suggests the setting value set by the setting means (e.g., the image display device 5 can execute an over-winning effect in a manner that suggests the set setting value, etc.).

This configuration can increase attention to specific performances.

(7) In the gaming machine of (5) above, the specific effect execution means ends the specific effect after the display of the specific display has ended (for example, the effect control CPU 120 ends the over winning effect after the display of the effect display 20SHEF has ended, etc.).

With this configuration, the updated value of the second award amount display becomes visible while the specific performance is continuing, so that the sense of discomfort caused by the second award amount display being updated can be more effectively suppressed.

(Other examples of transition to time-saving mode)
In addition, in the above-mentioned characteristic parts and modified examples, the transition to the time-saving state is always made via the big win state or the small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is activated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the transition to the time-saving state may be made without activating the special variable winning ball device 7.

The time-saving symbols mentioned above may be part of the losing symbol or part of the small winning symbol.

In addition, when performing lottery processing for the derivation and display of time-saving patterns, the lottery may be performed using a random number dedicated to the lottery of time-saving patterns, or the lottery may be performed using a random number for other lotteries such as a lottery random number for a losing pattern, a lottery random number for a big win pattern, a lottery random number for a small win pattern, a random number for determining a big win lottery, or a lottery random number for a fall lottery.

These time-saving symbols may be of multiple types, and may be used in combination with other symbols, such as small win symbols and loss symbols. In this case, the small win symbol used in combination may determine whether or not to transition to the time-saving state. However, if a time-saving symbol is selected, no further lottery will be held to determine whether or not to transition to the time-saving state, and no lottery will be held to determine the number of times the time-saving state will be used.

In addition, when a lottery is held for the time-saving symbol, if the setting value can be changed, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbol does not change according to the setting value; in other words, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbol is the same for all setting values. However, the probability of drawing these time-saving symbols may be different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, the timing of obtaining the random number when drawing the time-saving pattern may be the timing of the winning entry into the starting hole, regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used.

In addition, when a lottery for a time-saving pattern is held, if a dedicated random number is used, the result of the lottery using the dedicated random number will be the winning value; if a small win pattern random number is used to hold the time-saving pattern, a specific small win pattern random number value will be the winning value; if a random number for a fall lottery judgment value is used to hold the time-saving pattern, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value will be the winning value; and in the case of a lottery using a structure, for example, a time-saving area is set inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the passing of the game ball through the time-saving area will be the winning of the time-saving pattern.

When the time-saving symbol is selected using a structure and the small winning symbol is used in conjunction with the time-saving symbol, the number of times the time-saving state is displayed will not change depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed through.

In addition, when drawing a lottery for the time-saving pattern, if a losing pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific losing pattern random number value can be the winning value, and if a winning pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific winning pattern random number value can be the winning value. However, when using these random number values as the winning value, this is only possible for machines whose settings cannot be changed, since the settings can affect performance other than the probability of winning.

The timing for determining the result of the lottery for the time-saving symbol may be any time after the jackpot has been determined. The lottery for the time-saving symbol is not performed in the time-saving state or when the probability is high, regardless of the random number value used in the lottery, but is only performed in the low probability, low base state. However, if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed when the game is already in the time-saving state, it may be possible to either reset the number of times the time-saving symbol is played or not draw a lottery, as long as this is determined for each gaming machine.

In addition, the number of times the time-saving symbol is displayed can be a number of times that is determined in advance depending on the winning value and the game state. In addition, the conditions for granting the time-saving symbol can be different for each time-saving symbol.

In addition, when the number of time-saving patterns differs depending on the time-saving pattern, the lottery for allocating the time-saving pattern can be changed between the first special pattern and the second special pattern.

In addition, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-saving periods awarded may differ depending on the game state at that time. However, this must be determined in advance for the game state.

In addition, the lottery result for the time-saving pattern in a low-probability, low-base state can include the lottery result of "0 time-saving times."

Also, a lottery may be carried out to determine the pattern for terminating the time-saving feature, and the number of times the time-saving feature is played may be set to the number of times after the start of the time-saving feature until the pattern for terminating the time-saving feature is displayed, or until the jackpot pattern is displayed. In other words, the number of times the time-saving feature is played may not be set, and may be unlimited in principle.

The number of time-saving times and the conditions for granting the time-saving state may be different between the time-saving state controlled by the time-saving symbol and the time-saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

In addition, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the point at which the symbol determination time for the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, when a small win symbol random number is used to select the time-saving symbol, if a small win is won and the time-saving state is entered, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the end of the small win operation.

In addition, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in the game state in which the structure is operated.

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high-probability, low-base state for a prescribed number of variable displays after a jackpot, the machine may be in the high-probability, low-base state when the gaming center opens, and after the high-probability, low-base state has ended after a prescribed number of variable displays have been executed, the machine may be controlled to a time-saving state.

In addition, if a time-saving limiter function is installed, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times for the time-saving limiter is updated. Also, the pattern confirmation time for the time-saving pattern may be set to a different time from the pattern confirmation times for other patterns.

The present invention is not limited to the above description. Furthermore, the specific configuration includes the above-mentioned embodiment and other examples described below, as well as modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

Furthermore, among the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described below, all or part of the configurations may be combined in any manner.

The above-mentioned and hereinafter-described embodiments disclosed herein should be considered as illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above-mentioned and hereinafter-described descriptions, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

Another gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed by executing a variable display of first identification information and a variable display of second identification information, and is equipped with a display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area which is an area around the first display area and is narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 which is an area around the first display area 20SH51 and is narrower than the first display area 20SH51, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 is equipped with the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, and 20SH52, a background image corresponding to a jackpot gaming state can be displayed), and in the second display area, an amount display relating to the amount of gaming value that has been awarded can be displayed in front of the background image (for example, the image display device 5 can display an acquired number display 20SHK relating to the number of prize balls awarded, in front of the background image in the second display area 20SH52), and at least in the first display area, in front of the background image, as notification displays for notifying that the amount of gaming value awarded has reached a predetermined amount, a first notification display for notifying that the amount of gaming value awarded has reached a first predetermined amount and a second notification display for notifying that the amount of gaming value awarded has reached a second predetermined amount (for example, the image display device 5 can display, in front of the background image at least in the first display area 20SH51, a number display relating to the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot gaming state that has been awarded, in front of the background image). As the winning number notification display 20SHKH for notifying that the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached "1000", when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", the winning number notification display "over 1000" can be displayed, and when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "2000", the winning number notification display "over 2000" can be displayed), the awarded amount display is updated every time a gaming value is awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the awarded number display 20SHK is updated every time a gaming ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state), the notification display is terminated when a specific period has elapsed since the start of the display (for example, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is terminated when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the display), and the characters used in the notification display are characters of a size larger than the characters used in the awarded amount display. (e.g., the characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger in size than the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK, etc.), the characters used in the award amount display and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area is formed surrounded by lines forming the characters (e.g., the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area is formed surrounded by lines forming the characters, etc.), the specific characters used in the award amount display are such that the background image is not visible from the specific area (e.g., the specific characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK are such that the background image is not visible from the specific area, etc.), and the specific characters used in the notification display are such that the background image is visible from the specific area (e.g., the specific characters used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are such that the background image is visible from the specific area, etc.).
The notification display can be displayed in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 can display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, etc.),
moreover,
The game control device is provided with a state control means capable of controlling to a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-19), and an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of the variable display (e.g., a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-13), and the state control means updates the numerical information updated by the update means so that the numerical information corresponds to the special number of times. and the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS71).

This configuration allows the display including the specific characters to be displayed optimally in relation to the background image. Furthermore, it also allows the player to be rescued optimally. Specifically, even if the game state changes and a variable display of any identification information is executed, the numerical information continues to be updated, making it easier for the player to be rescued and increasing their motivation to play.

In other words, the specific characters used to display the amount of the grant are updated every time a gaming value is granted in an advantageous state, and the background image is made invisible from a specific area surrounded by the lines that form the characters, and the characters used to display the notification are larger than the characters used to display the amount of the grant, and the background image is made visible from the specific area, so that the amount of the grant can be displayed in small characters but is always easy to check, while the notification can display the fact that a predetermined amount has been reached in large characters without hiding the background image, and since the numerical information is updated when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the numerical information is more likely to reach the special number of times and the player is more likely to be rescued than, for example, when the numerical information is updated only when either the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and therefore it is possible to increase the player's motivation to play. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that, when installed in an amusement facility, makes it easy for players to grasp the amount of the granted gaming value and to recognize that the predetermined amount has been reached, thereby increasing the player's motivation to play.

The size of the characters and the type of lines used in the notification display may also be used to notify the player of the probability of a jackpot or the number of times a jackpot has been controlled. In this way, the display mode of the notification effect creates a sense of expectation and increases interest.

Furthermore, as another example of a gaming machine capable of increasing interest, there is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the execution of variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and that has state control means that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-19). The state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, a part executing steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-13, and a part executing steps 100IWS75 and 100IWS76 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17). the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a portion executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100); a predetermined suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined suggestion performance (for example, a notice performance) when the variable display is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-49, a portion executing step 108IWS811 in the performance control CPU 120); and a control of a special state is started based on the establishment of a special condition. Examples of gaming machines include a special notification effect execution means (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS638 as shown in FIG. 14-23) that can execute a special notification effect that notifies a player that a certain condition is about to be established (for example, a background image changes as shown in FIG. 14-52 (C1) and (C2), a blackout occurs when the fluctuation starts as shown in FIG. 14-53 (B), or a blackout occurs when the fluctuation ends as shown in FIG. 14-54 (C)), and the predetermined suggestion effect execution means has a common ratio of executing the predetermined suggestion effect during the period before the special condition is established (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A as shown in FIG. 14-44. See FIG. 14-50). Examples of the form of this gaming machine are described below as other examples.

(Other examples)

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 13 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 13, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S901). Then, necessary initial settings are performed (step S902). The initial settings include setting a stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on or not (step S903). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch in the on state, the output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S903; Yes), an initialization process (step S908) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the working area.

The CPU 103 also transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct initialization (step S909). When the presentation control CPU 120 receives the presentation control command, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify the user that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S903; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S904). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the machine becomes unable to operate due to the power supply stop. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, etc. are executed. The data protection process includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The backed up data includes various data for progressing the game (including various flags, the states of various timers, etc.), as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S904, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S904; No), an initialization process (step S908) is executed.

If backup data is stored in RAM 102 (step S904; Yes), CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S905). In step S905, for example, a parity bit or a checksum is used to determine whether the data in RAM 102 matches the data at the time the power supply was stopped. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is not normal (step S905; No), the internal state cannot be restored to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped, so an initialization process (step S908) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal (step S905; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S906) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a working area based on the memory contents of RAM 102 (contents of the backed-up data). This restores the game state to the state when the power supply was stopped, and if the special symbols were changing, the change of the special symbols will be resumed from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt process described below.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S907). In conjunction with this, a presentation control command specifying the backed-up game state before the power outage, or, if a special symbol game was being played, a presentation control command specifying the display result of the special symbol game being played may be transmitted. These commands can be the same as the commands transmitted and set in the special symbol process processing described below. When the presentation control CPU 120 receives a presentation control command specifying the time of recovery from the power outage, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify the user that recovery from the power outage has been achieved or that recovery from the power outage is in progress. The presentation control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the presentation control command.

After completing the recovery or initialization process and sending a performance control command to the performance control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S9010). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9011), and the interrupt is permitted (step S9012). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

Next, the gaming machine according to Example 1 in the characteristic part 108IW of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 14-1 to 14-47.

(Board configuration)
Fig. 14-1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine in the characteristic part 108IW. In the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 108IW, in addition to the board configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 shown in Fig. 1, a right-hit LED 100IW10 is provided below the normal reserve display 25C as shown in Fig. 14-1. Also, as shown in Fig. 14-1, a right-hit notification LED 100IW20 is provided to the right of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 14-1, fourth pattern displays 100IW21a and 21b are provided on the left and right sides of the image display device 5, respectively. Of these, the fourth pattern display 100IW21a provided on the left side of the image display device 5 is a display that executes the variable display of the fourth pattern in synchronization with the variable display of the first special pattern. Also, the fourth pattern display 100IW21b provided on the right side of the image display device 5 is a display that executes the variable display of the fourth pattern in synchronization with the variable display of the second special pattern. In this example, the fourth pattern display devices 100IW21a and 21b are each composed of two LEDs arranged above and below, and the variable display of the fourth pattern is executed by these two LEDs repeatedly turning on and off alternately.

As shown in FIG. 14-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 in this characteristic section 108IW, instead of the pass gate 41 shown in FIG. 1, a pass gate 100IW41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. In this characteristic section 108IW, a normal game is executed based on the game ball passing through the pass gate 100IW41. Therefore, in this characteristic section 108IW, since the probability of a normal hit increases in the probability of a special state or time-saving state, it is advantageous to perform a firing operation (right-hitting operation) aimed at the right of the game area. On the other hand, in the normal state in this characteristic section 108IW, it is advantageous to perform a firing operation (left-hitting operation) aimed at the left of the game area.

(Probability of winning, probability of losing the time-saving feature)
FIG. 14-2 and FIG. 14-3 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the probability of a jackpot and the probability of a time-saving miss for each setting value. Among these, FIG. 14-2 shows the probability of a jackpot and the probability of a time-saving miss when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Also, FIG. 14-3 shows the probability of a jackpot and the probability of a time-saving miss when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this example, it is configured to be able to set any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the probability of a jackpot is different), and it is possible to confirm the current setting value or change the setting value by executing a setting confirmation process or a setting change process when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1. Also, as shown in FIG. 14-2 and FIG. 14-3, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting value is configured to be able to be changed to six stages from "1" to "6". It is to be noted that the setting is not limited to being able to be changed to six stages, and may be configured to be able to be changed to, for example, two to five stages or seven or more stages.

As shown in Figures 14-2 (A) and 14-3 (A), when the first special symbol variable display is executed and when the second special symbol variable display is executed, in the non-probability variable state (low probability state (normal state or time-saving state)), the setting value of "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "205/65536" (approximately 1/319), making it the most unfavorable setting for the player. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2," setting value "3," setting value "4," and setting value "5," with setting value "6" having the highest jackpot probability of "242/65536" (approximately 1/270), making it the most favorable setting for the player.

As shown in Fig. 14-2(B) and Fig. 14-3(B), in both cases where the first special symbol variable display is executed and where the second special symbol variable display is executed, in the high probability state (high probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "2050/65536" (approximately 1/32), making it the most unfavorable setting for the player. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2," setting value "3," setting value "4," and setting value "5," and the setting value "6" has the highest jackpot probability of "2420/65536" (approximately 1/27), making it the most favorable setting for the player. As shown in Fig. 14-2 and Fig. 14-3, in this example, in the high probability state, the jackpot probability is increased by 10 times compared to the non-high probability state.

As shown in FIG. 14-2, when the first special symbol variable display is executed, the probability of the time-saving miss is constant at 164/65536 (approximately 1/400) regardless of the setting value between 1 and 6 (and furthermore regardless of whether the game is in a special state or not). As shown in FIG. 14-3, when the second special symbol variable display is executed, the probability of the time-saving miss is constant at 328/65536 (approximately 1/200) regardless of the setting value between 1 and 6 (and furthermore regardless of whether the game is in a special state or not). In other words, in this example, the judgment value for judging the time-saving miss is common regardless of the setting value.

Even if the jackpot probability is varied according to the setting value as described above while the loss probability without time-saving is constant, the number of judgment values for each setting value can be made consistent by varying the loss probability without time-saving for setting values "1" to "6" as shown in Figures 14-2 and 14-3.

The game may also be configured to be controllable to a small win game state. If the game is configured to be able to determine a small win as well, the game may be configured so that the probability of a small win is constant, regardless of the setting value, for example, between "1" and "6."

In addition, if the configuration is such that small wins can also be determined, it may be configured so that there is a small win with time reduction that is controlled to a time-saving state when a small win occurs.

The examples shown in Figures 14-2 and 14-3 are merely examples, and various modes are possible for setting the jackpot probability and the time-saving miss probability. For example, in this example, as shown in Figures 14-2 and 14-3, the time-saving miss probability is approximately 1/400 when the first special symbol variable display is executed, and the time-saving miss probability is approximately 1/200 when the second special symbol variable display is executed. However, conversely, it may be configured so that the time-saving miss probability is approximately 1/200 when the first special symbol variable display is executed, and the time-saving miss probability is approximately 1/400 when the second special symbol variable display is executed.

(Big hit type determination table)
FIG. 14-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Among these, FIG. 14-4(A) shows a specific example of a jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Also, FIG. 14-4(B) shows a specific example of a jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 14-4(A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is a table that is referenced when a determination is made that the variable display result is to be a jackpot symbol, to determine the type of jackpot as either a "normal jackpot," a "variable jackpot," or a "sudden variable jackpot" based on a random number for type determination.

As shown in FIG. 14-4 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is a table that is referenced when a determination is made that the variable display result is to be a jackpot symbol, in order to determine the type of jackpot as either a "normal jackpot," a "variable jackpot," or a "sudden variable jackpot" based on a random number for type determination.

A "normal jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the game to a 15-round jackpot game state, and then transitions to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends. When the game transitions to the time-saving state, the time-saving state is maintained until the 100-time variable display ends or the next jackpot occurs.

A "high probability jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a 15-round jackpot game state, and then transitions to a high probability jackpot state after the jackpot game state ends. When transitioning to the high probability jackpot state, the high probability jackpot state is maintained until the 100 variable display cycles are completed or the next jackpot occurs. In this example, when the high probability jackpot state is controlled, the state is also controlled to a time-saving state.

A "sudden jackpot with a high probability of occurring" is a jackpot that is controlled to a two-round jackpot game state, and then transitions to a high probability of occurring after the jackpot game state ends. When the state transitions to a high probability of occurring, the high probability of occurring state is maintained until the 100 variable display cycles are completed or the next jackpot occurs. In this example, when the state is controlled to a high probability of occurring state, the state is also controlled to a time-saving state.

In this example, in the case of a "normal jackpot" or a "probable jackpot", in each of the 15 rounds during the jackpot game, the large prize opening is controlled to be open until 29 seconds have passed or a predetermined number of game balls (10 in this example) have entered (therefore, the large prize opening is opened for a long period of time 15 times). On the other hand, in the case of a "sudden probable jackpot", in each of the two rounds of the jackpot game, the large prize opening is controlled to be open for an extremely short period of 0.5 seconds (therefore, the large prize opening is opened for a short period of time twice). Therefore, in the case of a "sudden probable jackpot", it is virtually impossible to expect a prize to enter the large prize opening, and it can be made to appear as if the game has suddenly switched to a probable jackpot state.

As shown in FIG. 14-4(A), in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a jackpot occurs, there is a 40% probability that it is determined to be a "normal jackpot", a 40% probability that it is determined to be a "probable jackpot", and a 20% probability that it is determined to be a "sudden probable jackpot". Also, as shown in FIG. 14-4(B), in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a jackpot occurs, there is a 40% probability that it is determined to be a "normal jackpot", a 55% probability that it is determined to be a "probable jackpot", and a 5% probability that it is determined to be a "sudden probable jackpot".

(Time-saving type determination table)
Fig. 14-5 is an explanatory diagram showing a time-saving type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Among these, Fig. 14-5 (A) shows a specific example of a time-saving type determination table for the first special symbol. Fig. 14-5 (B) shows a specific example of a time-saving type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 14-5(A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is a table that is referenced when a determination is made that the variable display result is to be a time-saving miss symbol, in order to determine the time-saving type as either "Time-saving miss A," "Time-saving miss B," or "Time-saving miss C," based on a random number for type determination.

As shown in FIG. 14-5(B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is a table that is referenced when a determination is made to make the variable display result a time-saving miss symbol in order to determine the time-saving type as either "Time-saving miss A," "Time-saving miss B," or "Time-saving miss C" based on a random number for type determination.

As shown in Figures 14-5 (A) and (B), in this example, when the first special symbol is displayed and the time-saving effect is missed, and when the second special symbol is displayed and the time-saving effect is missed, there is a 1/3 probability that it will be determined as "Time-saving effect Miss A," a 1/3 probability that it will be determined as "Time-saving effect Miss B," and a 1/3 probability that it will be determined as "Time-saving effect Miss C."

The example shown in FIG. 14-5 is just one example, and various methods for determining the time-saving type are conceivable. For example, when the time-saving miss is determined based on the first special symbol changing display, the probability of determining "Time-saving miss C" is increased, while when the time-saving miss is determined based on the second special symbol changing display, the probability of determining "Time-saving miss A" is increased. In this way, the rate of determining the time-saving type may be different when the first special symbol changing display is executed and when the second special symbol changing display is executed.

In addition, for example, if the system is configured to be able to determine whether the time-saving feature has been lost even during a time-saving feature that has been used for rescue time-saving features, the system may be configured so that the time-saving feature count counter, etc. is not overwritten uniformly even if the time-saving feature has been lost, or the system may be configured so that the time-saving feature count counter, etc. is or is not overwritten depending on the type of time-saving feature that has been lost.

Figure 14-6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the types of time-saving. As shown in Figure 14-6, in this example, in the normal state, if "time-saving miss A" occurs, the time-saving state is controlled to 100 times, if "time-saving miss B" occurs, the time-saving state is controlled to 50 times, and if "time-saving miss C" occurs, the time-saving state is controlled to 30 times. Also, in the time-saving state, if "time-saving miss A" occurs, the time-saving state is controlled until the next big win, if "time-saving miss B" occurs, the time-saving state is controlled to 200 times, and if "time-saving miss C" occurs, the time-saving state is controlled to 100 times. Also, in the normal state and the time-saving state, if a rescue time-saving occurs, the time-saving state is controlled to 800 times.

In this example, as described later, there is no case where the time-saving feature is determined to be a miss during the special probability state. Also, in this example, as described later, there is no case where the time-saving feature is determined to be a miss even during the time-saving feature due to the rescue time-saving feature. Also, in this example, as described later, after the rescue time-saving feature has been controlled to a time-saving feature of 800 times, if no jackpot occurs even after the 800 fluctuation displays have ended, the rescue time-saving feature will again be controlled to a time-saving feature of 800 times (rescue time-saving feature). Therefore, the number of times the time-saving feature has been controlled due to the rescue time-saving feature will essentially be until the next jackpot occurs.

Here, the rescue time-saving achievement rate for each set value will be explained. The rescue time-saving achievement rate is the rate at which the game is controlled to a time-saving state via rescue time-saving. The time-saving state via rescue time-saving is controlled by making n (800) fluctuations without being controlled to a jackpot game state, so the rescue time-saving achievement rate K can be calculated as follows.
K=(1-ML)n={(P-1)÷P}n
(K = rescue time reduction achievement rate, P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of activations)

For example, if the setting value is "1", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/319, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 8.1%; if the setting value is "2", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/310, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 7.5%; if the setting value is "3", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/300, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 6.9%; if the setting value is "4", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/290, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 6.3%; if the setting value is "5", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/280, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 5.7%; if the setting value is "6", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/270, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 5.1%.

In this way, the lower the set value of the jackpot probability, the higher the rescue time reduction achievement rate. This makes it possible to rescue the player even if the set value of the jackpot probability is low.

In addition, the method of controlling the number of time-saving times when the time-saving miss occurs is not limited to that shown in FIG. 14-6. For example, even if the same time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, it may be configured to control the number of time-saving times to be the same at 100 times during both the normal state and the time-saving state. Also, for example, even if the same time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, it may be configured to control the number of time-saving times to 100 times during the normal state and to 0 times during the time-saving state (i.e., the state falls from the time-saving state to the normal state). In this way, various modes are conceivable for controlling the number of time-saving times when the time-saving miss occurs.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
14-7 and 14-8 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature unit 108IW. Among these, FIG. 14-7(A) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table A for a jackpot. Also, FIG. 14-7(B) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table B for a miss in a normal state. Also, FIG. 14-7(C) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table C for a miss in a time-saving state controlled via a jackpot. Also, FIG. 14-7(D) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table D for a miss in a time-saving state controlled via a miss in a time-saving state.

Also, FIG. 14-8 (E) shows a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table E for a miss during a time-saving state controlled via a rescue time-saving. Also, FIG. 14-8 (F) and (G) show specific examples of fluctuation pattern tables F and G for a miss within 10 fluctuations immediately before a rescue time-saving. Of these, the fluctuation pattern table F shown in FIG. 14-8 (F) is a fluctuation pattern table for immediately before a rescue time-saving that is selected when the number of reserved memories (e.g., the combined number of reserved memories) is 3 or less. Also, the fluctuation pattern table F shown in FIG. 14-8 (G) is a fluctuation pattern table for immediately before a rescue time-saving that is selected when the number of reserved memories (e.g., the combined number of reserved memories) is 4 or more.

Figure 14-8 (H) shows a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table H for when a player misses during a high probability state. However, in this example, even if the player is in a high probability state or a time-saving state, if the number of reserved memories is not 1 or more (if there are no reserved memories), the fluctuation pattern is determined using fluctuation pattern table B.

Figure 14-8 (I) shows a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table I for a miss in the fluctuation display that results in a rescue time reduction. Figure 14-8 (J) shows a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table J for a jackpot in the fluctuation display that results in a rescue time reduction.

As shown in FIG. 14-7(A), in this example, when a jackpot occurs, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PB2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PB2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PB2-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-7 (B), in this example, if a miss occurs during normal conditions, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-7(C), in this example, if a miss occurs during the time-saving state controlled via a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-7 (D), in this example, when a time-saving state controlled via a time-saving miss occurs, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (E), in this example, if there is a deviation during the time-saving state controlled via the rescue time-saving, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

As shown in Figures 14-7 (C), 14-7 (D), and 14-8 (E), in this example, during the time-saving state, the rate at which fluctuation patterns PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation), and PA1-4 (ultra-ultra-shortened fluctuation) are determined is high, and the average fluctuation time is shorter than during the normal state. Furthermore, even during the same time-saving state, during the time-saving state controlled via the time-saving miss, the selection probability of fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation) is 80%, which is higher than during the time-saving state controlled via the jackpot, and the average fluctuation time is shorter. Furthermore, during the time-saving state controlled via the rescue time-saving state, the selection rate of fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (ultra-ultra-shortened fluctuation) is 99%, which is higher than during the time-saving state controlled via the time-saving miss or the jackpot, and the average fluctuation time is even shorter. With this configuration, when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a predetermined number of times (900 times in this example) and the rescue time is shortened (i.e. when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), the rate at which the variable display is executed using variable pattern PA1-4 (ultra-shortened variable) increases, shortening the period until the next jackpot is controlled, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

Also, as shown in Fig. 14-7 (C), Fig. 14-7 (D), and Fig. 14-8 (E), in this example, the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (super shortened fluctuation) is 80%, which is higher than in Fig. 14-7 (C), and the average fluctuation time is shorter. Also, in the time-saving state controlled via the rescue time-saving, unlike the time-saving state controlled via the time-saving miss or the jackpot, there is no case where the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is determined, and there is no case where the super reach is executed. In other words, in the time-saving state controlled via the rescue time-saving, unlike the time-saving state controlled via the time-saving miss or the jackpot, there is no case where the super reach is executed at the time of miss, and the average fluctuation time is shorter. With this configuration, when the number of executions of the fluctuation display reaches a predetermined number (900 times in this example) and the time-saving is rescued (i.e., when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), the super reach does not result in a miss, so a decline in interest can be suppressed. In addition, the time until the next big win is controlled is shortened, so that the decrease in interest can be suppressed. In this example, in the time-saving state controlled via the rescue time-saving, the super reach is not executed when there is a miss, but it may be configured to be executed. For example, in the time-saving state controlled via the rescue time-saving, the super reach may be executed at a lower rate when there is a miss than in the time-saving state controlled via the time-saving miss or the big win. With this configuration, when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a predetermined number (900 times in this example) and the rescue time-saving is started (i.e., when no big win has occurred for a long period of time), the rate at which the super reach will result in a miss is reduced, so that the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-8(F), in this example, if the number of reserved memories (e.g., the combined number of reserved memories) is 3 or less, if the number of reserved memories is within 10 fluctuations before the rescue time reduction, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be either fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation) or fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), and the probability of determining fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation) is high at 95%. Also, as shown in FIG. 14-8(G), in this example, if the number of reserved memories (e.g., the combined number of reserved memories) is 4 or more, if the number of reserved memories is within 10 fluctuations before the rescue time reduction, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be either fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) or fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), and the probability of determining fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) is high at 95%.

Also, as shown in Fig. 14-8 (F) and (G), if there is a miss within 10 fluctuations immediately before the rescue time reduction, there is no case where the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (Super Reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (Super Reach β) is determined, and the Super Reach is not executed. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the Super Reach fluctuation display is executed in the period immediately before the rescue time reduction but does not result in a jackpot. Note that even if there is a miss within 10 fluctuations immediately before the rescue time reduction, it may be determined to be the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (Super Reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (Super Reach β). For example, within 10 fluctuations immediately before the rescue time reduction, the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (Super Reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (Super Reach β) may be determined at a lower rate when there is a miss than in the period immediately before the rescue time reduction (i.e., the period using the fluctuation pattern table C shown in Fig. 14-7 (C)).

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (H), in this example, if a miss occurs during a special probability state, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

As shown in Figure 14-8 (H), in this example, during the special bonus state, there is a high probability of 90% that the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation) will be determined, and the average fluctuation time will be even shorter than during the time-shortened state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (I), in this example, when the display is a rescue time-saving variable display and a miss occurs, the variable pattern is determined to be variable pattern PA3-1 (entering and missing). In other words, variable pattern PA3-1 (entering and missing) is a variable pattern exclusively for rescue time-saving, which is not used for variable displays that do not result in rescue time-saving, but is used only for variable displays (misses) that result in rescue time-saving. In this example, when the variable pattern is determined to be variable pattern PA3-1 (entering and missing), a time-saving entry performance (see, for example, FIG. 14-38 (G) and (H)) is executed to notify the player that the time-saving state (i.e., rescue time-saving) will be controlled, as described later. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the time-saving state has been entered and that the time-saving state will be controlled, and it is possible to increase the interest when the time-saving state is entered.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (J), in this example, when the display is a variable display that results in a rescue time reduction and does not result in a jackpot, the variable pattern is determined to be PA3-2 (seeming jackpot). In other words, the variable pattern PA3-2 (seeming jackpot) is not used for variable displays that do not result in a rescue time reduction, but is a variable pattern exclusively for rescue time reduction that is used only for variable displays (jackpots) that result in rescue time reduction. In this example, when the variable pattern PA3-2 (seeming jackpot) is determined, as described below, a display that is the same as the time reduction entry display (see, for example, FIG. 14-38 (G) and (H)) that notifies the player that the time reduction state (i.e. rescue time reduction) will be controlled (see, for example, FIG. 14-41 (H')) is executed, and then a display that notifies the player that a jackpot will be entered (see, for example, FIG. 14-41 (H')) is executed. With this configuration, once the player realizes that the rescue time has been shortened, they are informed that they will hit a jackpot, which gives the player a sense of surprise and increases their interest.

The method of setting the fluctuation pattern table shown in Figures 14-7 and 14-8 is just one example, and various modes are possible. For example, if the time-saving state is lost during the time-saving state and the state is controlled to be in the time-saving state again, the fluctuation pattern may be determined using the same table as the fluctuation pattern table C for losses during the time-saving state controlled via a jackpot shown in Figure 14-7 (C).

Also, for example, only when the time-saving state continues until the next jackpot in the case of a time-saving miss (in this example, when time-saving miss A occurs during the time-saving state), the fluctuation pattern may be determined using the same table as fluctuation pattern table C for misses during the time-saving state controlled via a jackpot shown in FIG. 14-7 (C).

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (E), during the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern PA1-4, which is an extremely short fluctuation of 1.5 seconds, is high, and the speed at which the fluctuation display is consumed is fast, so there are few types of preview effects and pre-reading preview effects that can be executed. For example, during the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, effects such as displaying an effect image at the edge of the display screen of the image display device 5, lighting up lamps or LEDs, outputting a specified sound effect or a sound that stops the fluctuation that is different from normal are executed.

In addition, this example shows a case where a fluctuation pattern table E is provided specifically for the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, but it is also possible to configure it so that, for example, without providing a fluctuation pattern table E specifically for the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, the fluctuation pattern is determined using a fluctuation pattern table C (see FIG. 14-7 (C)) for the time-saving state via a jackpot.

In addition, in this example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10 or less, the variation pattern table F or G (see FIG. 14-8 (F) or (G)) is switched to, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the variation pattern table may be configured to switch so that the reach rate gradually decreases as the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached decreases, or the variation pattern table may be configured to switch so that the remaining number of fluctuations can be suggested only when the number of remaining fluctuations is a dividing line such as 100 or 200.

In addition, in this example, the time-saving state via a jackpot, the time-saving state via a miss, and the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state are configured to use different fluctuation pattern tables (i.e., the average fluctuation time is different), but this is not limited to the above. For example, the same fluctuation pattern table may be used in each case (i.e., the average fluctuation time is the same), or the average fluctuation time may be longer for the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state than for the time-saving state via a jackpot or a miss time-saving state.

(Performance control command)
14-9 and 14-10 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the performance control command sent to the performance control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIG. 14-9 and FIG. 14-10, the command 80XX(H) is a performance control command (variation pattern command) that specifies the variation pattern of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern. The performance control command that specifies the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, when the performance control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 80XX(H), it controls the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Command 9000 (H) is a performance control command (display result 1 specification command) (miss specification command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is to be a miss (no time reduction).

Command 9001 (H) is a performance control command (display result 2 designation command) (time-saving miss A designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is to be time-saving miss A. Command 9002 (H) is a performance control command (display result 3 designation command) (time-saving miss B designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is to be time-saving miss C. Command 9003 (H) is a performance control command (display result 4 designation command) (time-saving miss C designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is to be time-saving miss C.

Command 9004 (H) is a presentation control command (display result 5 designation command (normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a normal jackpot. Command 9005 (H) is a presentation control command (display result 6 designation command (variable jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a guaranteed jackpot. Command 9006 (H) is a presentation control command (display result 7 designation command (sudden guaranteed jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a sudden guaranteed jackpot.

Command 95XX (H) is a performance control command (rescue time reduction number 1 designation command) that specifies the remaining number of fluctuations (126 or less) until the rescue time reduction occurs. In this example, a value according to the remaining number of fluctuations (126 or less) until the rescue time reduction occurs is set in the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command. For example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction occurs is 1, command 9501 (H) is sent as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command, and if the remaining number of fluctuations is 126, command 957E (H) is sent as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command. Note that in this example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction occurs is 127 or more, the maximum value 7F (H) is set in the EXT data, and command 957F (H) is uniformly sent as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command.

Command 96XX (H) is a performance control command (rescue time reduction number 2 designation command) that specifies the number of remaining changes (in units of 100) until the rescue time reduction occurs. In this example, a value corresponding to the number of remaining changes (in units of 100) until the rescue time reduction occurs is set in the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. For example, if the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs is 100, command 9601 (H) is sent as the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, and if the number of remaining changes is 800, command 9608 (H) is sent as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command.

Command 97XX (H) is a performance control command (rescue time reduction number designation command upon recovery) that designates the number of remaining fluctuations (in units of 100) until rescue time reduction occurs when power is restored. In this example, when power is restored, a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations until rescue time reduction occurs is set in the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number designation command upon recovery and transmitted. For example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until rescue time reduction occurs when power is restored is 100 or less, command 9701 (H) is transmitted as the rescue time reduction number designation command upon recovery, and if the remaining number of fluctuations is between 701 and 800, command 9708 (H) is transmitted as the rescue time reduction number designation command upon recovery.

In this example, the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction can be transmitted in units of one time up to 126 times, and when the remaining number is 127 times or more, it is transmitted in units of 100 times, but this is not limited to the above. For example, two commands may be transmitted in combination so that it is possible to transmit in units of one time even when the remaining number is 127 times or more.

Command A000 (H) is a presentation control command (first pattern determination A designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 20 seconds. Command A001 (H) is a presentation control command (first pattern determination B designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 10 seconds. Command A002 (H) is a presentation control command (first pattern determination C designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 0.5 seconds.

Command A100 (H) is a presentation control command (second pattern determination A designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 20 seconds. Command A101 (H) is a presentation control command (second pattern determination B designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 10 seconds. Command A102 (H) is a presentation control command (second pattern determination C designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 0.5 seconds.

Command B000 (H) is a presentation control command (jackpot start designation command: fanfare designation command) that specifies the start of a jackpot game. Command B001 (H) is a presentation control command (jackpot end designation command: ending designation command) that specifies the end of a jackpot game.

Command B1XX (H) is a presentation control command (command for displaying while the large prize opening is open) that specifies the display during a round during a jackpot game. The number of rounds to be displayed is set in "XX." Command B2XX (H) is a presentation control command (command for displaying after the large prize opening is open) that specifies the display after a round during a jackpot game (displaying the interval between rounds).

Command B400 (H) is a presentation control command (large prize opening entry designation command) that specifies that a gaming ball has entered the large prize opening.

Command C000 (H) is a presentation control command (first pending memory number addition command) that specifies that the first pending memory number has increased by 1. Command C001 (H) is a presentation control command (second pending memory number addition command) that specifies that the second pending memory number has increased by 1. Command C100 (H) is a presentation control command (first pending memory number subtraction command) that specifies that the first pending memory number has decreased by 1. Command C101 (H) is a presentation control command (second pending memory number subtraction command) that specifies that the second pending memory number has decreased by 1.

Command E000 (H) is a presentation control command (normal state designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the normal state. Command E001 (H) is a presentation control command (time-saving state A designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time-saving state when a jackpot game ends. Command E002 (H) is a presentation control command (time-saving state B designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time-saving state when the time-saving state is lost. Command E003 (H) is a presentation control command (time-saving state C designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time-saving state during a rescue time-saving state. Command E004 (H) is a presentation control command (probability variable state designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the probability variable state.

Command E100 (H) is a presentation control command (right hit notification start command) that specifies the start of a right hit notification. Command E101 (H) is a presentation control command (right hit notification end command) that specifies the end of a right hit notification.

Command F000 (H) is a presentation control command (a customer waiting demo designation command) that designates the start of displaying a customer waiting demonstration. The customer waiting demo designation command is sent, for example, when no reserved memory is stored (i.e., when the total reserved memory number is 0) at the end of the pattern determination period and at the end of the big win game. The customer waiting demo designation command is also sent, for example, when the power is turned on (when either the initialization process or the recovery process is executed). In addition, for example, when transitioning to a setting change mode in which a setting change process is executed or a setting confirmation mode in which a setting confirmation process is executed, a setting value designation command is sent after the end of each mode, and then a customer waiting demo designation command is sent. In addition, when the recovery process or the setting confirmation process is executed, the customer waiting demo designation command is sent when none of the big win game, small win game, and special game are executed and no reserved memory is stored. As described below, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a customer waiting demo designation command, if 10 seconds pass without receiving any other commands, such as a performance control command at the time of the start winning, it starts displaying a telop indicating that the rescue time-saving function is installed (in this example, whether or not to display a telop is determined by lottery). In addition, if 3 minutes pass without receiving any other commands after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command, it starts playing a demonstration movie.

The command F1XX (H) is a performance control command (setting value specification command) that specifies the currently set setting value. Note that the value equivalent to the setting value is set in "XX".

When the presentation control CPU 120 (specifically, the presentation control CPU 120) mounted on the presentation control board 12 receives the above-mentioned presentation control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, it changes the display state of the image display device 5 according to the contents shown in Figures 14-9 and 14-10, changes the display state of the lamp, and outputs sound number data to the sound control board 13. Note that presentation control commands other than those shown in Figures 14-9 and 14-10 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the presentation control board 12. For example, more detailed presentation control commands related to jackpot games and presentation control commands indicating the game status (for example, a presentation control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the presentation control board 12.

(Game control main processing)
14-11 is a flowchart showing a game control main process in the characteristic unit 108IW. In this example, the processes of steps S1 to S7, steps S8 to S9, and steps S10 to S12 are the same as those shown in FIG.

In this example, when a presentation control command instructing recovery from power outage is sent in step S7, the CPU 103 checks the value of the rescue time reduction counter for counting the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction occurs, sets a value according to the current value of the rescue time reduction counter, and controls to send a rescue time reduction number designation command at the time of recovery to the presentation control CPU 120 (step 100IWS11). For example, if the current value of the rescue time reduction counter is 100 or less, the CPU 10 controls to send command 9701 (H) as the rescue time reduction number designation command at the time of recovery. Also, for example, if the current value of the rescue time reduction counter is 701 or more and 800 or less, the CPU 10 controls to send command 9708 (H) as the rescue time reduction number designation command at the time of recovery. Therefore, in this example, if the RAM clear process is not executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the recovery process is executed, the rescue time reduction number designation command at the time of recovery is transmitted, and the remaining number of fluctuations until the current rescue time reduction is notified. In addition, a time saving rescue can be achieved by executing a variable display based on the reserved memory restored by the recovery process (i.e., the reserved memory stored before the power outage). This configuration can reduce the disadvantage to the player when a power outage occurs in a situation where reserved memory corresponding to a variable display that will result in a time saving rescue was stored before the power outage.

In this example, a command for specifying the number of times to shorten the time for recovery is sent separately from the command at the time of recovery when the power is restored after a power outage, but this is not limited to this form. For example, the EXT data of the command at the time of recovery (e.g., a command for specifying power on) sent in step S7 may be configured to be set to a value corresponding to the number of times remaining until the time for recovery is shortened, and then sent.

Also, when a presentation control command instructing initialization is sent in step S9, the CPU 103 sets the rescue time reduction counter to "800" (step 100IWS12). Therefore, in this example, if the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is turned on, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "800". That is, in this example, after the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is turned on, if neither a jackpot nor a time reduction miss occurs even after 800 variable display cycles, the rescue time reduction is entered and the machine is controlled to the time reduction state. Note that, in this example, the initial value to be set in the rescue time reduction counter can be specified based on the presentation control command instructing initialization sent in step S9.

In this example, the rescue time-saving counter is set to "800" when the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, but the present embodiment is not limited to this. The rescue time-saving counter may not be initialized when the RAM clear process is executed. For example, when the RAM clear process is executed, the time-saving flags A to C indicating the time-saving state, the time-saving counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the time-saving state, and the reserved memory may be initialized, while the value of the rescue time-saving counter may be restored. In this way, the game can be started from the state where the value of the rescue time-saving counter of the previous day continues, so that the investment amount until the rescue time-saving is reached can be reduced and a configuration can be made that does not disadvantage the player. In addition, the rescue time-saving counter can be prevented from being intentionally initialized, and the degree of rescue for the player can be increased.

In addition, when configured as described above, the system may be configured so that the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is not performed only when the clear switch is detected as being on (Y in step S3) and the RAM clear process is performed, and the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is performed when a RAM abnormality is detected (N in steps S4 and S5) and the RAM clear process is performed.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIG. 14-12 and FIG. 14-13 are flow charts showing the normal special symbol processing (step S110) in the special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total reserved memory number (step 100IWS51). Specifically, the count value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is checked. If the total reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the second reserved memory number is 0 or not (step 100IWS52). Specifically, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is 0 or not. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" to the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) (step 100IWS53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (i.e., if only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special pattern pointer (step 100IWS54).

In this characteristic part 108IW, the processing of steps 100IWS52 to S54 is executed, so that the display of the second special symbol changes is executed with priority over the display of the first special symbol changes. In other words, the second start condition for starting the display of the second special symbol changes is controlled to be satisfied with priority over the first start condition for starting the display of the first special symbol changes.

In addition, the present invention is not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, and may be configured to, for example, execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the RAM 102 corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 100IWS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer corresponding to the first reserved memory number=1, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 100IWS56). Specifically, when the special pattern pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer. When the special pattern pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer.

In other words, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1st", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "2nd", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) are extracted always matches the order of the first pending memory number (or second pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, 4.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the combined pending memory count by 1. That is, the count value of the combined pending memory count counter is decremented by 1 (step 100IWS57). The CPU 103 stores the value of the combined pending memory count counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a specified area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination from the random number buffer area (step 100IWS61) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 100IWS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and performs a jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process to compare a predetermined jackpot determination value (see Figures 14-2 and 14-3) with the random number for hit determination, and decides that a jackpot has occurred if they match. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process. In this case, if the probability variable flag indicating a probability variable state is not set (if the state is a low probability state), the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination using the low probability jackpot determination value (see Figures 14-2 (A) and 14-3 (A)). Furthermore, if the probability flag is set (high probability state), the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination using the high probability jackpot determination value (see FIG. 14-2(B) and FIG. 14-3(B)). If the value of the random number for jackpot determination matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 14-2 and FIG. 14-3, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot.

If it is determined that a jackpot has occurred (Y in step 100IWS63), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot has occurred (step 100IWS64). The CPU 103 then determines the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, guaranteed jackpot, or sudden guaranteed jackpot) that corresponds to the value that matches the type-determining random number stored in the random number buffer area (step 100IWS65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type-determining random number extracted in the start-up winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and determines the type of jackpot. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS84.

On the other hand, if it is not decided to hit the jackpot (N in step 100IWS63), the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the time-saving counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the time-saving state is 0 (step 100IWS66). If the value of the time-saving counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-saving counter (step 100IWS67) and checks whether the value of the time-saving counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS68). If the value of the time-saving counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a time-saving end flag indicating that the time-saving state will end when the variable ends (step 100IWS69).

In this example, steps 100IWS66 to S69 are executed to perform the subtraction process of the time-saving counter before the count process of the number of fluctuations until the time-saving relief after step 100IWS70, but the processing is not limited to this. For example, the subtraction process of the time-saving counter may be executed after the count process of the number of fluctuations until the time-saving relief after step 100IWS70. In this case, for example, in the case of a fluctuation display that results in a time-saving relief, if the subtraction process is executed after setting the time-saving counter to "800" (see step 100IWS172), the value of the time-saving counter will be subtracted by 1 extra, so in the case of a fluctuation display that results in a time-saving relief, the value of the time-saving counter may be added by 1 again after the subtraction process. Also, the time-saving counter may be set to "901", which is 1 more than the previous value, in advance.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 100IWS70). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 100IWS79. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the rescue time reduction counter (step 100IWS71). In this example, the process of step 100IWS71 is executed, and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is updated uniformly regardless of whether the game state is the normal state, the time reduction state, or the probability change state. In this example, the process of step 100IWS71 is executed, and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is updated uniformly regardless of whether the first special symbol variable display is executed or the second special symbol variable display is executed.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 100IWS72). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 126 or less (N in step 100IWS72), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter to the EXT data and controls the transmission of a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS73). For example, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 1, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of command 9501 (H) as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command. Also, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 126, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of command 957E (H) as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS74). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 100IWS79. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a rescue time reduction determination flag indicating that the rescue time reduction has occurred and that the time reduction state will be controlled at the end of the fluctuation (step 100IWS75). Then, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 100IWS84.

On the other hand, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (Y in step 100IWS72), the CPU 103 sets 7F (H) uniformly as the EXT data and controls to send the command 957F (H) as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS76). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100 (in this example, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800) (step 100IWS77). Note that whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100 can be determined by checking the value of the rescue time reduction counter. If the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter in the EXT data and controls the transmission of a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS78). For example, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 100, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of command 9601 (H) as the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. Also, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 800, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of command 9608 (H) as the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS79.

In this example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) counts the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction and transmits a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command or a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the presentation control CPU 120 may be configured to count the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction and execute the teasing presentation, countdown presentation, and effect presentation described below.

In addition, for example, as described below, when a rescue time reduction occurs, the rescue time reduction counter is set (set to "800"), and in a configuration in which rescue time reductions can occur consecutively, the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command or rescue time reduction number 2 designation command may be sent only when a rescue time reduction occurs the first time, and the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command or rescue time reduction number 2 designation command may not be sent when a rescue time reduction occurs the second time or later.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag C, which indicates that the state is a time-saving state controlled via rescue time-saving, is set (step 100IWS79). If the time-saving flag C is set (i.e., the state is a time-saving state via rescue time-saving), the process proceeds to step 100IWS84. In this example, by executing the process of step 100IWS79, if the state is a time-saving state via rescue time-saving, it is determined that the state is a miss without time-saving, without carrying out the process of determining whether the time-saving has been missed in step 100IWS81 and thereafter.

It is also possible to configure the system so that the time-saving state is not uniformly determined to be a miss, not only during the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, but also during the time-saving state via a jackpot and during the time-saving state via a miss. In other words, not only when time-saving flag C is set, but also when time-saving flag A or time-saving flag B is set, the process of determining whether the time-saving state has not been reached after step 100IWS81 may not be performed, and it may be decided that the state is a miss without time-saving.

Conversely, even during a time-saving state via rescue time-saving, the processing from step 100IWS81 onwards may be executed to determine whether or not the time-saving state has been exceeded. Also, it may be configured so that both rescue time-saving and time-saving deviations may occur in the same variable display. In this case, for example, it may be configured so that the time-saving state is controlled with priority given to rescue time-saving, or it may be configured so that the time-saving state is controlled with priority given to deviations from time-saving.

If the time-saving flag C is not set (i.e., the game is not in a time-saving state via rescue time-saving), the CPU 103 checks whether the high probability flag is set (step 100IWS80). If the high probability flag is set (i.e., the game is in a high probability state), the game proceeds to step 100IWS84. In this example, by executing the processing of step 100IWS80, if the game is in a high probability state, it is decided that the game will be a miss without time-saving, without carrying out the process of determining whether the time-saving has been missed in step 100IWS81 and thereafter.

If the probability of winning is not set (i.e., if the probability of winning is not in a probability of winning state), the CPU 103 uses a time-saving loss judgment table to determine whether or not the time-saving loss is to be determined, and performs a lottery process based on the random number for time-saving loss judgment to determine whether or not the time-saving loss is to be determined (step 100IWS81). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the time-saving loss judgment table for the first special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time-saving loss is to be determined with a probability of approximately 1/400 (see FIG. 14-2). Also, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the time-saving loss judgment table for the second special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time-saving loss is to be determined with a probability of approximately 1/200 (see FIG. 14-3).

If it is decided that the time-saving miss is to occur (Y in step 100IWS82), the CPU 103 decides on the type of time-saving miss (time-saving miss A, time-saving miss B, or time-saving miss C) that corresponds to the value that matches the value of the type-determining random number stored in the random number buffer area (step 100IWS83). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type-determining random number extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and decides on the type of time-saving. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS84.

In step 100IWS83, the time-saving type determination is performed using a type determination random number that is the same as the type determination random number used in the jackpot type determination in step 100IWS65. Furthermore, if it is configured to determine small wins as well as small win types, it is sufficient to configure it so that the determination process is performed using a common type determination random number not only for the jackpot type determination and the time-saving type determination, but also for the small win type determination.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stopping pattern of the special pattern according to the determination result of the jackpot type and the time-saving type (step 100IWS84). In this case, for example, if it is determined to be a normal jackpot, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "3", if it is determined to be a probability jackpot, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "7", if it is determined to be a sudden probability jackpot, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "9", if it is determined to be a time-saving miss A, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "2", if it is determined to be a time-saving miss B, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "4", if it is determined to be a time-saving miss C, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "6", and if it is determined to be a miss (no time-saving), the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "-". The CPU 103 also stores the determined special symbol stop pattern in a stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 100IWS85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting process (step S111) (step 100IWS86).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 14-14 is a flow chart showing the variable pattern setting process (step S111) in the special symbol process. In the variable pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the jackpot flag is set (step 100IWS1701). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 100IWS1701A). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (i.e., the variable display is a rescue time reduction and a jackpot), the CPU 103 selects the variable pattern table J for rescue time reduction variable jackpot shown in FIG. 14-8 (J) as a table for determining the variable pattern (step 100IWS1701B). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table A for the jackpot shown in FIG. 14-7 (A) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1702).

If the jackpot flag is not set (i.e., if it is a miss), the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 100IWS1702A). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (i.e., if the display shows a change that results in a rescue time reduction and it is a miss), the CPU 103 selects the change pattern table I for the rescue time reduction change miss shown in FIG. 14-8 (I) as a table for determining the change pattern (step 100IWS1702B). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 10 or less (step 100IWS1703). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 10 or less (i.e., if the number of changes remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less), the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 3 or less. In addition, the embodiment is not limited to the one shown in this example, and may be configured to check, for example, whether the value of the first pending memory count counter or the second pending memory count counter is 3 or less.

If the value of the combined reserved memory count counter is 3 or less (Y in step 100IWS1704), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table F for misses just before the rescue time reduction shown in FIG. 14-8 (F) as the table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1705). If the value of the combined reserved memory count counter is 4 or more (N in step 100IWS1704), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table G for misses just before the rescue time reduction shown in FIG. 14-8 (G) as the table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1706).

If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 10 or less (N in step 100IWS1703), the CPU 103 checks whether the high probability flag is set (step 100IWS1707). If the high probability flag is set (i.e., if the game is in a high probability state), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table H for misses during a high probability state shown in FIG. 14-8 (H) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1708). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the combined reserved memory counter, and selects the fluctuation pattern table H on the condition that the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 1 or more, and if the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 0 (i.e., if there are no reserved memories), selects the fluctuation pattern table B for misses during a normal state shown in FIG. 14-7 (B).

If the probability variable flag is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag A, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via a jackpot, is set (step 100IWS1709). If the time-saving flag A is set (i.e., the time-saving state is controlled via a jackpot), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table C for a miss when the time-saving state is controlled via a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 14-7(C), as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1710). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the combined reserved memory counter, and selects the fluctuation pattern table C on the condition that the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 1 or more, and if the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 0 (i.e., there is no reserved memory), selects the fluctuation pattern table B for a miss when in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 14-7(B).

If the time-saving flag A is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag B, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via a time-saving miss, is set (step 100IWS1711). If the time-saving flag B is set (i.e., the time-saving state is controlled via a time-saving miss), the CPU 103 selects the miss fluctuation pattern table D shown in FIG. 14-7 (D) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1712). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the combined reserved memory counter, and selects the fluctuation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 1 or more, and if the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 0 (i.e., there is no reserved memory), selects the miss fluctuation pattern table B shown in FIG. 14-7 (B) for the normal state.

If the time-saving flag B is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag C, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via rescue time-saving, is set (step 100IWS1713). If the time-saving flag C is set (i.e., the time-saving state is controlled via rescue time-saving), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table E for deviations during the time-saving state controlled via rescue time-saving, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (E), as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1714).

If the time-saving flag C is not set either (i.e., in the normal state), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table B for misses in the normal state shown in FIG. 14-7 (B) as the table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1715).

Next, the CPU 103 determines which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 14-7 and FIG. 14-8 should be used based on the fluctuation pattern table determined to be used in steps 100IWS1701B, S1702, S1702B, S1705, S1706, S1708, S1710, S1712, S1714, and S1715 and the fluctuation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer (step 100IWS1716). In this example, the fluctuation pattern is determined to determine the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. After the fluctuation time is determined, the fluctuation pattern to which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from among multiple fluctuation patterns.

Once the variation pattern is determined, the CPU 103 performs control to send a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1717).

When the change time (change pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined in step 100IWS1716, the CPU 103 sets the change time data indicating the determined change time in the change time timer and starts measuring the change time (step 100IWS1718), and starts the change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the change display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 100IWS1719). The CPU 103 then updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol change processing (step 100IWS1720).

(Special pattern variation processing)
14-15 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation process (step S112) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first controls the transmission of any of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 7 designation command) to the performance control CPU 120 based on the decision result of whether or not to make it a jackpot, the decision result of the jackpot type, and the decision result of the time-saving type, if they have not been transmitted yet (step 100IWS1121).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step 100IWS1122), and when the variable time timer times out (step 100IWS1123), the CPU 103 checks whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving effect will be missed (step 100IWS1124). Note that whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving effect will be missed can be determined, for example, by checking the stopping pattern of the special pattern stored in the stopping pattern memory area in step 100IWS85.

If it is decided that the time-saving feature should be over, the CPU 103 controls the right-hit LED 100IW10 to start lighting up (step 100IWS1125). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a right-hit notification start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1126).

In this example, when the processing of step 100IWS1125 is executed and a time-saving missing pattern is derived and displayed, the right-hit LED 100IW10 starts to light up at the start of the pattern determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag A or the time-saving flag B is set (step 100IWS1127). If neither the time-saving flag A nor the time-saving flag B is set (i.e., in the normal state), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "20 seconds" to a pattern determination period timer for measuring the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern (step 100IWS1128). The CPU 103 also controls to transmit a first pattern determination A designation command or a second pattern determination A designation command that can specify that the pattern determination period is 20 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1129). In this case, if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls to transmit a first pattern determination A designation command, and if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls to transmit a second pattern determination A designation command. Then proceed to step 100IWS1139.

If the time-saving flag A or the time-saving flag B is set (i.e., if the time-saving state is in effect), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "10 seconds" to a pattern determination period timer for measuring the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern (step 100IWS1130). The CPU 103 also controls to send a first pattern determination B designation command or a second pattern determination B designation command that can specify that the pattern determination period is 10 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1131). In this case, if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls to send a first pattern determination B designation command, and if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls to send a second pattern determination B designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS1139.

If it has not been decided that the time-saving feature should not be activated (N in step 100IWS1124), the CPU 103 checks whether the rescue time-saving feature determination flag is set (step 100IWS1132). If the rescue time-saving feature determination flag is set, the CPU 103 controls the right-hit LED 100IW10 to start turning on (step 100IWS1133). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a right-hit notification start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1134).

When the processing of step 100IWS1133 is executed, in this example, if the rescue time is shortened, the right-hit LED 100IW10 starts to light up at the start of the pattern determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "20 seconds" to a pattern determination period timer for measuring the determined display period of the first special pattern and the second special pattern (step 100IWS1135). The CPU 103 also controls to send a first pattern determination A designation command or a second pattern determination A designation command that can specify that the pattern determination period is 20 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1136). In this case, if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls to send a first pattern determination A designation command, and if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls to send a second pattern determination A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS1139.

If the rescue time reduction determination flag is not set (N in step 100IWS1132), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "0.5 seconds" to the pattern determination period timer for measuring the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern and the second special pattern (step 100IWS1137). The CPU 103 also controls to send a first pattern determination C designation command or a second pattern determination C designation command that can specify that the pattern determination period is 0.5 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1138). In this case, if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls to send a first pattern determination C designation command, and if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls to send a second pattern determination C designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS1139.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the special pattern stop processing (step S113) (step 100IWS1139).

(Special symbol stop processing)
14-16 and 14-17 are flow charts showing the special symbol stop process (step S113) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol determination period timer (step 100IWS131), and checks whether the value of the symbol determination period timer after subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS132).

If the value of the pattern determination period timer after subtraction is not 0 (i.e., the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern has not yet ended), the special pattern stop process ends. If the value of the pattern determination period timer after subtraction is 0 (i.e., the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern has ended), the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot flag is set (step 100IWS133). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag, time-saving flag A, time-saving flag B, time-saving flag C, the probability change count counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the probability change state, and the time-saving count counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the time-saving state (step 100IWS134).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the rescue time-saving counter to "800" (step 100IWS135). Therefore, in this example, the rescue time-saving counter is set to "800" in response to a jackpot, and if neither a next jackpot nor a time-saving miss occurs even after 800 variable display cycles have been performed after the jackpot game ends, the rescue time-saving state will be entered and the game will be controlled to the time-saving state.

In this example, by executing the processing of step 100IWS135, when a jackpot is hit, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "800" at the start of the fanfare period of the jackpot to initialize it, but this is not the only possible mode. For example, the rescue time reduction counter may be set to "800" during a round of jackpot play, or may be configured to be initially set to "800" at the start or end of the ending period of the jackpot play.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the right hit LED 100IW10 to start lighting up (step 100IWS136). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a right hit notification start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS137).

Next, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a jackpot start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS138). Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer for time before the large prize opening to measure the time before the large prize opening (fanfare time) until the special variable prize ball device 7 is controlled to the open state (step 100IWS139). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S144) (step 100IWS140).

If the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 100IWS133), the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving end flag is set (step 100IWS141). If the time-saving end flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time-saving end flag (step 100IWS142). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag C is set (step 100IWS143). If the time-saving flag C is set, the CPU 103 sets the rescue time-saving count counter to "800" (step 100IWS144).

In this example, as described later, when the time-saving state is triggered by the rescue time-saving, the state is controlled to a time-saving state of 800 times (see steps 100IWS172, S173). In this example, by executing the processing of steps 100IWS143, S144, when the time-saving state is triggered by the rescue time-saving, the rescue time-saving count counter is set to "800" after 800 variable displays are executed without a big hit or a time-saving miss. Then, if the next big hit or time-saving miss does not occur even after 800 variable displays are executed, the second rescue time-saving state is triggered and the state is controlled to a time-saving state. Note that in this example, a time-saving miss does not occur in the time-saving state triggered by the rescue time-saving, but a time-saving miss may occur and when it does occur, the value of the rescue time-saving count counter may be reset (i.e., set to "800").

Next, the CPU 103 resets any of the time-saving flags that have been set (any of the time-saving flags A to C) and ends the time-saving state (step 100IWS145). Then, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 100IWS150.

If the time-saving end flag is not set (N in step 100IWS141), the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the special chance count counter is 0 (step 100IWS146). If the value of the special chance count counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 100IWS153. If the value of the special chance count counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the special chance count counter (step 100IWS147) and checks whether the value of the special chance count counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS148). If the value of the special chance count counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 10 resets the special chance flag and the time-saving flag A, and ends the special chance state (step 100IWS149). The process then proceeds to step 100IWS150.

Then, the CPU 103 controls the right hit LED 100IW10 to stop lighting (step 100IWS150). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a right hit notification end designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS151). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a normal state designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS152). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS153.

In this example, the process of steps 100IWS141 to S152 is executed to transition to the normal state and end the right hit notification at the end of the pattern determination period in the final time-saving or final high-variable fluctuation, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the system may be configured to transition to the normal state and end the right hit notification at the start of the fluctuation or the start of the pattern determination period in the final time-saving or final high-variable fluctuation.

In addition, in this example, the case where the special probability state ends and the time-saving state also ends at the final special probability state change is shown, but this is not limited to the case, and it may be configured so that only the special probability state ends and the time-saving state continues.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving effect will be lost (step 100IWS153). Note that whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving effect will be lost can be determined, for example, by checking the stopping pattern of the special pattern stored in the stopping pattern memory area in step 100IWS85.

If it is decided that the time-saving effect has been lost, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag A or the time-saving flag B is set (step 100IWS154). If neither the time-saving flag A nor the time-saving flag B is set (i.e., if the normal state exists), the CPU 103 sets the time-saving effect counter to "100" (step 100IWS156) if the time-saving effect has been lost (Y in step 100IWS155). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If the time-saving miss A is not met, but if the time-saving miss B is met (Y in step 100IWS157), the CPU 103 sets the time-saving counter to "50" (step 100IWS158). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If the time-saving miss is not B (i.e., if the time-saving miss is C), the CPU 103 sets the time-saving count counter to "30" (step 100IWS159). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If the time-saving flag A or the time-saving flag B is set (i.e., if the time-saving state is in effect), the CPU 103 resets the value of the time-saving counter to 0 (step 100IWS161) if time-saving has been lost (Y in step 100IWS160). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If the time-saving miss is not A, but B (Y in step 100IWS162), the CPU 103 sets the time-saving counter to "200" (step 100IWS163). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If the time-saving miss is not B (i.e., if the time-saving miss is C), the CPU 103 sets the time-saving count counter to "100" (step 100IWS164). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

Next, if the time-saving flag A is set, the CPU 103 resets it (step 100IWS165). The CPU 103 also sets the time-saving flag B and controls the game to the time-saving state (step 100IWS166).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the rescue time-saving counter to "800" (step 100IWS167). Therefore, in this example, the rescue time-saving counter is set to "800" when the time-saving miss occurs, and if neither the next jackpot nor the time-saving miss occurs even after 800 variable display cycles are performed after the time-saving miss, the rescue time-saving state is entered and the game is controlled to the time-saving state.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a time-saving state B designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS168).

In this example, when the processing of steps 100IWS166 and S168 is executed and a time-saving loss pattern is derived and displayed, the game is controlled to the time-saving state at the end of the pattern determination period, and a time-saving state B designation command is sent to switch to a background image corresponding to the time-saving state via the time-saving loss.

If it has not been decided that the time-saving feature should be removed (N in step 100IWS153), the CPU 103 checks whether the rescue time-saving feature determination flag is set (step 100IWS170). If the rescue time-saving feature determination flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the rescue time-saving feature determination flag (step 100IWS171), sets the time-saving feature count counter to "800" (step 100IWS172), and sets the rescue time-saving feature count counter to "800" (step 100IWS172A). The CPU 103 also sets the time-saving feature flag C and controls the game to the time-saving feature state (step 100IWS173). The CPU 103 also controls the game to send a time-saving feature state C designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS174).

In this example, the system is configured so that the time-saving state is controlled at the timing when the rescue time-saving occurs and the rescue time-saving count counter is set (set to "800"), allowing rescue time-saving to occur continuously, and once the rescue time-saving occurs, the time-saving state continues until a jackpot occurs, but this is not the only possible configuration. For example, the system may be configured so that when the rescue time-saving occurs, the system is simply controlled to the time-saving state without setting the rescue time-saving count counter, and then, when the 800 fluctuation display ends and the system is controlled to the normal state, the rescue time-saving count counter is set (see step 100IWS144).

In addition, in this example, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "800", and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is subtracted by one each time the variable display is executed, and a rescue time reduction occurs when the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes "0", but this is not limited to the above. For example, the rescue time reduction counter may be set to "0", and the value of the rescue time reduction counter may be added by one each time the variable display is executed, and a rescue time reduction occurs when the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes "800".

In addition, in this example, the pattern determination period is set to 20 seconds, which is longer than usual, when the rescue time reduction is activated, to ensure a period for effects such as mode transition effects, but during the pattern determination period, the image display device 5 may be configured not to display decorative patterns, but to display only small patterns, so that the small patterns are not hidden by special effects or the like.

In addition, in this example, the processing of step 100IWS172 is executed to set the number of time-saving times to 800, which is the same as the number of fluctuations until a rescue time-saving occurs, but this is not limited to the above. For example, in step 100IWS172, the time-saving times counter may be set to a value greater than "800," or a value less than "800."

In addition, in step 100IWS172, the time-saving counter may be configured to be able to set values corresponding to multiple types of time-saving times. For example, the time-saving counter may be configured to be set to "100" if a rescue time-saving is performed the first time, and to be set to "800" if a rescue time-saving is performed the second time.

Also, for example, the number of time-saving times may be determined by performing a lottery process based on random numbers, and in step 100IWS172, a value corresponding to the number of time-saving times determined by the lottery process may be set in the time-saving times counter. In this case, for example, the number of time-saving times may be determined to be 100 times with a 10% probability, or 800 times with a 90% probability. Also, when the number of time-saving times is determined by a lottery process, the number of time-saving times may be determined by using the type-determining random numbers used to determine the jackpot type and the time-saving type, or the number of time-saving times may be determined by using a dedicated random number.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern processing (step S110) (step 100IWS175).

(External output signal)
FIG. 14-18 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal output from the pachinko game machine 1. As shown in FIG. 14-18, in this example, a jackpot 1 signal, a jackpot 2 signal, a jackpot 3 signal, a jackpot 4 signal, and a fluctuation stop signal are output as external output signals. Among these, the jackpot 1 signal is a signal output during a jackpot game. The jackpot 2 signal is a signal output during a jackpot game and during a time-saving state. The jackpot 3 signal is a signal output during a pattern determination period when the time-saving state is lost. The jackpot 4 signal is a signal output during a pattern determination period of a variable display that has become a rescue time-saving state. The fluctuation stop signal is a signal output at the start of a pattern determination period.

In this example, in addition to the case where the time-saving state is entered at the end of a jackpot game, the time-saving state may also be entered when a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, so when a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the external output of the jackpot 2 signal is initiated at the end of the pattern determination period. Also, the time-saving state may also be entered when a rescue time-saving state occurs, so when a missing pattern for a variable display that results in a rescue time-saving state is derived and displayed, the external output of the jackpot 2 signal is initiated at the end of the pattern determination period.

The jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal may be configured to be output not only during the pattern determination period but also during jackpot play. In addition, while this example shows a case where separate external output signals (jackpot 3 signal and jackpot 4 signal) are output when the time-saving feature is missed and when the time-saving feature is rescued, a shared external output signal may be output.

The jackpot 3 signal and jackpot 4 signal may also be configured to be output at a timing after the fluctuation stop signal is output during the pattern determination period.

For example, the change stop signal may be output at the start of the pattern determination period of the losing pattern, and the jackpot 3 signal may be output during the pattern determination period after the change stop signal is output, or the change stop signal may be output at the start of the pattern determination period of the variable display that results in a rescue time reduction, and the jackpot 4 signal may be output during the pattern determination period after the change stop signal is output. This configuration makes it possible to avoid signals being missed externally when the change stop signal and the jackpot 3 signal or jackpot 4 signal are output simultaneously.

The jackpot 3 signal may be configured to continue to be output even during a time-saving state where the time-saving function has failed. The jackpot 4 signal may be configured to continue to be output even during a time-saving state where the time-saving function has been rescued. If configured in this way, it will be possible to appropriately determine the type of time-saving function even during the time-saving state.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 14-19 is a flow chart showing the jackpot end process (step S117) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot end display timer is set (step 100IWS531), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, proceeds to step 100IWS535. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot flag (step 100IWS532) and performs control to transmit a jackpot end designation command (step 100IWS533). Then, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot end display timer to a value equivalent to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) (step 100IWS534), and ends the process.

In step 100IWS535, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot end display timer. The CPU 103 then checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, i.e., whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 100IWS536). If it has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 100IWS536), the CPU 103 sets the time-saving flag A and controls the time-saving state (step 100IWS537). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot that is ending this time is a normal jackpot (step 100IWS538). Note that whether it is a normal jackpot or not can be determined, for example, by checking the stopping pattern of the special pattern stored in the stopping pattern memory area in step 100IWS85. If it is a normal jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the time-saving count counter to "100" (step 100IWS539). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a time-saving state A designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS540).

If it is not a normal jackpot (i.e., if it is a chance jackpot or sudden chance jackpot), the CPU 103 sets the chance jackpot flag and controls the state to chance jackpot (step 100IWS541). The CPU 103 also sets the chance jackpot count counter to "100" (step 100IWS542). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a chance jackpot state designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS543).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern processing (step S110) (step 100IWS544).

(state transition)
Next, the state transition in the feature part 108IW will be described. FIG. 14-20 is a state transition diagram for explaining the state transition in the feature part 108IW. As shown in FIG. 14-20, in the normal state, if a sure-variant jackpot or a sudden sure-variant jackpot occurs, the state is controlled to a sure-variant state (see steps 100IWS541 to S542), and in the normal state, the state is controlled to a time-saving state A (time-saving state via a jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). Also, even if a miss occurs in the normal state, if a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the state is controlled to a time-saving state B (time-saving state via a time-saving miss) (see step 100IWS166). Furthermore, even if a miss occurs, if a rescue time-saving state is reached (after the RAM clear process, or after a jackpot or a time-saving miss, if the number of fluctuations reaches 800 without the next jackpot or time-saving miss occurring), the game will be controlled to time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving) (see step 100IWS173).

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-20, if a special jackpot or sudden special jackpot occurs during the special jackpot state, the player is controlled back to the special jackpot state (see steps 100IWS541-S542), and if a normal jackpot occurs, the player is controlled to time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537-S539). On the other hand, in the special jackpot state, the time-saving miss pattern is not derived and displayed (see Y in step 100IWS80), and there is no rescue time-saving state. Also, in the special jackpot state, if 100 variable displays are completed without a jackpot occurring, the player is controlled to the normal state (see steps 100IWS146-S149).

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-20, in the time-saving state A, if a sure-win or sudden sure-win occurs, the state is controlled to the sure-win state (see steps 100IWS541-S542), and in the case of a normal win, the state is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via a jackpot) again (see steps 100IWS537-S539). Also, in the time-saving state A, even if it is a miss, if a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the state is controlled to the time-saving state B (time-saving state via a time-saving miss) (see step 100IWS166). Also, in the time-saving state A, if 100 variable displays are completed without a jackpot occurring, the state is controlled to the normal state (see steps 100IWS66-S69, S145). On the other hand, there is no case where the time-saving state A becomes a rescue time-saving state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-20, in the time-saving state B, if a sure-win or sudden sure-win occurs, the state is controlled to the sure-win state (see steps 100IWS541-S542), and in the case of a normal win, the state is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via a win) (see steps 100IWS537-S539). Also, even if there is a miss in the time-saving state B, if a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the state is controlled again to the time-saving state B (time-saving state via a time-saving miss) (see step 100IWS166). Also, in the time-saving state A, if the variable display has ended 30, 50, 100, or 200 times without a jackpot occurring, the state is controlled to the normal state (see steps 100IWS66-S69, S145). However, if the time-saving state A is missed during the time-saving state and the game is controlled to time-saving state B, time-saving state B will continue until the next big win occurs (see steps 100IWS160, S161). On the other hand, there is no case where the time-saving state B becomes a rescue time-saving state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-20, in the time-saving state C, if a sure-win or sudden sure-win occurs, the state is controlled to the sure-win state (see steps 100IWS541-S542), and in the case of a normal jackpot, the state is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537-S539). On the other hand, in the time-saving state C, there is no case where a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed (see Y in step 100IWS79). Also, in the time-saving state C, if 800 variable displays are completed without a jackpot occurring, the state is controlled again to the time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving) (see steps 100IWS170-S173).

In this example, when a time-saving symbol that does not match the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed during time-saving state A, the state is uniformly switched to time-saving state B, but the control is not limited to this. For example, the current remaining number of time-saving times may be compared with the number of time-saving times corresponding to the determined time-saving type, and if the current remaining number of time-saving times is greater, the current time-saving state A may be continued as is.

In this example, if a normal jackpot occurs during time-saving state B, the game will automatically transition to time-saving state A; however, this control is not limited to this. For example, the game may be configured to compare the current remaining number of time-saving times with the number of time-saving times corresponding to a normal jackpot (100 times in this example), and if the current remaining number of time-saving times is greater, the game will continue in the current time-saving state B.

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which the time-saving miss symbol is not derived and displayed during time-saving state C (see Y in step 100IWS79), but this is not the only possible configuration, and for example, it may be configured so that it is possible to determine that the time-saving miss is occurring even during time-saving state C.

In addition, in this example, when the probability variable state is entered, the probability variable state is ended based on the execution of 100 variable display cycles, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the probability variable state may be ended by a lottery process for each variable display, and the probability variable state may be ended based on the decision to end the probability variable state.

(Performance control main processing)
Next, the operation of the performance control means will be described. Fig. 14-21 is a flow chart showing a specific example of the performance control main process in the characteristic unit 108IW. In Fig. 14-21, the processes of steps S71 to S76 are the same as those shown in Fig. 6.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes small symbol process processing (step 087IWS701). In this example, by executing the small symbol process processing of step 087IWS701, the image display device 5 executes a variable display of small symbols that are reduced versions of the left, center, and right decorative symbols, in addition to the variable display of the decorative symbols, in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol on the image display device 5.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes the fourth pattern process (step 100IWS702). In this example, the fourth pattern process in step 100IWS702 is executed, and the fourth pattern is displayed in synchronization with the first and second special patterns, separately from the decorative pattern. In this example, when the first special pattern is displayed, the fourth pattern is displayed in the fourth pattern display 100IW21a provided to the left of the image display 5. When the second special pattern is displayed, the fourth pattern is displayed in the fourth pattern display 100IW21b provided to the right of the image display 5.

The process of step S77 is the same as that of step S77 shown in FIG. 6.

When the variable display of the fourth pattern is executed, the variable display of the fourth pattern is executed by alternately turning on and off two LEDs arranged above and below in the fourth pattern display 100IW21a, 21b.

In addition, when the variable time ends, the stopped pattern of the fourth pattern is displayed as a confirmed pattern at the start of the pattern confirmation period. In this case, if there is a jackpot, the two LEDs arranged above and below are displayed as a jackpot pattern with red lights. In addition, if there is a time-saving miss, the two LEDs arranged above and below are displayed as a time-saving miss pattern with blue lights. In addition, if there is a miss (no time-saving), the two LEDs arranged above and below are displayed as a miss pattern (no time-saving) with black lights.

The form of the stopping pattern of the fourth pattern is not limited to the form shown in this example, and may be configured to derive and display the stopping pattern of the fourth pattern in a form that allows distinction of the type of jackpot or the type of time-saving feature, for example.

In addition, in this example, a dedicated symbol is provided as the fourth symbol when the time-saving feature is lost, but this is not limited to the above, and the fourth symbol may be a common stopping symbol when the jackpot is hit and when the time-saving feature is lost.

(Command analysis process)
Next, the operation of the performance control means will be described. Figures 14-22 and 14-23 are flow charts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The performance control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, and in the command analysis process, the performance control CPU 120 checks the contents of the command stored in the command received buffer.

In the command analysis process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks whether a received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 100IWS611). Whether a command is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception counter with the read pointer. If the two match, no received command is stored. If a received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the performance control CPU 120 reads out the received command from the command reception buffer (step 100IWS612). After reading out the command, the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step 100IWS613). The increment of +2 is because 2 bytes (1 command) are read out at a time.

If the received performance control command is a variation pattern command (step 100IWS614), the performance control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS615). Then, it sets a variation pattern command reception flag (step 100IWS616).

If the received performance control command is a display result designation command (step 100IWS617), the performance control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in a display result designation command storage area formed in RAM 122 (step 100IWS618).

If the received performance control command is any of the pattern determination designation commands (first pattern determination A designation command, first pattern determination B designation command, first pattern determination C designation command, second pattern determination A designation command, second pattern determination B designation command, second pattern determination C designation command) (step 100IWS619), the performance control CPU 120 sets the determination command reception flag according to the received pattern determination designation command (step 100IWS620). For example, when the first pattern determination A designation command is received, the first determination A command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the first pattern determination B designation command is received, the first determination B command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the first pattern determination C designation command is received, the first determination C command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second pattern determination A designation command is received, the second determination A command reception flag is set. Also, for example, if a second symbol determination B designation command is received, a second determination B command reception flag is set. Also, for example, if a second symbol determination C designation command is received, a second determination C command reception flag is set.

If the received presentation control command is a jackpot start command (step 100IWS621), the presentation control CPU 120 sets the jackpot start command reception flag (step 100IWS622). If the received presentation control command is a jackpot end command (step 100IWS623), the presentation control CPU 120 sets the jackpot end command reception flag (step 100IWS624).

If the received performance control command is a command to specify the number of rescue time reductions to be 1 (step 100IWS625), the performance control CPU 120 stores the received command to specify the number of rescue time reductions to be 1 in a command storage area for specifying the number of rescue time reductions to be 1 formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS626).

If the received performance control command is a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command (step 100IWS627), the performance control CPU 120 stores the received rescue time reduction number 2 designation command in a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command storage area formed in RAM 122 (step 100IWS628).

If the received performance control command is a command to specify the number of times to shorten the time for rescue during recovery (step 100IWS629), the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display an initial result according to the number of times until the time for rescue based on the received command to specify the number of times to shorten the time for rescue (step 100IWS630). For example, if the EXT data of the received command to specify the number of times to shorten the time for rescue during recovery is "01 (H)" (if the number of remaining changes until the time for rescue is 100 or less), the initial result is displayed as "112", indicating that the number of remaining changes until the time for rescue is 100 or less. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received command to specify the number of times to shorten the time for rescue during recovery is "02 (H)" (if the number of remaining changes until the time for rescue is 101 or more and 200 or less), the initial result is displayed as "223", indicating that the number of remaining changes until the time for rescue is 101 or more and 200 or less. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received recovery time reduction number designation command is "08 (H)" (if the number of remaining fluctuations until the recovery time reduction occurs is 701 or more and 800 or less), the initial result is displayed as "889," indicating that the number of remaining fluctuations until the recovery time reduction occurs is 701 or more and 800 or less.

In addition, this is not limited to the case where an initial result indicating the number of remaining changes is displayed when the power is restored. For example, in the first change display after the power is restored, a display indicating the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached or a combination of symbols indicating the number of remaining changes may be displayed. Also, for example, within 1 to 100 changes after the power is restored, a display indicating the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached or a combination of symbols indicating the number of remaining changes may be displayed so that a suggestive display is displayed at a relatively early stage after the power is restored. Also, it may be configured so that the initial result does not indicate the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached (for example, in the configuration of Example 2 described later, the initial result may not indicate the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached).

If the received performance control command is a normal state designation command (step 100IWS631), the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to switch to a background image corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue background image corresponding to the sea mode) (step 100IWS632).

If the received presentation control command is a command to specify time-saving state A (step 100IWS633), the presentation control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to switch to a background image corresponding to time-saving state A (time-saving state via a jackpot) (for example, a yellow background image corresponding to sunset mode) (step 100IWS634).

If the received performance control command is a command to specify time-saving state B (step 100IWS635), the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to switch to a background image corresponding to time-saving state B (a time-saving state after the time-saving state has ended) (for example, a green background image corresponding to forest mode) (step 100IWS636).

If the received performance control command is a command to specify time-saving state C (step 100IWS637), the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to switch to a background image corresponding to time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving) (for example, an orange background image corresponding to the tangerine orchard mode) (step 100IWS638).

In this example, by executing the processing of steps 100IWS633 to S638, even if the time-saving state is the same, different background images are displayed depending on whether the time-saving state is a jackpot state, a time-saving state is a miss state, or a time-saving state is a rescue time-saving state. With this configuration, the difference in the game state can be clearly notified to the player, and interest can be increased.

In addition, the present embodiment is not limited to this, and a common background image may be displayed regardless of whether the time-saving state is a jackpot, a time-saving state is a miss, or a rescue time-saving state. For example, a common background image may be displayed in steps 100IW634, 100IWS636, and 100IWS638, and a common background image may be displayed in the time-saving state via a jackpot, the time-saving state is a miss, and the time-saving state is a rescue time-saving state.

If the received performance control command is a command to specify a special probability state (step 100IWS639), the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to switch to a background image that corresponds to the special probability state (for example, a red background image that corresponds to the flame mode) (step 100IWS640).

If the received performance control command is a right-hit notification start command (step 100IWS641), the performance control CPU 120 controls the right-hit notification LED 100IW20 to start lighting up (step 100IWS642). Note that in this example, the right-hit notification start command is sent at the start of the pattern determination period when a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed or when a time-saving rescue is activated (see steps 100IWS1126, S1134), so the right-hit notification LED 100IW20 starts lighting up at the start of the pattern determination period.

If the received performance control command is a command to end the right-hit notification (step 100IWS643), the performance control CPU 120 controls the right-hit notification LED 100IW20 to end its illumination (step 100IWS644).

If the received performance control command is any other command, the performance control CPU 120 executes processing to store the received performance control command and set a flag corresponding to the received performance control command (step 100IWS645). For example, if a command designating a large prize winning slot is received, the large prize winning slot flag is set to indicate that a prize has been won in the large prize slot. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS611.

(Customer waiting demo performance control process)
14-24 is a flowchart showing the customer waiting demo performance control process. As described above, in this example, when the reserved memory is not stored (i.e., the total reserved memory number is 0) at the end of the symbol determination period and the end of the big win game, the main board 11 transmits a customer waiting demo designation command to the performance control board 12.

When a customer waiting demo designation command is received, if 10 seconds have passed since the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command without receiving any other commands such as a performance control command at the time of the start winning (Y in step 105IWS250), the performance control CPU 120 executes the caption display execution lottery process (step 105IWS251).

In this example, during periods when no variable display is being performed, it is possible to display a caption indicating that the machine is equipped with a rescue time-saving function. In step 105IWS251, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to display a caption.

Figure 14-25 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of a caption display execution lottery table and a caption mode determination lottery table. Of Figure 14-25, Figure 14-25 (A) is a caption display execution lottery table used when the setting value is set to "1," and Figure 14-25 (B) is a caption display execution lottery table used when the setting value is set to "6."

As shown in Figures 14-25 (A) and (B), in this example, the rate at which captions are displayed while waiting for customers varies depending on the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction. With this configuration, the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction can be indicated by the presence or absence of captions displayed while waiting for customers.

In addition, as shown in Figs. 14-25(A) and (B), in this example, the setting value is configured to change the rate at which captions are displayed while customers are waiting. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest whether the setting value is favorable based on whether or not captions are displayed while customers are waiting.

Note that in FIG. 14-25, examples of setting value 1 and setting value 6 are shown for the sake of simplicity, but a table corresponding to each setting value may be provided, or a table corresponding to multiple setting values (e.g., setting values 1 to 3) may be provided.

When it is decided to display the telop (Y in step 105IWS252), the performance control CPU 120 executes a lottery process to determine the telop display mode (step 105IWS253). Then, the telop display is started (step 105IWS254).

In this example, it is possible to display the telop in a red presentation mode and a blue presentation mode. In step 105IWS253, the presentation mode for displaying the telop is determined by lottery.

Figure 14-25 (C) is a caption mode determination lottery table used when the setting value is set to "1," and Figure 14-25 (D) is a caption mode determination lottery table used when the setting value is set to "6."

As shown in Fig. 14-25 (C) and (D), in this example, the presentation of the telop displayed while waiting for customers is configured to differ depending on the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction. With this configuration, the presentation of the telop displayed while waiting for customers can indicate the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction.

In addition, as shown in Fig. 14-25 (C) and (D), in this example, the ratio of the presentation style of the telop display displayed while customers are waiting varies depending on the setting value. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest whether the setting value is set to an advantageous value depending on the presentation style of the telop display while customers are waiting.

Then, if three minutes have passed since receiving the customer waiting demo designation command without receiving any other commands, such as a performance control command at the time of the initial winning (Y in step 105IWS255), the performance control CPU 120 will play a demonstration movie (step 105IWS256).

Note that the display of subtitles while customers are waiting and the playback of demonstration movies will end when a performance control command is received at the time of the start of the winning.

Figure 14-26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a presentation mode for displaying subtitles. In the example shown in Figure 14-26, the screen transitions in the order of (A) (B) (C) or (A) (D) (E).

As shown in FIG. 14-26 (A), if the reserved memory is not stored when the pattern determination period has elapsed, a customer waiting demo designation command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Then, after the performance control board 12 receives the customer waiting demo designation command, if 10 seconds pass without receiving any other commands such as the performance control command at the time of the initial winning, and it is decided to display a caption while waiting for customers, a caption is displayed on the image display device 5 indicating that the machine is equipped with a rescue time-saving function.

At this time, if it is decided to display the caption display in blue presentation mode, caption display 108IW001 with a blue border is displayed (in the example of FIG. 14-26(B) the border is white). Also, if it is decided to display the caption display in red presentation mode, caption display 108IW002 with a red border is displayed (in the example of FIG. 14-26(D) the border is filled in black).

Then, when three minutes have passed since the performance control board 12 received the customer waiting demo designation command without receiving any other commands, such as the performance control command at the time of the initial winning, the image display device 5 starts playing a demonstration movie. Note that, as shown in Figures 14-26 (C) and (E), the subtitle display continues to be displayed even while the demonstration movie is being played.

(Preview notice setting process)
FIG. 14-27 is a flowchart showing the advance notice setting process (step S161) in the performance control process shown in FIG.

In this example, in the start winning judgment process (step S101) in the special symbol process, the occurrence of a start winning is detected, and a process is executed to store the reserved information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process is executed to predict the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value. Then, after the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the pre-reading judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

In the pre-reading preview setting process (step S161), for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the pre-reading preview performance are made based on the performance control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the initial winning.

For example, as shown in FIG. 14-27, the presentation control CPU 120 checks whether it has received a presentation control command at the time of the start winning (for example, a presentation control command for specifying the judgment results such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of reserved memories, and the look-ahead judgment) (step 108 IWS 701).

When a presentation control command for a start winning has been received, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether the number of reserved memories, including the reserved memory for which a presentation control command for a start winning has been newly received, is greater than the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction (step 108IWS702). In other words, it judges whether the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory newly stored due to the occurrence of a start winning is to be executed after the rescue time reduction has begun. Then, if the number of reserved memories is not greater than the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction, that is, if the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory newly stored due to the occurrence of a start winning is to be executed after the rescue time reduction has begun, the advance notice setting process is terminated.

In this example, by executing the processing of step 108IWS702, it is possible to execute a look-ahead preview performance that predicts the variable display at the time of the rescue time reduction among the variable displays corresponding to the pending memory stored before the rescue time reduction, while restricting the execution of a look-ahead preview performance that predicts the variable display after the variable display at the time of the rescue time reduction. In other words, it is configured to restrict the execution of a look-ahead preview performance across the rescue time reduction where the game status changes. This configuration makes it possible to avoid complication of the control processing and also to avoid inconsistencies in the presentation content.

If the number of reserved memories is greater than the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction, i.e., if the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory newly stored due to the occurrence of a start winning is to be executed before the rescue time reduction, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a pre-reading preview performance, and if so, the type and mode of performance (step 108 IWS 703).

Figure 14-28 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of a pre-reading preview performance execution decision table, a pre-reading preview performance type decision table, and a pre-reading preview performance mode decision table. In step 108IWS703, the tables shown in Figure 14-28 are used to decide whether or not to execute a pre-reading preview performance, and if so, what type and mode of performance to use.

Specifically, when the game state is a state other than time-saving state C, the pre-reading preview performance execution decision table shown in FIG. 14-28 (A) is used to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance, and when the game state is time-saving state C, the pre-reading preview performance execution decision table shown in FIG. 14-28 (B) is used to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance.

As shown in Figures 14-28 (A) and (B), in this example, the look-ahead preview performance can be executed in both cases where the display result is a jackpot or a miss, and is configured so that the look-ahead preview performance is executed more frequently in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a miss. Therefore, the execution of the look-ahead preview performance suggests that there is a high probability of a jackpot.

Furthermore, in this configuration, as shown in Fig. 14-28 (A) and (B), the time-saving state C is configured to execute the pre-reading preview performance less frequently when the display result is a miss than in game states other than the time-saving state C. With this configuration, in the case of the time-saving state C (i.e., when no jackpot has been generated for a long period of time), it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest when the pre-reading preview performance is executed but does not result in a jackpot.

In step 108IWS703, when it is decided to execute a look-ahead preview performance, if the gaming state is a state other than time-saving state C, the type of performance of the look-ahead preview performance to be executed is decided using the look-ahead preview performance type decision table shown in FIG. 14-28(C), and if the gaming state is time-saving state C, the type of performance of the look-ahead preview performance to be executed is decided using the look-ahead preview performance type decision table shown in FIG. 14-28(D). Specifically, the performance type is decided to be either a chance eye performance or a hold change performance.

The chance eye effect is an effect that suggests that the variable display that is the target of the pre-reading preview effect will be a jackpot by displaying a chance eye (in this example, "778") as the display result of the variable display executed before the variable display that is the target of the pre-reading preview effect. In the chance eye effect, for example, an effect is executed that teases whether or not the display result will be a chance eye (in this example, "778"). Also, for example, when the chance eye effect is executed in a red performance mode, a red chance eye (in this example, "778") is displayed as a stopped display, and when the chance eye effect is executed in a blue performance mode, a blue chance eye (in this example, "778") is displayed as a stopped display.

The hold change effect is an effect in which the hold display corresponding to the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead preview effect is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode, suggesting that the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead preview effect will be a jackpot. Also, for example, if the hold change effect is executed in a red presentation mode, a red hold display is displayed, and if the hold change effect is executed in a blue presentation mode, a blue hold display is displayed.

Figure 14-29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining specific examples of each type of preview effect. Among Figures 14-29, Figures 14-29 (A1) to (E1) show specific examples of chance eye effects, and Figures 14-29 (A2) to (B2) show specific examples of reserve change effects.

When the chance eye effect is executed as a pre-reading notice effect, after the one variable display is started as shown in FIG. 14-29 (A1), the left and right decorative symbols are displayed as stopped as shown in FIG. 14-29 (B1) and (C1). Then, as shown in FIG. 14-29 (D1), an effect is executed to suggest whether the central decorative symbol will stop as a "7" that becomes the chance eye "778" or a "6" that does not become the chance eye "778". After that, as shown in FIG. 14-29 (E1), when the central decorative symbol stops as a "7" and the chance eye "778" is displayed, it is suggested that there may be a reserved memory in the reserved memory that corresponds to the variable display that becomes a jackpot. Note that after the provocative effect is executed, a symbol other than the chance eye "778" (for example, "768") may be displayed as stopped.

When a hold change effect is executed as a look-ahead preview effect, as shown in Figures 14-29 (A2) and (B2), when a start winning occurs, a new hold display is displayed in a display mode (e.g., red) different from the normal mode, suggesting the possibility that a variable display resulting in a jackpot will be executed based on the hold memory corresponding to that hold display. In this example, the display mode of the hold display is taken over as the display mode of the active display. Note that the hold change effect is not limited to the mode shown in Figure 14-29, and may instead be such that a new hold display is displayed in the normal mode, and then changes to a display mode different from the normal mode at any time before the corresponding hold display and active display end.

Figure 14-30 is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period and the execution period of the look-ahead preview performance in the time-saving state via a jackpot and the time-saving state via a rescue. Of Figure 14-30, Figure 14-30(A) is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period and the execution period of the look-ahead preview performance in the time-saving state via a jackpot, and Figure 14-30(B) is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period and the execution period of the look-ahead preview performance in the time-saving state via a rescue. In the examples shown in Figures 14-30(A) and (B), it is assumed that the start winning occurs at the same timing.

As shown in FIG. 14-30(A), when a chance eye effect is executed as a look-ahead preview effect, an effect is executed to tease whether or not the chance eye pattern will stop in the variable display executed from the time the start winning occurs until the variable display of the look-ahead target starts, and then the chance eye pattern is displayed stationary. Because such teasing effects are included, when executing a chance eye effect, it is necessary to ensure a predetermined execution period (for example, 2 seconds) during at least one variable display.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14-30(A), when a hold change effect is executed as a look-ahead preview effect, the display mode of the hold display (or active display) changes at the timing when the start winning occurs, or at any timing across multiple change displays from the time when the start winning occurs until the change display of the look-ahead target ends. The display of the hold display and active display in the changed display mode is then continued until the change display of the look-ahead target ends. In other words, when a hold change effect is executed, it can be executed at any timing from the time when the start winning occurs until the change display of the look-ahead target ends, and can further continue until the change display of the look-ahead target ends.

In this way, even in the pre-reading preview performance, the chance eye performance and the hold change performance have different execution periods. In other words, the chance eye performance is executed for a specified period (e.g., 2 seconds) during one variable display, whereas the hold change performance is executed over multiple variable displays.

As mentioned above, in the time-saving state via a jackpot, the ultra-shortened variation (1.5 seconds) is not executed when a miss occurs, and the shortened variation (5 seconds) is mainly executed, but in the time-saving state via a rescue, the ultra-shortened variation (1.5 seconds) is mainly executed when a miss occurs. Therefore, as shown in Figure 14-30, in the time-saving state via a rescue, it is difficult to secure a period for executing the chance eye effect.

In this example, as shown in Figures 14-28 (C) and (D), in the time-saving state via a jackpot, both the chance eye effect and the reserve change effect can be executed as the look-ahead preview effect, while in the time-saving state via a rescue, the chance eye effect is restricted from being executed as the look-ahead preview effect, and only the reserve change effect can be executed. With this configuration, the look-ahead preview effect can be executed appropriately according to the game state.

In addition, in step 108IWS703, when it is decided to execute a look-ahead preview performance, if the gaming state is a state other than time-saving state C, the performance mode of the look-ahead preview performance to be executed is decided using the look-ahead preview performance mode decision table shown in FIG. 14-28 (E), and if the gaming state is time-saving state C, the performance type of the look-ahead preview performance to be executed is decided using the look-ahead preview performance type decision table shown in FIG. 14-28 (D). Specifically, it is decided to be either a red performance mode or a blue performance mode.

As shown in Figures 14-28 (E) and (F), in this example, the look-ahead preview performance can be executed using the red performance mode and the blue performance mode, and is configured so that the probability of executing the look-ahead preview performance using the red performance mode is higher in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a miss. Therefore, the execution of the look-ahead preview performance using the red performance mode suggests that there is a high probability of a jackpot.

In this configuration, as shown in Fig. 14-28 (E) and (F), when in time-saving state C, the pre-reading preview performance is executed only in the red performance mode. With this configuration, when in time-saving state C (i.e. when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the pre-reading preview performance is executed in the blue performance mode, which has a low jackpot expectation. In this example, when in time-saving state C, the pre-reading preview performance is executed only in the red performance mode, but when there is a miss, there is a 99% chance that the pre-reading preview performance is not executed. Therefore, it is configured to prevent frequent cases where the pre-reading preview performance is executed in the red performance mode but the display result is a miss.

In this example, by setting the determination ratio as shown in Figure 14-28, the execution ratio of the pre-reading preview performance, the ratio of performance types and performance modes can be made different between when the time-saving state C is in effect (i.e. when no jackpots have occurred for a long period of time) and when the time-saving state C is not in effect, thereby increasing interest.

In this example, as described below, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10 or less, the execution of the preview performance is restricted (only preview performances with high expectations may not be executed), but the execution of the look-ahead preview performance may also be restricted (for example, the execution rate may be reduced (or not executed). In this case, the execution rate of the look-ahead preview performance in the case of a miss may be reduced (or not executed), or the execution rate of the look-ahead preview performance of a type with high expectations may be reduced (or not executed).

In addition, without being limited to the example shown in FIG. 14-28, for example, even in time-saving state C, if a variable display is executed that indicates a jackpot or a time-saving miss, the execution of the pre-reading preview performance may not be restricted.

When the processing of step 108IWS704 is completed, the performance control CPU 120 sets the execution of the pre-read preview performance based on the determined content (step 108IWS704). For example, if it is determined that a chance eye performance is to be executed, in step 108IWS704, the chance eye flag is set as the execution setting for the chance eye performance. Then, in steps 108IWS809-S810 of the variable display start setting process described below, if the chance eye flag is set, the chance eye performance is executed by selecting a process table that includes the chance eye performance. The chance eye flag is reset when the variable display immediately before the variable display that is the subject of the pre-reading is executed.

Also, for example, if it is decided to execute a hold change presentation, in step 108 IWS704, the hold change presentation is executed by changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the command at the time of the start winning.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 14-31 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads out a variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 100IWS801). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop pattern) of the decorative pattern according to the variable pattern command read out in step 100IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 100IWS802). That is, the performance control CPU 120 executes the process of step 100IWS802, thereby realizing a display result determination means that determines the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the stop pattern of the decorative pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. In addition, when a pseudo consecutive win is specified by the variation pattern command, the performance control CPU 120 also determines a chance pattern (for example, a combination of patterns that are not a reach but are one pattern away from the jackpot pattern, such as "223" or "445") as a provisional stop pattern during the pseudo consecutive win in step 100IWS802. The performance control CPU 120 stores data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. In addition, in step 100IWS802, the performance control CPU 120 may determine whether or not a jackpot has been reached based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop pattern of the decorative pattern based only on the variation pattern command.

In step 100IWS802, if the received display result designation command indicates a "normal jackpot", the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative patterns in which three symbols are the same even numbers as the stopping symbols (normal jackpot pattern). If the received display result designation command indicates a "probable jackpot", the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative patterns in which three symbols are the same odd numbers as the stopping symbols (probable jackpot pattern). If the received display result designation command indicates a "sudden probable jackpot", the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative patterns of "135" as the stopping symbols (sudden probable jackpot pattern).

In the case of a "miss", a combination of decorative symbols other than those mentioned above is determined. However, if a reach effect is involved, a combination of decorative symbols with two matching symbols on the left and right is determined. Also, even if there is a miss, if it is a "time-saving miss", a combination of decorative symbols of the missing symbols including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) is determined. Note that the system may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of the missing symbols including different special symbols (for example, a heart-shaped symbol or a diamond symbol) depending on the type of time-saving effect. Also, if a setting is made to execute a chance eye effect, a combination of decorative symbols of the chance eye symbol (in this example, "778") is determined.

The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for determining the stopping pattern, and determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern using a stopping pattern determination table in which data indicating the combination of decorative patterns is associated with a numerical value. In other words, the stopping pattern is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative patterns that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

As for the decorative patterns, stopping patterns that evoke a jackpot (a combination of the same patterns on the left, center, and right) are called jackpot patterns. Among jackpot patterns, stopping patterns that evoke a chance jackpot (a combination of the same odd-numbered patterns on the left, center, and right) are called chance jackpot patterns. Among jackpot patterns, stopping patterns that evoke a normal jackpot (non-chances jackpot) (a combination of the same even-numbered patterns on the left, center, and right) are called non-chances jackpot patterns. Among jackpot patterns, stopping patterns that evoke a miss are called miss patterns.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the execution of a preview performance to be executed during the display of the fluctuation (step 108IWS802A). As a preview performance, for example, a timer performance can be executed in which a countdown is started after the fluctuation starts, and when the count reaches "0", a performance image suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot is displayed, and in step 108IWS802A, the execution setting of the timer performance can be set.

Figure 14-32 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a preview performance execution decision table and a preview performance mode decision table. In step 108IWS802A, if the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction exceeds 10 times, the preview performance execution decision table shown in Figure 14-32 (A) is used to decide whether or not to execute the preview performance, and if the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 times or less, the preview performance execution decision table shown in Figure 14-32 (B) is used to decide whether or not to execute the preview performance. Also, when it is decided to execute the preview performance, if the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction exceeds 10 times, the preview performance mode decision table shown in Figure 14-32 (C) is used to decide the performance mode of the preview performance, and if the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less, the preview performance mode decision table shown in Figure 14-32 (D) is used to decide the performance mode.

As shown in Figures 14-32 (A) and (B), in this example, the preview effect can be executed in both cases where the display result is a jackpot or a miss, and is configured so that the preview effect is executed more frequently in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a miss. Therefore, the execution of the preview effect suggests that there is a high probability of a jackpot.

Furthermore, as shown in Figs. 14-32(A) and (B), in this configuration, the rate at which the preview effect is executed is lower in a predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than in the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is more than 10). This configuration makes it possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a preview effect is executed but does not result in a jackpot during a predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less and the countdown effect and effect effects described below are executed).

In addition, during a specified period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when there are 10 or fewer plays remaining until the rescue time reduction), the countdown effect and effect effects described below are executed, but by restricting the execution of the timer effect as a preview effect at this time, it is possible to avoid multiple numbers indicating the counter being displayed, and to prevent them from interfering with each other.

As shown in Figures 14-32 (C) and (D), in this example, the preview effect can be executed in a red presentation mode (e.g., a red presentation image is displayed) and a blue presentation mode (e.g., a blue presentation image is displayed), and is configured so that the probability of the preview effect being executed in the red presentation mode is higher in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a miss. Therefore, the execution of the preview effect in the red presentation mode suggests that there is a high probability of a jackpot.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14-32(C) and (D), in this configuration, the rate at which the preview performance is executed in red presentation mode when the display result is a miss is lower in a predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, a period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than in the period before the predetermined period (in this example, a period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is more than 10). With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a preview performance is executed in red presentation mode during a predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, a period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) but does not result in a jackpot.

In addition, if the device is configured to be able to execute multiple types of preview effects with different jackpot expectations, execution may be restricted only for preview effects of a type with a high jackpot expectation (for example, if jackpot expectation is classified into five stages, preview effects of a type with a jackpot expectation of the fourth stage or higher) during a specified period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when there are 10 or fewer times remaining until the rescue time reduction).

In addition, without being limited to the example shown in FIG. 14-32, for example, even if the number of remaining plays until the rescue time-saving feature is 10 or less, if a variable display is executed that indicates a jackpot or a time-saving feature failure, the execution of the preview performance may not be restricted.

As mentioned above, in this example, in the case of time-saving state C, the execution of the pre-reading preview performance is restricted, but the execution of the preview performance may also be restricted (for example, the execution rate may be reduced (or not executed). In this case, the execution rate of the preview performance in the case of a miss may be reduced (or not executed), or the execution rate of the preview performance type with high expectation may be reduced (or not executed).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800 (step 100IWS803). Note that whether the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800 can be determined, for example, by checking whether a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command has been received.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table including a promotional performance according to the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached (step 100IWS804). For example, if the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is "01 (H)" (if the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached is 100), a process table including a promotional performance according to the remaining number of fluctuations "100 times" is selected. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is "08 (H)" (if the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached is 800), a process table including a promotional performance according to the remaining number of fluctuations "800 times" is selected. Then, the process proceeds to step 108IWS812.

If the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs is not 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs is 0 (step 108IWS805). Note that whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs is 0 can be determined, for example, by checking whether the value of the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 1 designation command is 0.

When the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 0, the presentation control CPU 120 checks whether the display result is a jackpot or not (step 108IWS806A). When the display result is not a jackpot, the presentation control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time-saving entry presentation that notifies the player that the rescue time reduction will control the player to the time-saving state (step 100IWS806B). With this configuration, the time-saving entry presentation can clearly notify the player that the rescue time reduction will control the player to the time-saving state, thereby increasing the player's interest when the rescue time reduction is reached.

On the other hand, if the display result is a jackpot, the presentation control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time-saving entry pseudo presentation that notifies the player that a jackpot has been reached after executing a presentation of a common type to the time-saving entry presentation (step 100IWS806C). Then, the process proceeds to step 108IWS812. With this configuration, the player is notified of a jackpot after first recognizing that the number of remaining changes until the time-saving rescue period is reached is 0, which provides a sense of surprise to the player and increases their interest.

In this example, if the display result is a jackpot when the number of times the time-saving feature has been changed is reached, a special time-saving feature change pattern for a jackpot is used to create a time-saving effect, but this is not the only option. For example, a full rotation effect (in other words, a jackpot is confirmed) in which the three decorative symbols change while remaining aligned can be executed, which is not executed unless the number of times the time-saving feature has been changed is reached. By configuring the game in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of surprise and specialness, and to increase interest.

In addition, for example, if the display result is a jackpot when the number of times the rescue time-saving fluctuations is reached, the same fluctuation pattern for a jackpot as usual may be used, or a fluctuation pattern that specifies a reach effect with a short fluctuation time may be used.

In this example, if the display result is a miss when the number of times the time-saving time is reached, a dedicated pattern for the miss of the time-saving time is used, but this is not limited to the above. For example, a pattern for a miss similar to that of normal time-saving time may be used, or a pattern for specifying a reach performance with a short time may be used. By configuring in this way, the pattern can be made common before and after the number of times the time-saving time is reached, and data capacity can be reduced. In this case, when the pattern determination period has elapsed, the time-saving state C is entered, and the image display device 5 is switched to a background image (in this example, an orange background image) corresponding to the time-saving state C (time-saving state via the time-saving time-saving) (see step 078IWS638), so that the change in the background image can notify that the time-saving state is being controlled by the time-saving time-saving state.

If the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is not 0, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10 or less (step 108IWS807). Note that whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10 or less can be determined, for example, by checking whether the value of the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 1 designation command is 10 or less.

If the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table including a countdown performance and an effect performance according to the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached (step 108IWS808). For example, if the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 1 designation command is "0A (H)" (if the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10), a process table including a countdown performance and an effect performance according to the count number "10" until the rescue time reduction is reached is selected. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 1 designation command is "01 (H)" (if the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 1), a process table including a countdown performance and an effect performance according to the count number "1" until the rescue time reduction is reached is selected. Then, the process proceeds to step 108IWS812.

In this example, when the number of remaining changes until a rescue change occurs is 10 or less, a countdown effect and an effect are executed. This configuration makes it possible to make the player look forward to a rescue change, increasing interest. It is also possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage by quitting the game just before a rescue change occurs.

In this example, the remaining number of changes until the rescue time reduction occurs is determined based on the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command and rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, and a teasing effect or a countdown effect is executed, but this is not limited to the above. For example, when a background designation command that designates a background image is transmitted, the EXT data of the background designation command may be set to a value corresponding to the remaining number of changes until the rescue time reduction occurs and transmitted. The performance control CPU 120 may then determine the remaining number of changes based on the EXT data of the received background designation command, and execute a teasing effect or a countdown effect.

In this example, when the number of remaining changes until the rescue change is 10 or less, the countdown effect and the effect effect are always executed, but it may be determined by lottery whether they are executed or not. Also, for example, when the number of remaining changes until the rescue change is not 10 or less, it may be determined by lottery whether a so-called fake countdown effect and effect effect (for example, executed in a manner common to the countdown effect and the effect effect, but is interrupted midway without continuing until the count number "0" is reached. See FIG. 14-42) is executed or not. In this case, it may be configured so that the rate at which the countdown effect and the effect effect (including real and fake) are executed is higher when the number of remaining changes until the rescue change is 10 or less than when it is not 10 or less. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player expect a rescue change and increase the interest. It is also possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage to the player due to the player ending the game just before the rescue change.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction occurs is not 10 or less (N in step 108IWS807), the presentation control CPU 120 checks whether the chance eye presentation has been set to be executed (step 108IWS809), and if the chance eye presentation has been set to be executed, the presentation control CPU 120 selects a process table including the chance eye presentation (including a presentation that suggests whether or not a chance eye will be generated) (step 108IWS810). Note that if the chance eye presentation has not been set to be executed, it may be possible to determine by lottery whether or not to execute a presentation in which the chance eye pattern is not displayed after the presentation that suggests whether or not a chance eye will be generated (a so-called false chance eye presentation).

If the chance eye effect is not set to be executed, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the fluctuation pattern (step 108IWS811). Then, the process proceeds to step 108IWS812.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

The process table is a table in which process data is set that the performance control CPU 120 refers to when controlling the performance device. That is, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (performance parts) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data that is a collection of multiple combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating the manner of change that constitutes the change manner during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is included. In addition, the process timer setting value is set to the change time for that change manner. The performance control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display of the decorative pattern in the change manner set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer setting value. In addition, the process table is stored in the ROM in the performance control board 12. In addition, a process table is prepared according to each change pattern.

The process table used when controlling the performance of a variation pattern involving a reach performance has process data set therein which indicates that the left pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and that the right pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a further predetermined time has elapsed. In addition, instead of setting the pattern to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the pattern may be generated by synthesizing according to the determined stopping pattern, or the provisional stopping pattern in the pseudo consecutive or sliding performance.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 108IWS813). For example, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the audio control board 13 to output audio from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In this characteristic section 108IW, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern command.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value equivalent to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 108IWS814).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Variable display performance processing)
14-33 and 14-34 are flow charts showing the variable display performance process (step S172) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 100IWS841) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step 100IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 100IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer is set to the next process timer setting value in the process table (step 100IWS844). In addition, the control state for the performance device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data that are set next (step 100IWS845).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command has been received (step 100IWS846). Specifically, it checks whether the first confirmation A command reception flag or the second confirmation A command reception flag has been set in the command analysis process. If the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the mode transition performance (a performance that notifies the player of a transition to a time-saving state (time-saving mode)) and the right-hit notification (step 100IWS847). Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS848). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 100IWS849). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 20 seconds to a determined performance period timer for measuring the pattern determination period on the performance control means side (step 100IWS850). Then, it proceeds to step 100IWS862.

In this example, when the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command is received, there are cases where the time-saving function has missed during normal operation and cases where the time-saving function has rescued. In step 100IWS847, if the time-saving function has missed during normal operation, a process table corresponding to the mode transition effect for time-saving function misses and the right-hit notification is selected, and if the time-saving function has rescued, a process table corresponding to the mode transition effect for rescue time-saving function and the right-hit notification is selected. Whether the time-saving function has rescued and the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command has been received can be determined by, for example, checking whether the EXT data of the received rescue time-saving count 1 designation command is "00 (H)".

If neither the first pattern confirmation A designation command nor the second pattern confirmation A designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the first pattern confirmation B designation command or the second pattern confirmation B designation command has been received (step 100IWS851). Specifically, it checks whether the first confirmation B command reception flag or the second confirmation B command reception flag has been set in the command analysis process. If the first pattern confirmation B designation command or the second pattern confirmation B designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the continuation performance (performance that notifies the user that the time-saving state will continue) (step 100IWS852). Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS853). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 100IWS854). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds to a determined performance period timer for measuring the pattern determination period on the performance control means side (step 100IWS855). Then, it proceeds to step 100IWS862.

If neither the first pattern confirmation B designation command nor the second pattern confirmation B designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the first pattern confirmation C designation command or the second pattern confirmation C designation command has been received (step 100IWS856). Specifically, it checks whether the first confirmation C command reception flag or the second confirmation C command reception flag has been set in the command analysis process. If the first pattern confirmation C designation command or the second pattern confirmation C designation command has been received, it proceeds to step 100IWS858.

If neither the first pattern determination C designation command nor the second pattern determination C designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variable time timer has timed out (step 100IWS857). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the first pattern determination C designation command or the second pattern determination C designation command is received (Y in step 100IWS856), or when the variable time timer has timed out (Y in step 100IWS857), the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the normal pattern determination display (step 100IWS858). Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS859). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 100IWS860). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds to a determined performance period timer for measuring the pattern determination period on the performance control means side (step 100IWS861). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS862.

In this example, in addition to when a pattern determination command is received, if the variable time timer times out (see step 100IWS857), the process proceeds to step 100IWS858 and onwards and the pattern determination period begins. However, normally, unless a pattern determination command is missed, step 100IWS857 will be judged as Y and the process will not proceed to step 100IWS858 and onwards.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the special chart hit waiting process (step S173) (step 100IWS862).

(Waiting for special drawing)
FIG. 14-35 is a flow chart showing the waiting process for the special drawing hit (step S173) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 7. In the waiting process for the special drawing hit, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the fixed performance period timer (step 100IWS871), and checks whether the value of the fixed performance period timer after subtraction has timed out (step 100IWS872). If the value of the fixed performance period timer after subtraction has not timed out, the value of the process timer is subtracted by 1 (step 100IWS873), and executes the control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of the process data n (display control execution data n, lamp control execution data n, sound number data n) (step 100IWS874).

When the process timer times out (step 100IWS875), the performance control CPU 120 switches the process data (step 100IWS876). The performance control CPU 120 also sets the process timer to the next process timer setting value in the process table, and starts the process timer (step 087IWS877).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the decorative symbol stopping pattern is being displayed as a finalized pattern (step 100IWS878). If the decorative symbol stopping pattern is being displayed as a finalized pattern, the processing ends. If the decorative symbol stopping pattern is not being displayed as a finalized pattern, the performance control CPU 120 performs control to stop and display the determined stopping pattern (missing pattern (no time reduction), time reduction missing pattern, jackpot pattern) (step 100IWS879).

If the jackpot pattern is displayed as stopped in step 100IWS879 (Y in step 100IWS880), the presentation control CPU 120 sets a jackpot stop flag indicating that the jackpot pattern has been confirmed and displayed (step 100IWS881). Then, the process ends.

If the value of the fixed performance period timer after subtraction has timed out (i.e., the pattern fixed period has elapsed), the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the jackpot stop flag is set (step 100IWS882). If the jackpot stop flag is set, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether a jackpot start command has been received (step 100IWS883). Whether a jackpot start command has been received can be determined, for example, by checking whether a jackpot start command reception flag (see step 100IWS622) is set. If a jackpot start command has not been received, the process ends.

If a jackpot start command has been received, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance resets the jackpot stop flag (step 100IWS884). Next, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance selects a process table according to the mode transition performance (performance that notifies the player of a transition to a probability change state (probability change mode) or a time-saving state (time-saving mode)) and the performance during the jackpot, including a right-hit notification (step 100IWS885). Then, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 100IWS886), and executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as a performance component, and speaker 27 as a performance component) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 100IWS887).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during the jackpot (step 100IWS888).

If the jackpot stop flag is not set (i.e., if a losing symbol (no time reduction) or a time-reduction losing symbol is stopped and displayed), the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 100IWS889).

(Performance execution timing)
Next, the timing of the effect when the variable display that becomes the rescue time reduction is executed will be described. FIG. 14-36 is a timing chart for explaining the timing of the effect when the variable display that becomes the rescue time reduction is executed. As shown in FIG. 14-36, in the variable display immediately before the variable display that becomes the rescue time reduction (the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 1), the variable display of the special pattern and the decorative pattern is ended, and when the losing pattern (no time reduction) is stopped and displayed, the losing pattern (no time reduction) is displayed as a fixed pattern for a pattern determination period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100IWS1137). Next, in the variable display that becomes the rescue time reduction when the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0 at the start of the variable display (see steps 100IWS74, S75), the time reduction entry effect is executed in the image display device 5 during the variable display of the special pattern (see step 108IWS806B). Then, when the variable display of the special symbol is ended and the losing symbol (without time reduction) is stopped and displayed, the losing symbol (without time reduction) is displayed as a confirmed one for a symbol determination period of 20 seconds (see step 100IWS1135). Also, during the symbol determination period, as shown in FIG. 14-36, a mode transition effect is executed in the image display device 5 (see step 100IWS847). Next, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed during the symbol determination period, as shown in FIG. 14-36, a right-hit notification is started in the image display device 5 (see step 100IWS847). Next, when the symbol determination period has elapsed, the time reduction state C is entered, and as shown in FIG. 14-36, the background image (in this example, an orange display color background image) corresponding to the time reduction state C (a time reduction state via a rescue time reduction) is switched to in the image display device 5 (see step 100IWS638). With this configuration, a period of time can be secured for notifying the player that control of the time-saving state (rescue time-saving) will begin in the normal state, thereby clarifying the presentation when switching game states and increasing interest.

(Example of performance)
Next, a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to the time-saving state C, which is the rescue time-saving, will be described. Figures 14-37 to 14-40 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to the time-saving state. In Figures 14-37 to 14-40, the presentation screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

As shown in FIG. 14-37(A), the remaining number of changes until the rescue time reduction is displayed every 100 spins when the symbols stop. In this example, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol 100IW100 is displayed in the center of the screen, and the small symbol 100IW101 is displayed in the upper right. Then, for example, when there are 800 spins remaining until the transition to the rescue time reduction, the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 stop and a missing symbol (in this example, a combination of symbols "134") is derived and displayed. At this time, the remaining spin number display 100IW102 is displayed in the upper left, saying "800 spins left until rescue time reduction begins!". At this time, an explanation of the rescue time reduction (for example, an explanation of the rescue time reduction function and the effects during the rescue time reduction) is displayed at the bottom of the screen by the caption display 100IW103. With this configuration, the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine equipped with the rescue time reduction can be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-37(B), for example, when there are 700 spins remaining until the transition to the rescue time-saving mode, the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 stop and a missing symbol (in this example, the symbol combination "423") is derived and displayed. At this time, as in FIG. 14-37(A), the remaining spins display 100IW102 is displayed in the upper left corner, stating "700 spins left until rescue time-saving mode begins!". Also, at this time, an explanation of the rescue time-saving mode (for example, an explanation of the rescue time-saving function and the effects of the rescue time-saving mode) is displayed at the bottom of the screen by the caption display 100IW103.

In this example, as shown in Figures 14-37 (A) and (B), a teasing effect suggesting the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is performed every 100 changes, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the teasing effect may be configured not to be performed when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is between 400 and 800, but to be performed when the number of remaining changes is 300 or less (i.e., the remaining number of changes is 300, 200, or 100).

In addition, instead of necessarily executing the teasing effect when the number of remaining fluctuations is reached, for example, when a command specifying the number of rescue time reductions to be 2 is received, a lottery process based on random numbers is performed, and if it is decided to execute the teasing effect, the teasing effect is executed in the manner shown in Figures 14-37 (A) and (B). In this case, it is desirable to configure so that the execution rate of the teasing effect increases as the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached decreases.

As shown in Figures 14-37(C) to 14-38(E), when there are 10 spins remaining before the transition to the rescue time-saving mode, a countdown display 100IW104A is displayed in the center of the screen according to the number of remaining spins. For example, the countdown display 100IW104A shows a countdown from "10" to "1" each time the display of the changing patterns ends and the patterns stop. Each figure shows an example of a losing pattern (in this example, a combination of the patterns "653", "844", and "123") being derived and displayed.

Also, as shown in Figures 14-37(C) to 14-38(E), when there are 10 or more spins remaining before the transition to the rescue time-saving mode, the effect display 100IW104B is displayed in a range that corresponds to the number of remaining spins. In this example, as the number of remaining spins decreases (i.e., as the rescue time-saving mode approaches), the range in which the effect display 100IW104B is displayed becomes wider (the number displayed increases).

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-38 (E), when there is one spin left until the transition to the rescue time-saving mode occurs, the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are displayed in a varying manner, and the patterns stop and a losing pattern (in this example, the pattern combination "123") is derived and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-38(F), when there are 0 spins remaining until the transition to the rescue time-saving mode and the display of the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 changes (i.e., the display of the changes that will result in the rescue time-saving mode) starts, a time-saving entry effect is started to notify the player that the reel will be controlled to the time-saving mode (rescue time-saving mode), as shown in FIG. 14-38(G), and the time-saving entry effect display 100IW104C is displayed on the image display device 5. This configuration makes it possible to clearly notify the player that the reel will be controlled to the time-saving mode (rescue time-saving mode), and it is possible to increase the player's interest when the reel is controlled to the time-saving mode (rescue time-saving mode).

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-38(G), when the time-saving entry performance starts, the decorative symbol 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small symbol 100IW101 is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-38(H), when the symbols stop, the decorative symbol 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small symbol 100IW101 (in this example, the symbol combination "254") is derived and displayed.

In addition, in the time-saving entry performance, notifications that are generally made during the ending period of the first win, such as a warning to not forget to remove the prepaid card or a warning to prevent addiction, may be made, or the logo of the gaming machine manufacturer may be displayed. In this case, when making notifications during the time-saving entry performance, the notifications may be made in the same manner as when making notifications during the ending period of the first win, or may be made in a simplified manner. Furthermore, these notifications may not be made during the time-saving entry performance, but may be made during the ending period of the first big win after transitioning to the time-saving state due to the rescue time-saving.

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-39(I), when the pattern determination period begins, the mode effect start display 100IW105 "Super Hot!" is displayed, and the mode transition effect begins. Note that from then on, even during the mode transition effect, the decorative pattern 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-39(J), when the mode transition presentation starts, an operation suggestion image 100IW106 is displayed, which suggests operating (pressing) the push button 31B (see FIG. 14-1). For example, the operation suggestion image 100IW106 displays the word "press" together with an image encouraging the pressing of the push button 31B.

As shown in FIG. 14-39(K), when the push button 31B is operated when the operation suggestion image 100IW106 is displayed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the operation suggestion image 100IW106, the text display 100IW107 "V STOCK x 1" is displayed, notifying the player that the rescue time reduction will begin. In addition, the right-hit instruction display 100IW108, which instructs the player to hit to the right, is displayed next to the small pattern 100IW101.

In this example, even if a jackpot is hit, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) can be configured to execute a presentation that displays the text display "V STOCK x 1" in the same manner as in FIG. 14-39 (K). In this case, for example, in the start winning judgment process (step S101), the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs a look-ahead judgment process to determine whether or not a jackpot will be hit and the type of fluctuation pattern, and transmits a look-ahead judgment result designation command that can identify the look-ahead judgment result. Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes a presentation (so-called reserved consecutive presentation) in the same manner as in FIG. 14-39 (K) based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command. For example, if it is determined that there is one item in the reserved memory that will be a jackpot based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command, the reserved consecutive presentation is executed by displaying the text display "V STOCK x 1". Also, for example, if it is determined based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command that there are two jackpots in the reserved memory, the text display "V STOCK x 2" is displayed to execute the reserved consecutive performance.

On the other hand, when the rescue time reduction is activated, there is a high probability that the extremely short fluctuation display of 1.5 seconds will be executed during the time reduction state via the rescue time reduction (see FIG. 14-8 (E)). Therefore, the fluctuation display will be consumed very quickly and a jackpot is likely to occur at a relatively early timing. Therefore, during the fluctuation display that has been activated by the rescue time reduction (in this example, the pattern determination period), the effect of displaying the text display "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 14-39 (K) is executed without checking the results of the pre-reading judgment. Therefore, the effect of displaying the text display "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 14-39 (K) is an effect in the same manner as the pseudo-reserved consecutive effect, and is an effect that notifies the user that the rescue time reduction has been activated.

The example shows a case where the right hit instruction display 100IW108 starts to be displayed from the timing of the display of the text display 100IW107 "V STOCK x 1", but the timing of the start of the display of the right hit instruction display 100IW108 is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, the right hit instruction display 100IW108 may start to be displayed from the timing of the confirmation display of the stop pattern shown in FIG. 14-38 (H), and various modes are possible.

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-39 (L), a mode selection screen 100IW109 is displayed to select the presentation mode for the rescue time reduction. For example, a screen to select one of modes A to D is displayed. The mode is selected by moving the cursor by operating the stick controller 31A, and is confirmed by operating the push button 31B. Note that if a predetermined time has passed without selecting a presentation mode, the presentation mode that the cursor is aligned with is automatically confirmed. Also, even when the mode selection screen 100IW109 is displayed, the right hit instruction display 100IW108 remains displayed next to the small pattern 100IW101.

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-40 (M), when the selection of the presentation mode is completed, a start notification screen 100IW110 is displayed to notify that the rescue time reduction will start. For example, the words "Rescue time reduction started" are displayed. Then, when the next fluctuation starts, the game transitions to time reduction state C, and the rescue time reduction starts.

Next, we will explain the presentation style of the time-saving effect. Figure 14-41 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation style of the time-saving effect. The example shown in Figure 14-41 is carried out following the examples in Figures 14-37 (A) to (D).

As shown in FIG. 14-41 (E), when there is one spin remaining before the transition to the rescue time-saving mode occurs, the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are displayed in a varying manner, and then the patterns stop and a losing pattern (in this example, the pattern combination "123") is derived and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-41 (F'), there are 0 spins remaining until the transition to rescue time-saving mode, and the display of decorative pattern 100IW100 and small pattern 100IW101 begins to change. Note that although this change indicates that rescue time-saving mode has been established, the display result is a jackpot. Therefore, after the display result is derived and displayed, the game will transition to a jackpot game without transitioning to a time-saving mode due to rescue time-saving mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-41(G'), the time-saving entry appearance effect starts, and the time-saving entry appearance display 100IW104C in the same manner as the time-saving entry appearance effect is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that, as shown in FIG. 14-41(G'), when the time-saving entry appearance effect starts, the decorative pattern 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed, just as when the time-saving entry appearance effect starts.

As shown in FIG. 14-41(H), when the display of the time-saving entry performance display 100IW104C ends, the decorative symbol 100IW100 is not displayed when the symbols stop, and only the small symbol 100IW101 (the symbol combination of "254" in this example) is derived and displayed. The variable display of the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 stops, and the jackpot symbol (the symbol combination of "777" in this example) is derived and displayed. Then, the game moves to the jackpot game. With this configuration, the player is notified of the jackpot after first recognizing that the time-saving rescue has been established, which gives the player an element of surprise and increases interest.

When the configuration of this feature unit 108IW is applied to a gaming machine that is also configured to execute a special feature game in which control is made to a big win game based on the game ball winning (V winning) in a specific area (V winning area) in the special feature during a small win game, when the display result of the variable display that results in a rescue time-saving feature is a small win, a time-saving entry appearance effect may be executed to notify the player that a small win has occurred.

Next, we will explain the performance aspects of so-called false countdown performances and effect performances. Figure 14-42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining specific examples of the performance aspects of so-called false countdown performances and effect performances.

As shown in Figures 14-42 (A) to (C), when there are 49 spins remaining until the transition to the rescue time-saving mode, a so-called false countdown effect is executed, and a countdown display 100IW104A corresponding to the number of remaining spins being 10 is displayed in the center of the screen. Then, each time the display of the changing patterns ends and the patterns stop, a countdown from "10" is displayed.

Also, as shown in Figures 14-42 (A) to (C), when there are 49 spins remaining until the transition to the rescue time-saving mode, a so-called false effect is executed, and the effect display 100IW104B is displayed in a range corresponding to the number of remaining spins being 10. Then, each time the display of the changing patterns ends and the patterns stop, the range in which the effect display 100IW104B is displayed becomes wider (the number displayed increases).

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-42(E), the countdown display 100IW104A and the effect display 100IW104B are terminated before the remaining number of spins until the transition to the rescue time-saving mode is displayed in a manner corresponding to the case where there is one spin remaining. At this time, since the remaining number of spins until the transition to the rescue time-saving mode is not 0, the time-saving entry effect is not executed.

When the so-called fake countdown and effect effects shown in FIG. 14-42 can be configured to be executable, it is also possible to prevent the execution of teasing effects that suggest the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction, as shown in FIG. 14-37 (A) and (B). With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to easily distinguish whether the countdown display 100IW104A or the effect display 100IW104B is real or fake when it is displayed.

In this example, when the pattern stops, the remaining number of spins until the rescue time-saving feature and the explanation of the effects during the rescue time-saving feature and a countdown are displayed, but this may also be done when the pattern starts to change or while it is changing.

In addition, in this example, a pattern determination period of 20 seconds is secured in the variable display that results in rescue time reduction, and a mode transition effect and right-hit notification are executed, but the pattern determination period may remain the usual 0.5 seconds, and the game may be configured to transition directly to the time-saving state via rescue time reduction without performing a mode transition effect, etc.

In addition, this example shows a case where the rescue time-saving counter is initially set to "800" when the RAM clear process is executed, when a jackpot is hit, or when the time-saving function is not activated, but for example, when a story-based effect (such as a story reach effect or a story about whether to perform high-speed fluctuation) is to be executed, the selection buffer and story counter for that story may also be cleared. Also, it may be possible to configure the game so that a story can be set when the rescue time-saving function is activated, or so that different stories can be set depending on the game state.

(Variation 1)
In the above-mentioned characteristic part 108IW, the pattern determination period in the variable display that is the rescue time reduction is set to 20 seconds, which is longer than the usual 0.5 seconds, and the mode transition effect and the right hit notification are executed during the pattern determination period, but the processing mode is not limited to this. For example, the pattern determination period may be set to 0.5 seconds as usual, and then a delay period until the next variation is started is set, and the mode transition effect and the right hit notification are executed during the delay period. Below, a modified example 1 in which a delay period until the next variation is started is set and the mode transition effect and the right hit notification are executed is described.

Figure 14-43 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process processing in variant 1. As shown in Figure 14-43, in variant 1, the special symbol process processing includes the next change postponement processing (step 100IWS114) in addition to the processing shown in Figure 5. Note that in variant 1, the start winning determination processing (step 100IWS101) is executed in the same manner as the start winning determination processing (step 101) shown in Figure 5.

In variant 1, the normal special pattern processing (step 100IWS110) is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0". Also, the variable pattern setting processing (step 100IWS111) is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "1". Also, the special pattern variable processing (step 100IWS112) is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". Also, the special pattern stop processing (step 100IWS113) is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3".

In addition, the next change postponement process (step 100IWS114) is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4".

The pre-jackpot opening process (step 100IWS115) is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". The during-jackpot opening process (step 100IWS116) is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". The post-jackpot opening process (step 100IWS117) is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". The end of the jackpot process (step 100IWS118) is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8".

In addition, the small win pre-opening process (step 100IWS119) is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". In addition, the small win opening process (step 100IWS120) is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". In addition, the small win end process (step 100IWS121) is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "11".

In the first modified example, the normal special symbol processing (step 100IWS110) and the variable pattern setting processing (step 100IWS111) are the same as the normal special symbol processing (step S110) and the variable pattern setting processing (step S111) shown in FIG. 5. In addition, in the first modified example, the special symbol changing processing (step 100IWS112) and the special symbol stopping processing (step 100IWS113) are different from the special symbol changing processing (step S112) and the special symbol stopping processing (step S113) shown in FIG. 5 in that the symbol determination period is set to 0.5 seconds, the same as normal, even if the rescue time reduction occurs, and a first symbol determination C designation command or a second symbol determination C designation command is sent.

In addition, in the first modified example, the process before the big win opening (step 100IWS115) to the process after the small win ending (step 100IWS121) is the same as the process before the big win opening (step S114) to the process after the small win ending (step S120) shown in FIG. 5.

Figure 14-44 is a flow chart showing the special symbol stop processing (step 100IWS113) in the modified example 1. In the modified example 1, the processing of steps 100IWS131 to S171 of the special symbol stop processing is the same as those shown in Figures 14-16 and 14-17. In the modified example 1, when the rescue time reduction determination flag is reset in step 100IWS171, the CPU 103 sets a value equivalent to a predetermined postponement period (20 seconds in this example) to a postponement period measurement timer for measuring the postponement period until the start of the next fluctuation (step 100IWS171A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the next fluctuation postponement processing (step 100IWS114) (step 100IWS171B). The processing of step 100IWS175 is the same as the processing shown in Figure 14-17.

Figure 14-45 is a flowchart showing the next change postponement process (step 100IWS114) in variant 1. In the next change postponement process, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the postponement period measurement timer (step 100IWS191), and checks whether the value of the postponement period measurement timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS192). If the value of the postponement period measurement timer after the subtraction is not 0, the process ends.

If the value of the delay period measurement timer after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets the time-saving count counter to "800" (step 100IWS193) and sets the rescue time-saving count counter to "800" (step 100IWS193A). The CPU 103 also sets the time-saving flag C and controls the time-saving state (step 100IWS194). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a time-saving state C designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS195).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern processing (step 100IWS110) (step 100IWS196).

In addition, in variant example 1, the next change postponement process transitions to the time-saving state when the postponement period until the start of the next change (20 seconds in this example) has elapsed, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the next change postponement process may be configured to issue a right-hit notification and transition to the time-saving state at the start of the postponement period until the start of the next change or during the postponement period. In other words, the next change postponement process may be configured to control to the time-saving state and issue a right-hit notification, or it may be configured to only issue a right-hit notification without controlling to the time-saving state, and various other modes are possible.

In addition, in the first modified example, a uniform 20-second postponement period is measured in the next change postponement process, but this is not limited to this. For example, if a rescue time reduction counter is set (set to "800") at the timing of the rescue time reduction so that rescue time reductions can occur continuously, different postponement periods may be set for rescue time reductions in the normal state and rescue time reductions in the time reduction state. For example, when rescue time reduction occurs during the time reduction state, a shorter postponement period may be set and measured in the next change postponement process compared to rescue time reductions in the normal state, and the postponement period may be shortened for the second or subsequent rescue time reductions.

In addition, while the next change postponement process is being executed, the image display device 5 may be configured not to display decorative patterns, but to display only small patterns, so that the small patterns are not hidden by props or the like.

Moreover, in variant example 1, a case was shown in which the next change postponement process is executed to extend the period until the start of the next change when the time reduction is rescued, but this is not limited to such a case, and it may also be applied to the display of a change that is not in the time reduction state, and the next change postponement process similar to variant example 1 may be executed to extend the period until the start of the next change.

In addition, as described above, when applied to the variable display when the time-saving feature has failed, the processing of steps 100IWS154 to S168 shown in FIG. 14-17 may also be configured to be executed in the next variable postponement processing. If configured in this way, the pattern determination period of the variable display when the time-saving feature has failed can be made the same as the normal variable display at 0.5 seconds, and processing related to right-hit notifications, etc. can be executed in the same process as in the case of rescue time-saving features, etc.

Figure 14-46 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing a variable display that results in a rescue time reduction in modified example 1. As shown in Figure 14-46, in modified example 1, in the variable display immediately before the variable display that results in a rescue time reduction (the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 1), the variable display of the special pattern and decorative pattern ends, and when a losing pattern (no time reduction) is displayed stationary, the losing pattern (no time reduction) is displayed as a fixed pattern for a pattern determination period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100IWS1137). Next, in the variable display in which the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0 at the start of the variable display and the rescue time reduction occurs (see steps 100IWS74, S75), a time reduction entry effect is executed in the image display device 5 during the variable display of the special pattern (see step 108IWS806B). Then, when the display of the special pattern is finished and the losing pattern (no time reduction) is stopped and displayed, the losing pattern (no time reduction) is displayed as a fixed pattern for the same 0.5 second pattern determination period as usual (see step 078 IWS1135). Next, when the 0.5 second pattern determination period ends, as shown in FIG. 14-46, the next change postponement period of 20 seconds is started (see step 100 IWS114). Then, during the next change postponement period, as shown in FIG. 14-46, a mode transition performance is executed in the image display device 5. Next, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed during the next change postponement period, as shown in FIG. 14-46, a right-hit notification is started in the image display device 5. Next, when the next change postponement period has passed, the time reduction state C is entered, and as shown in FIG. 14-46, the background image (in this example, an orange display color background image) corresponding to the time reduction state C (time reduction state via rescue time reduction) is switched to in the image display device 5.

When configured as in variant 1, a change stop signal may be output at the start of the pattern determination period of the losing pattern, and after the pattern determination period has elapsed, a jackpot 4 signal may be output at the start of the next change postponement process (i.e., the start of the next change postponement period). The jackpot 4 signal here is a signal that is output to the outside during the next change postponement period after the pattern determination period of the change display that has become the rescue time shortening. This configuration makes it possible to avoid signals being missed externally when the change stop signal and jackpot 4 signal are output simultaneously.

Furthermore, when configured as in variant example 1, a test signal or external output signal indicating that the player is in a gaming state in which it is expected that he or she will perform a right hit may be output at the start of the next change postponement process (i.e., the start of the next change postponement period), or a right hit notification may be initiated. With this configuration, a signal regarding a right hit can be output or a right hit notification can be issued at the appropriate time.

(Modifications 2 to 4)
In addition, in the above-mentioned characteristic part 108IW, during the time-saving state controlled based on the rescue time-saving, the fluctuation pattern table E (see FIG. 14-8 (E)) is uniformly selected to display the fluctuation of 1.5 seconds at high speed, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. Below, modified examples 2 to 4 in which the method of selecting the fluctuation pattern during the time-saving state based on the rescue time-saving is different will be described. FIG. 14-47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining modified examples 2 to 4 of the method of selecting the fluctuation pattern during the time-saving state based on the rescue time-saving, and modified example 8-37 is an explanatory diagram for explaining modified examples 2 to 4 of the method of selecting the fluctuation pattern during the time-saving state based on the rescue time-saving.

First, a method of selecting a variation pattern during the time-saving state based on the rescue time-saving in the modified example 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 14-47(A). In the above-mentioned characteristic part 108IW, regardless of whether 800 variation displays are executed after the RAM clear process (without a jackpot or a time-saving miss) or 800 variation displays are executed after a jackpot or a time-saving miss (without the next jackpot or a time-saving miss), the variation pattern tables F and G (see FIG. 14-8(F) and (G)) are uniformly selected 10 variations before the rescue time-saving, and a 5-second or 12-second variation display is executed at a high rate to execute the countdown effect and the effect effect, and after the rescue time-saving is entered and the time-saving state is controlled, the variation pattern table E (see FIG. 14-8(E)) is uniformly selected to execute a 1.5-second high-speed variation display, but this is not limited to such an embodiment.

For example, as shown in variant example 2 of FIG. 14-47, in the case where 800 fluctuation displays are performed after the RAM clear process and a rescue time reduction is achieved, even if it is between 10 fluctuations and 1 fluctuation before the rescue time reduction, fluctuation pattern table B (see FIG. 14-7(B)) is selected to perform the same fluctuation display as normal, and after the time reduction state is controlled based on the rescue time reduction, fluctuation pattern table C (see FIG. 14-7(C)) is selected to select a fluctuation pattern similar to the time reduction state when a jackpot is reached, and a 5-second fluctuation display may be performed at a high rate.

For example, as shown in Variation 3 of FIG. 14-47, in the case where 800 variable displays are performed after a jackpot is hit and a rescue time-saving period is reached, a variable pattern for rescue time-saving period misses (for example, variable pattern PA3-1) is selected from the variable pattern table I (see FIG. 14-8 (I)) when the 800th variable display is performed, and a variable display with a variable time of 25 seconds is performed. Note that, in the above-mentioned characteristic part 108IW, the time-saving period entry effect is performed during the variable display, and the mode transition effect and right-hit notification are performed during the pattern determination period, but it may be configured to perform, for example, a mode transition effect and right-hit notification during the 25-second variable display (therefore, in this case, the pattern determination period may be secured for 0.5 seconds as usual).

In addition, in variants 2 and 3 of FIG. 14-47, the presentation can be made different by varying the selection rate of the change pattern in the change display that results in rescue time reduction between when rescue time reduction occurs after RAM clear processing and when rescue time reduction occurs after a jackpot, and the presentation can be made different by varying the selection rate of the change pattern in the change display after transitioning to a time reduction state via rescue time reduction.

Also, for example, as shown in variant example 4 of FIG. 14-47, it may be configured to select fluctuation pattern table B (see FIG. 14-7(B)) to display fluctuations in the same way as normal even when it is between 10 fluctuations and 1 fluctuation before the rescue time reduction, select fluctuation pattern table C (see FIG. 14-7(C)) during the time reduction state based on the first rescue time reduction to select a fluctuation pattern similar to the time reduction state when a jackpot is reached and display fluctuations of 5 seconds at a high rate, and select fluctuation pattern table E (see FIG. 14-8(E)) during the time reduction state based on the second rescue time reduction to display fluctuations of 1.5 seconds at high speed.

Example 2
Next, a gaming machine according to Example 2 in the characteristic unit 108IW of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 14-48 to 14-54. Note that, with regard to Example 2, differences from Example 1 will be mainly described.

In Example 2, in principle, the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction occurs or the approaching rescue time reduction are not indicated. Therefore, in Example 2, a fluctuation pattern table for immediately before the rescue time reduction, such as fluctuation pattern table F shown in FIG. 14-8 (F) in Example 1 or fluctuation pattern table G shown in FIG. 14-8 (G) is not provided. In other words, if the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 14-8 (F) and (G) is used to determine the fluctuation pattern only immediately before the rescue time reduction, there is a possibility that the player will realize that the rescue time reduction is about to occur due to the tendency of the fluctuation pattern, but by not using such a fluctuation pattern table, it is possible to prevent the player from realizing.

In addition, in Example 2, a variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)) that is also used for variation displays that do not result in rescue time reduction is used for the variation display that results in rescue time reduction, rather than a dedicated variation pattern for rescue time reduction. Therefore, in Example 2, a variation pattern table for variations when rescue time reduction occurs, such as variation pattern table I shown in FIG. 14-8 (I) in Example 1 or variation pattern table J shown in FIG. 14-8 (J) is not provided. With this configuration, it is possible to standardize the variation pattern when rescue time reduction occurs and before rescue time reduction occurs, and the data volume can be reduced.

(Variation pattern setting process in Example 2)
Next, the fluctuation pattern setting process in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 14-48 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S111) in the second embodiment. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the jackpot flag is set (step 100IWS1701). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table A for the jackpot shown in FIG. 14-7 (A) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1702).

If the jackpot flag is not set (i.e., if it is a miss), the CPU 103 checks whether the high probability flag is set (step 100IWS1707). If the high probability flag is set (i.e., if it is in a high probability state), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table H for misses during a high probability state shown in FIG. 14-8 (H) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1708). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the combined reserved memory counter, and selects the fluctuation pattern table H on the condition that the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 1 or more, and if the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 0 (i.e., if there is no reserved memory), selects the fluctuation pattern table B for misses during a normal state shown in FIG. 14-7 (B).

If the probability variable flag is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag A, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via a jackpot, is set (step 100IWS1709). If the time-saving flag A is set (i.e., the time-saving state is controlled via a jackpot), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table C for a miss when the time-saving state is controlled via a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 14-7(C), as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1710). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the combined reserved memory counter, and selects the fluctuation pattern table C on the condition that the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 1 or more, and if the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 0 (i.e., there is no reserved memory), selects the fluctuation pattern table B for a miss when in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 14-7(B).

If the time-saving flag A is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag B, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via a time-saving miss, is set (step 100IWS1711). If the time-saving flag B is set (i.e., the time-saving state is controlled via a time-saving miss), the CPU 103 selects the miss fluctuation pattern table D shown in FIG. 14-7 (D) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1712). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the combined reserved memory counter, and selects the fluctuation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 1 or more, and if the value of the combined reserved memory counter is 0 (i.e., there is no reserved memory), selects the miss fluctuation pattern table B shown in FIG. 14-7 (B) for the normal state.

If the time-saving flag B is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag C, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via rescue time-saving, is set (step 100IWS1713). If the time-saving flag C is set (i.e., the time-saving state is controlled via rescue time-saving), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table E for deviations during the time-saving state controlled via rescue time-saving, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (E), as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1714).

If the time-saving flag C is not set either (i.e., in the normal state), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table B for misses in the normal state shown in FIG. 14-7 (B) as the table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1715).

Next, the CPU 103 determines which of the variation patterns shown in Figures 14-7 and 14-8 will be used based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 100IWS1702, S1708, S1710, S1712, S1714, and S1715 and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special pattern determination buffer (step 100IWS1716).

Once the variation pattern is determined, the CPU 103 performs control to send a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1717).

When the change time (change pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined in step 100IWS1716, the CPU 103 sets the change time data indicating the determined change time in the change time timer and starts measuring the change time (step 100IWS1718), and starts the change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the change display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 100IWS1719). The CPU 103 then updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol change processing (step 100IWS1720).

(Customer waiting demo performance control process in embodiment 2)
As described above, in the second embodiment, the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs or the fact that the rescue time reduction is near is not indicated in principle. Therefore, although a telop indicating that the rescue time reduction function is provided is displayed based on the reception of a customer waiting demo designation command (see FIG. 14-26), the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs or the fact that the rescue time reduction is near is not indicated by the presence or absence of this telop display or the performance mode. In other words, in the second embodiment, a telop explaining the rescue time reduction is always displayed in a common mode based on the reception of a customer waiting demo designation command.

In the second embodiment, it may also be possible to indicate the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs or that the rescue time reduction is approaching, depending on whether or not a caption display is executed and the presentation mode. However, during a predetermined period before the rescue time reduction occurs (e.g., a period when the number of remaining changes is 10 or less), it is desirable to limit the execution of the caption display (e.g., to execute it less frequently or not at all) compared to the previous period. By configuring it in this way, the background image changes suddenly when the rescue time reduction occurs (i.e., a notification that time reduction control due to the rescue time reduction is about to begin), providing a sense of surprise to the player and increasing interest.

(Variable display start setting process in the second embodiment)
Next, the variable display start setting process in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 14-49 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the second embodiment. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads out the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 100IWS801). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop pattern) of the decorative pattern according to the variable pattern command read out in step 100IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 100IWS802).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the execution of a preview performance to be executed during the display of the fluctuation (step 108IWS802A). As a preview performance, for example, a timer performance can be executed in which a countdown is started after the fluctuation starts, and when the count reaches "0", a performance image suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot is displayed, and in step 108IWS802A, the execution setting of the timer performance can be set.

Figure 14-50 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the preview performance execution decision table and the preview performance mode decision table in Example 2. In step 108IWS802A of Example 2, regardless of the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction, the preview performance execution decision table shown in Figure 14-50 (A) is used to decide whether or not to execute the preview performance. In addition, if it is decided to execute the preview performance, the preview performance mode decision table shown in Figure 14-50 (B) is used to decide the performance mode of the preview performance.

In Example 2, as shown in Figs. 14-50 (A) and (B), regardless of the number of remaining plays until the rescue time reduction, whether or not to execute a preview effect and the presentation style when executed are determined by a common ratio. Also, in Example 2, similar to Example 1, when the rescue time reduction is reached and the game moves to time reduction state C, the image display device 5 is configured to switch to a background image (in this example, a background image with an orange display color) corresponding to time reduction state C (time reduction state via rescue time reduction) (see step 078IWS638). With this configuration, the change in the background image (i.e., the notification that time reduction control by rescue time reduction is about to begin) is suddenly executed, which gives the player a sense of surprise and increases his interest.

As described above, in Example 2, the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs or whether the rescue time reduction is near is not indicated in principle, so the processing for executing teasing effects, countdown effects, and effect effects according to the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs, and the processing for displaying the initial result according to the number of times until the rescue time reduction is reached are omitted.

In the second embodiment, too, it may be possible to execute teasing effects, countdown effects, and effect effects according to the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is activated. However, during a predetermined period before the rescue time reduction is activated (e.g., a period when the number of remaining changes is 10 or less), it is desirable to limit the execution of teasing effects, countdown effects, and effect effects (e.g., execution rate is reduced, or they are not executed at all) compared to the previous period. By configuring in this way, the change in the background image (i.e., the notification that time reduction control due to the rescue time reduction is about to begin) is executed suddenly, which gives the player a sense of surprise and increases his interest.

As described above, in Example 2, the variable display that results in rescue time reduction does not use a special variable pattern for rescue time reduction, but rather uses a variable pattern that is also used for variable displays that do not result in rescue time reduction (for example, variable pattern PA1-1 (normal variable)). Therefore, in Example 2, processing for executing a time reduction entry effect or a time reduction appearance effect is omitted. With this configuration, for example, after the variable display of variable pattern PA1-1 (normal variable) is performed, a change in the background image (i.e., a notification that time reduction control by rescue time reduction is about to begin) is suddenly executed, providing a sense of surprise to the player and increasing interest.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern (step 108IWS811). Then, the process proceeds to step 108IWS812.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value equivalent to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 108IWS814).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Performance execution timing in Example 2)
Next, a description will be given of the timing of execution of the performance when executing the variable display that is the rescue time reduction in the embodiment 2. FIG. 14-51 is a timing chart for explaining the timing of execution of the performance when executing the variable display that is the rescue time reduction in the embodiment 2.

As shown in FIG. 14-51, the variable display immediately before the variable display that results in the rescue time reduction (the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 1) ends when the special pattern and decorative pattern variable display starts and the special pattern variable time (e.g., 12 seconds) has elapsed, and when the losing pattern (no time reduction) is stopped and displayed, the losing pattern (no time reduction) is confirmed and displayed for a pattern determination period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100IWS1137). Next, the variable display (see steps 100IWS74, S75) in which the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0 at the start of the variable display and the rescue time reduction ends when the special pattern and decorative pattern variable display starts and the special pattern variable time (e.g., 12 seconds) has elapsed, as in the immediately preceding variable display, and when the losing pattern (no time reduction) is stopped and displayed, the losing pattern (no time reduction) is confirmed and displayed for a pattern determination period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100IWS1137). Then, when the pattern determination period has elapsed, the game moves to time-saving state C, and as shown in FIG. 14-51, the image display device 5 switches to a background image (in this example, a background image with an orange display color) corresponding to time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving) (see step 100IWS638). This configuration can provide a sense of surprise to the player and prevent the presentation from becoming complicated. It can also clearly notify the player of the change in game state, which can increase the player's interest when the rescue time-saving state is reached.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-51, during the period in which the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., three times) after transitioning to time-saving state C, a right-hit notification is executed (see FIG. 14-52 (C1)). This configuration makes it possible to make the player aware that the game state is one in which right-hits are to be performed while preventing the presentation related to the transition to time-saving state C from becoming complicated, thereby preventing the occurrence of disadvantages to the player.

(Example of performance in Example 2)
Next, a specific example of the performance mode until the transition to the time-saving state C, which is the rescue time-saving in the second embodiment, will be described. Fig. 14-52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode until the transition to the time-saving state. In Fig. 14-52, the performance screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

In Example 2, as shown in FIG. 14-52(A), when the variable display that results in the rescue time reduction starts and the special pattern variable time (for example, 12 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 14-52(B), the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are derived and displayed as a combination of the missing patterns.

Then, when the pattern determination period has elapsed and the next variable display begins, as shown in FIG. 14-52 (C1), the image display device 5 switches to a background image (in this example, a background image with an orange display color) that corresponds to time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving), and a right-hit notification is executed.

If the reserved memory is not stored when the pattern determination period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 14-52 (C2), based on receiving a customer waiting demo designation command, the image display device 5 may switch to a background image (in this example, a background image with an orange display color) corresponding to the time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving), and a right-hit notification may be executed.

In addition, at the timings shown in Figures 14-52 (C1) and (C2), explanations regarding the rescue time reduction (for example, explanations of the rescue time reduction function and the effects of the rescue time reduction) may be provided using the caption display 100IW103 as shown in Figures 14-37 (A) and (B). In addition, no effects are executed indicating the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs or that the rescue time reduction is approaching, but the caption display 100IW103 as shown in Figures 14-37 (A) and (B) may be displayed at any timing. Such a configuration can enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

With the configuration shown in FIG. 14-52, the change in the background image (i.e., the notification that time-saving control through rescue time-saving will begin) is executed suddenly, providing a sense of surprise to the player and increasing interest.

In addition, changes in the game state can be clearly notified to the player, increasing the interest when a rescue time-saving feature is established. In addition, the fluctuation patterns can be standardized before and after a rescue time-saving feature is established, reducing data volume.

The presentation mode until transition to time-saving state C, which is the rescue time-saving mode in Example 2, is not limited to that shown in FIG. 14-52. For example, it may be something like modified example 1 shown in FIG. 14-53 or modified example 2 shown in FIG. 14-53.

(Example of performance in the second embodiment [Modification 1])
FIG. 14-53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode up to the transition to the rescue time reduction in variant example 1 of embodiment 2.

In the first modified example shown in FIG. 14-53, as shown in FIG. 14-53(A), when the variable display immediately before the variable display that results in the rescue time reduction is stopped and then the variable display that results in the rescue time reduction is started, as shown in FIG. 14-53(B), a time reduction entry effect (blackout effect) is executed on the image display device 5, making it difficult to see the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100, etc.) that was displayed immediately before.

Then, when the special pattern change time (for example, 12 seconds) has elapsed, the blackout state is cleared and the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are derived and displayed as a combination of the missing patterns, as shown in FIG. 14-53 (C).

When the pattern determination period has elapsed and the next variable display has begun, as shown in FIG. 14-53(D), the image display device 5 switches to a background image (in this example, a background image with an orange display color) corresponding to time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving), and a right-hit notification is executed. Note that at the timing of FIG. 14-53(C) when the blackout state is resolved, an image may be displayed or a sound effect may be output to notify that control of the time-saving state (rescue time-saving) is about to begin.

This configuration can provide a sense of surprise to the player and increase interest. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 14-53 can be realized, for example, by selecting a process table that includes a time-saving entry effect (blackout effect) when a variable display that results in a time-saving rescue is displayed during the variable display start setting process.

(Example of performance in the second embodiment [Modification 2])
Figure 14-54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode up to the transition to the rescue time reduction in variant example 2 of embodiment 2.

In the second modification shown in FIG. 14-54, as shown in FIG. 14-54(A), the variable display that results in the rescue time reduction is started, and when a predetermined period (e.g., 8 seconds) of the special pattern variable time (e.g., 12 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 14-54(B), the decorative pattern 100IW100 is displayed temporarily stopped in a combination of losing patterns on the image display device 5. However, at the timing shown in FIG. 14-54(B), the special pattern variable time has not elapsed, so the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed variable.

Then, as shown in FIG. 14-54(C), the image display device 5 executes a time-saving entry effect (blackout effect) that makes it difficult to see the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100) that was displayed immediately before. Also, while the time-saving entry effect (blackout effect) is being executed, the special pattern variation time passes, and the small pattern 100IW101 is derived and displayed as a combination of losing patterns. The time-saving entry effect (blackout effect) continues to be executed during the pattern determination period.

When the pattern determination period has elapsed and the next variable display has begun, as shown in FIG. 14-54(D), the blackout state is cleared on the image display device 5, and the background image is switched to one corresponding to time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving) (in this example, a background image with an orange display color). Also, as shown in FIG. 14-54(D), a right-hit notification is executed.

This configuration can provide a sense of surprise to the player and increase interest. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 14-53 can be realized, for example, by selecting a process table that includes a time-saving entry effect (blackout effect) when a variable display that results in a time-saving rescue is displayed during the variable display start setting process.

In addition, at the timing of Figures 14-53(C), (D), Figures 14-54(C), (D), etc., explanations regarding the rescue time reduction (for example, explanations of the rescue time reduction function and the effects of the rescue time reduction) may be provided using the caption display 100IW103 as shown in Figures 14-37(A) and (B). Such a configuration can enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

In the above-described embodiment 1 of the characteristic part 108IW, in the period before the rescue time reduction (for example, the period when the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue fluctuation is 10 or less), the determination of the fluctuation pattern that will be a super reach and the determination of the execution of the preview performance are restricted, whereas in the embodiment 2, neither is restricted. However, by combining these, for example, in the period before the rescue time reduction (for example, the period when the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue fluctuation is 10 or less), for example, the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) may be determined and a preview performance of a type with a low expectation among the preview performances may be executed. In other words, the determination of the fluctuation pattern that will be a super reach may be restricted, and the execution of a preview performance of a type with a high expectation among the preview performances may be restricted.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modified example shown above, as a performance (also called a rescue suggestion performance) that suggests the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction or that the rescue time reduction is approaching, a provocative performance, a countdown performance, an effect performance, or an initial result according to the number of times until the rescue time reduction or a caption display while waiting for customers (for example, the caption display 108IW101 shown in FIG. 14-26) is displayed, but is not limited to such a form. For example, at any timing during the fluctuation display or the fluctuation stop, the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction or the rescue time reduction may be suggested by the execution frequency or execution mode of an action performance that operates the movable body 32, a light emission performance that causes a light-emitting body such as a decorative LED to emit light in a specific mode (for example, to emit rainbow light), a vibration performance that vibrates the movable body 32, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, etc.

In addition, in the characteristic unit 108IW and each of the modified examples described above, if the presentation control command sent when the power is turned on (for example, a presentation control command instructing recovery from a power outage or a presentation control command instructing initialization) cannot be received properly by the presentation control board 12 (for example, if a command is missed or garbled), normal presentation can be executed based on commands specifying the game state or commands specifying the variation pattern, but rescue suggestion presentations that indicate the number of variations remaining until the rescue time reduction occurs or that the rescue time reduction is approaching may not be executed (note that they may be executed once a jackpot has occurred). This configuration makes it possible to prevent the player from getting their hopes up due to erroneous rescue suggestion presentations.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modified example shown above, if the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command or rescue time reduction number 2 designation command (sent each time the variable display is executed in this example) that designates the number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is not received properly, the rescue suggestion effect may not be executed. In this case, the rescue suggestion effect may not be executed only during the variable display in which the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command or rescue time reduction number 2 designation command was not received properly, or the rescue suggestion effect may not be executed until the next big win occurs. Also, for example, if the command is not received properly, the rescue suggestion effect may be executed with a presentation mode or execution rate that suggests that there are many remaining fluctuations that will result in the rescue time reduction (i.e., the rescue time reduction is not close). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from getting hopeful due to an erroneous rescue suggestion effect.

In addition, the characteristic unit 108IW and each modified example shown above are applied to a gaming machine that controls to a big win game based on the variable display result, but this is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the configuration of controlling to a time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state shown in the characteristic unit 108IW and each modified example shown above may be applied to a gaming machine that is configured to be able to execute a role game that controls to a big win game based on the game ball winning (V winning) in a specific area (V winning area) in the role game during a small win game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples shown above, the number of times the time until the rescue time reduction occurs is fixed at 800, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the value set in the rescue time reduction counter may be switched to "800" or "900" depending on whether the RAM clear process is being executed or a jackpot has occurred, or the value set in the rescue time reduction counter may be switched randomly to "800" or "900".

In the characteristic portion 108IW and each of the modified examples described above, the time-saving flag C is set each time a rescue time-saving event occurs, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the time-saving flag (fourth value) set for the second rescue time-saving event after a second transition may be different from the time-saving flag (third value) set for the first rescue time-saving event.

In the characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples described above, different effects (fluctuation patterns) are used for the time-saving state after a jackpot and the rescue time-saving state, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the same effects (fluctuation patterns) may be used for the time-saving state after a jackpot and the rescue time-saving state. Specifically, the same notification (such as the notification in FIG. 14-39 (K) or a notification suggesting a future jackpot) may be given just before the end of the time-saving state after a jackpot and just before the start of the rescue time-saving state.

In the characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples described above, different effects (fluctuation patterns) are used for the time-saving state where the time-saving function has failed and the rescue time-saving function, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the same effects (fluctuation patterns) may be used for the time-saving state where the time-saving function has failed and the rescue time-saving function. Specifically, the same notification (such as the notification in FIG. 14-39 (K) or a notification suggesting a future jackpot) may be given just before the end of the time-saving state where the time-saving function has failed and just before the start of the rescue time-saving function.

As explained above, the characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 1A) to (Means 8A).

(Means 1A) A gaming machine that can execute variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and includes a state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-19) that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state) and a variable display The state control means is capable of controlling the numerical information to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, a part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-13, and a part that executes steps 100IWS75 and 100IWS76 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17). a predetermined suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion executing step 108IWS811 in the effect control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 14-49) that is capable of executing a predetermined suggestion effect (for example, a portion executing step 108IWS811 in the effect control CPU 120) when the variable display is being executed; and a predetermined suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion executing step 108IWS170 in the effect control CPU 120) that notifies the user that control of a special state is started based on the establishment of a special condition. The game device further includes a special notification effect execution means capable of executing a special notification effect (for example, a background image changes as shown in FIG. 14-52 (C1) and (C2), a blackout occurs when the fluctuation starts as shown in FIG. 14-53 (B), or a blackout occurs when the fluctuation ends as shown in FIG. 14-54 (C)) to notify the player of the occurrence of a certain condition (for example, a portion in which the CPU 120 for controlling the performance executes step 100IWS638 as shown in FIG. 14-23), and the predetermined suggestion effect execution means has a common ratio of executing the predetermined suggestion effect during the period before the special condition is established (for example, a portion in which the CPU 120 for controlling the performance executes step 108IWS802A as shown in FIG. 14-44. See FIG. 14-50). With such a configuration, the sudden execution of the special notification effect can surprise the player and increase his interest.

(Means 2A) In means 1A, the special notification effect execution means can execute a special notification effect when a variable display that meets a special condition is started, and the special notification effect is a form in which the effect display displayed on the display means before the special notification effect is started is made difficult to see (for example, blacking out when the variation starts, as shown in FIG. 14-53 (B)). Such a configuration can provide a sense of surprise to the player, increasing interest.

(Means 3A) Means 1A includes a variable display execution means for effecting, capable of executing a variable display of the effect identification information (e.g., a decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and the special notification effect execution means is capable of executing a special notification effect when the variable display that meets the special condition ends, and the special notification effect is in a form that makes the effect identification information difficult to see (for example, blacking out when the variation ends, as shown in FIG. 14-54 (C)). Such a configuration can provide a sense of surprise to the player, and increase interest.

(Means 4A) In means 1A, the special notification effect execution means is capable of executing a special notification effect when a variable display subsequent to the variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is being executed, and the special notification effect is a mode in which the background display in the display means is changed to a background display corresponding to a special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-52 (C1), a background image (orange) is displayed when the next variable display is executed). Such a configuration can provide a sense of surprise to the player, increasing interest. It can also prevent the effects from becoming cumbersome.

(Means 5A) Any of means 1A to 4A is provided with an explanation performance execution means capable of executing an explanation performance regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, at the timing shown in Figs. 14-52 (C1), (C2), 14-53 (D), and 14-54 (D), an explanation is given using a telop display 100IW103 as shown in Figs. 14-37 (A) and (B)). Such a configuration can enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 6A) Any of means 1A to 5A includes a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variable pattern setting process shown in FIG. 14-48) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns, and when a special condition is met, the variable display pattern determination means determines a variable display pattern that can be determined even before the special condition is met (for example, variable pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)), and the special notification effect execution means is capable of executing a special notification effect after a non-specific display result (for example, a losing pattern) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display when the special condition is met. With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special state has been controlled due to the fulfillment of the special condition, and to clearly notify the player of the change in the game state, thereby increasing the interest when the special condition is met.

(Means 7A) In any of means 1A to 6A, a variable display execution means (e.g., a part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112) capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the start condition, a hold memory means (e.g., a first hold memory number buffer and a second hold memory number buffer) capable of storing information related to the variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a hold memory means (e.g., a first hold memory number buffer and a second hold memory number buffer) capable of storing the numerical information updated by the update means and the hold information stored by the hold memory means even if the power supply is stopped. The game device includes a backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) that can be initialized, an initialization means (e.g., a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8) that can execute an initialization process to initialize the contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is met, and a recovery means (e.g., a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S6) that can execute a recovery process to restore the numerical information updated by the update means based on the contents of the backup storage means and the reserved information stored in the reserved storage means when the power supply is started. With such a configuration, while optimizing the control by the initialization process, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages to the player when a power interruption occurs in a situation where reserved information corresponding to the special number of variable displays is stored before the power supply is stopped.

(Means 8A) In any of means 1A to 6A, a state storage means capable of storing special state information (e.g., the state of time-saving flags A to C) that can identify that the device is being controlled in a special state, an execution count storage means capable of storing execution count information (e.g., the value of a time-saving count counter) that can identify the number of times a variable display has been executed in a special state, a backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) that can retain the special state information, execution count information, and numerical information even when power supply is stopped, and an initialization means (e.g., a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8) that can execute an initialization process to initialize the stored contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is met, and when the special state information, execution count information, and numerical information are held by the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is met, the initialization means initializes the special state information and the execution count information in the initialization process but does not initialize the numerical information (e.g., initializes the state of time-saving flags A to C and the value of the time-saving count counter, but does not initialize the value of the rescue time-saving count counter (i.e., sets the value before power outage)). Such a configuration can prevent the numerical information from being intentionally initialized, increasing the degree of relief available to the player.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 1B) to (Means 5B).

(Means 1B) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the execution of a variable display of a first identification information and a variable display of a second identification information, and that has a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., as shown in FIG. 14-17, a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 14-19, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100), and an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of a variable display (e.g., as shown in FIG. 14-13, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100). and a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable display pattern setting process shown in FIG. 14-14) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable display pattern setting process shown in FIG. 14-14). The state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable display pattern setting process shown in FIG. 14-14) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern (for example, the part executing step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17, the part executing step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100); the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the part executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-13); the variable display pattern determining means is capable of determining a specific variable display pattern in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and where it is not a specific display result (for example, as shown in FIGS. 14-7(A) and (B), the variable display pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the variable display pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) are different from the case of a jackpot). In the case of a specific display result, the variable display pattern is more likely to be determined as a specific variable display pattern than a predetermined variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display is a specific display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-7(A), the variable pattern PA2-2 (Super Reach α) and the variable pattern PA2-3 (Super Reach β) are more likely to be determined in the case of a jackpot than the variable pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)), and in the case of a specific period before the special condition is established, the variable display pattern is less likely to be determined as a specific variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display is not a specific display result than in the period before the specific period (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-8(F) and (G), the variable display pattern PA2-2 (Super Reach α) and the variable pattern PA2-3 (Super Reach β) are less likely to be determined immediately before the rescue time reduction). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a specific display result is not derived and displayed even though a variable display by a specific variable display pattern is executed in the specified period before the special condition is established.

(Means 2B) Means 1B is provided with a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing suggestive effects related to the establishment of a special condition (for example, a countdown effect, an effect effect, or a caption display while waiting for customers), and the suggestive effect execution means executes suggestive effects more frequently in a predetermined period before the special condition is established than in the period before the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31, the part where the performance control CPU 120 executes steps 108IWS807 to S809, and also the part where the performance control CPU 120 executes 105IWS251). Such a configuration makes the player look forward to the establishment of a special condition, increasing interest. It is also possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage caused by ending the game just before the special condition is established.

(Means 3B) Means 1B or 2B is provided with an explanation performance execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes steps 108IWS803 to S804) capable of executing an explanation performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-37 (A) and (B)), regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition, for example, providing an explanation using a telop display 100IW103). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 4B) In any of means 1B to 3B, a notice performance execution means is provided that can execute a notice performance (e.g., a timer performance) that notifies the user that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, and the notice performance execution means can execute a notice performance in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and where the notice performance is not a specific display result, and the rate of executing the notice performance is higher when the display result of the variable display is a specific display result than when the specific display result is not a specific display result, and the rate of executing the notice performance is lower in a predetermined period before the special condition is established (e.g., a period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than in the period before the predetermined period when the display result of the variable display is not a specific display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31, the part where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A. See FIG. 14-32 (A) and (B)). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a notice performance is executed in a predetermined period before the special condition is established but a specific display result is not derived and displayed.

(Means 5B) In any of means 1B to 4B, a preview performance execution means is provided that is capable of executing a preview performance (e.g., a timer performance) that notifies the user that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, and the preview performance execution means is capable of executing a preview performance using a specific mode (e.g., performance mode "red") and a predetermined mode (e.g., performance mode "blue") in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and where the display result is not a specific display result, and the percentage of the preview performance being executed using the specific mode is higher than the predetermined mode when the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, and the percentage of the preview performance being executed using the specific mode is lower during a predetermined period before a special condition is established (e.g., a period when the remaining number of times until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than during the period before the predetermined period when the display result of the variable display is not a specific display result (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A as shown in Figure 14-31. See Figures 14-32 (C) and (D)). With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a preview performance is performed in a specific mode during a specified period before the special condition is met, but a specific display result is not derived and displayed.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 1C) to (Means 8C).

(Means 1C) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and is controllable to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and a state control means that is controllable to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., as shown in Figure 14-17, a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100, and as shown in Figure 14-19, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100). The present invention is provided with an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of the variable display (for example, a portion executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-13), and a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable pattern setting process shown in FIG. 14-14) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern (for example, a variable pattern PA3-1 (entry miss)). The state control means determines whether the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed. Therefore, when a special condition is satisfied, the game can be controlled to a special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75, and as shown in FIG. 14-17, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS170 and 100IWS173), and the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS71 and 100IWS72). The variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a special variable display pattern when a special condition is met, but is not capable of determining a special variable display pattern before the special condition is met (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-14, a portion that executes steps 108IWS1701A and S1701B in the game control microcomputer 100), and further includes a specific notification effect execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31, a portion that executes step 108IWS806B in the game control microcomputer 100; see FIG. 14-38 (G) and (H)) that is capable of executing a specific notification effect that notifies the player that the game will be controlled to a special state when a special condition is met. With such a configuration, the player can be clearly notified that the game will be controlled to a special state when a special condition is met, and the player's interest when the special condition is met can be increased.

(Means 2C) In means 1C, the specific notification effect execution means is capable of executing a specific notification effect when a variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is executed and a non-specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, and is equipped with a special notification effect execution means capable of executing a special notification effect that notifies that a specific display result is derived and displayed after executing an effect in a common manner with the specific notification effect when a variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31, a part that executes step 108IWS806C in the game control microcomputer 100. See FIGS. 14-41 (G') and (H')). With such a configuration, the player is notified that the control will be controlled to an advantageous state after once recognizing that a special condition is satisfied, which gives the player a sense of surprise and increases interest.

(Means 3C) In means 1C or means 2C, when a variable display in which a special condition is met is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, a predetermined notification effect execution means is provided that can execute a predetermined notification effect (e.g., a full rotation effect) that notifies the player that a specific display result is derived and displayed in a manner that is not executed before the special condition is met. Such a configuration can provide the player with a sense of surprise and specialness, and can increase interest.

(Means 4C) In means 1C or means 2C, when a variable display in which a special condition is met is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, notification effect execution means is provided that can execute a notification effect that notifies that the specific display result will be derived and displayed in the same manner as before the special condition is met (for example, when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0, this is realized by determining variable pattern PB2-2 (super reach α) or variable pattern PB2-3 (super reach β) in the same way as when the value is not 0). With such a configuration, the variable display pattern can be made common when the special condition is met and before it is met, and data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 5C) In any of means 1C to 4C, the display period (e.g., 20 seconds) of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is met is longer than the display period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) of the display result of the variable display before the special condition is met (e.g., the part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS1135 as shown in FIG. 14-15; see FIG. 14-36), and a notification effect execution means (e.g., the part in which the effect control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS847 as shown in FIG. 14-33) capable of executing a notification effect that notifies that control of the special state is about to begin is provided. With such a configuration, a period for executing a notification effect in the normal state can be secured, and the effect can be clarified when switching the game state, while increasing interest.

(Means 6C) Any of means 1C to 5C includes a signal output means for outputting a specific signal (e.g., a variable stop signal) corresponding to the start of a display period of the display result of the variable display when a special condition is met, at the start of the display period, and outputting a special signal (e.g., a jackpot 4 signal) corresponding to the control of the special state after outputting the specific signal (see, for example, FIG. 14-18). With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid signals being missed externally when the specific signal and the special signal are output simultaneously.

(Means 7C) In means 6C, the signal output means outputs a special signal at the start of a special process (e.g., the next change postponement process shown in FIG. 14-45) that is executed after the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied has elapsed. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of signal omissions externally when a specific signal and a special signal are output simultaneously.

(Means 8C) In any of means 1C to 6C, a first passing area (e.g., a first start winning port) provided at a position where a gaming medium passing through a specific path (e.g., a path by hitting from the left) can pass through, a second passing area (e.g., a second start winning port) provided at a position where a gaming medium passing through a special path (e.g., a path by hitting from the right) can pass through, and a variable display execution means (e.g., a part where the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes step S112) capable of executing, as variable display of identification information, a variable display of a first identification information based on the first start condition being satisfied and a variable display of a second identification information based on the second start condition being satisfied) and a special output means capable of executing a special output capable of specifying that the gaming medium should be launched toward a special path (for example, outputting a test signal or an external output signal indicating that the player is in a gaming state in which a right hit is expected, or an indication that a right hit is in progress), where the first start condition is established based on the gaming medium passing through the first passing area, the second start condition is established based on the gaming medium passing through the second passing area, and the special output means is capable of executing a special output at the start of a special process (for example, the next variable postponement process shown in FIG. 14-45) that is executed after the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is established has elapsed. With such a configuration, a special output capable of specifying that the gaming medium should be launched toward a special path can be executed at an appropriate timing.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 1D) to (Means 5D).

(Means 1D) A gaming machine that can execute variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., a state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-19) 14-13, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS71), and a variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable pattern setting process shown in FIG. 14-48). The state control means determines whether or not a variable display pattern has been determined by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times that the variable display has been executed. When a special condition is satisfied, the game can be controlled to a special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75, and as shown in FIG. 14-17, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS170 and 100IWS173), and the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS170 and 100IWS173, and The variable display pattern determination means determines a variable display pattern (for example, a variable pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)) that can be determined even before the special condition is satisfied when the special condition is satisfied, and further includes a special notification effect execution means (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS638) that can execute a special notification effect (for example, display of a background image (orange) corresponding to a rescue time reduction) that notifies the player that control of the special state will begin after a non-specific display result (for example, a losing pattern) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of a change in the game state, and it is possible to increase the interest when the special condition is satisfied. In addition, it is possible to commonize the variable display pattern when the special condition is satisfied and before it is satisfied, and it is possible to reduce the data capacity.

(Means 2D) Means 1D includes a variable display execution means (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112) capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the satisfaction of the start condition, a hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage number buffer and a second hold storage number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a look-ahead prediction execution means capable of executing a look-ahead prediction performance (for example, a chance eye performance or a hold change performance) in which the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means is the preview target, and the look-ahead prediction execution means is capable of executing a look-ahead prediction performance in which the variable display when the special condition is satisfied is the preview target among the variable displays corresponding to the hold information stored before the special condition is satisfied, while restricting the execution of the look-ahead prediction performance in which the variable display after the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is the preview target (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS702 as shown in Figure 14-27). Such a configuration can prevent the control process from becoming too complicated and also prevent inconsistencies from occurring in the presentation.

(Means 3D) In means 1D or 2D, the special notification effect execution means is capable of executing a special notification effect when a variable display subsequent to the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is being executed, and the special notification effect is a form in which the background display in the display means is changed to a background display corresponding to the special state (see, for example, FIG. 14-52 (C1)). With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a sense of surprise to the player, increasing interest, and also to prevent the effects from becoming complicated.

(Means 4D) Any of means 1D to 3D is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing suggestion effects related to the establishment of a special condition (for example, a countdown effect, an effect effect, or a caption display while waiting for customers), and the suggestion effect execution means limits the execution of suggestion effects for a predetermined period before the special condition is established. With such a configuration, the special notification effect is suddenly executed, which gives the player a sense of surprise and increases his interest.

(Means 5D) In any of means 1D to 4D, an explanation execution means is provided that can execute an explanation regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, an explanation is given using a telop display 100IW103 as shown in Fig. 14-37(A) and (B) at the timing shown in Fig. 14-52(C1), (C2), Fig. 14-53(D), and Fig. 14-54(D). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 1E) to (Means 4E).

(Means 1E-1) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and includes a state control means that can control to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., as shown in FIG. 14-17, a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 14-19, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100), and a variable display is executed. and a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable display pattern setting process shown in FIG. 14-14) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern having a variable display period shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern, and the state control means determines whether or not a specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display. The game control means can control the game to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-19, the part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS537), and the game control means can control the game to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part in which steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 14-17, the part in which steps 100IWS170 and 100IWS17 in the game control microcomputer 100). 3), the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the variable display pattern determination means determines the shortened variable display pattern more frequently when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in the special state controlled when a special condition is established than in the special state controlled after being controlled in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-14, the part executing step 108IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100. See FIG. 14-7(C) and FIG. 14-8(E)). With such a configuration, when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a specific number, the variable display is executed with the shortened variable display pattern more frequently, and the period until the control to the next advantageous state is shortened, so that the decline in interest can be suppressed.

(Means 1E-2) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and includes a state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-19) that can control the gaming machine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and and a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable display pattern setting process shown in FIG. 14-14) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern (for example, variable pattern PA2-2 (Super Reach α) and variable pattern PA2-3 (Super Reach β)) that corresponds to the execution of a reach presentation. The state control means determines a variable display pattern based on a specific display result being derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display. The game control means can control the game to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-19, the part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS537), and the game control means can control the game to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part in which steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 14-17, the part in which steps 100IWS170 and 100IWS173 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100). The update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the variable display pattern determination means determines the specific variable display pattern at a lower rate when the display result of the variable display becomes a non-specific display result in the special state controlled when the special condition is established than in the special state controlled after being controlled in the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-14, the part executing step 108IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100. See FIG. 14-7(C) and FIG. 14-8(E)). With such a configuration, when the execution count of the variable display reaches a specific count, the rate at which the display result of the variable display by the specific variable display pattern becomes a non-specific display result is reduced, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

(Means 2E) Means 1E is provided with background display means (for example, a portion that executes steps 100IWS634, S638 in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 14-23) that can display different background displays on the display means for the special state that is controlled after control to an advantageous state and the special state that is controlled when a special condition is met. With such a configuration, the difference in the game state can be clearly notified to the player, increasing interest.

(Means 3E) In means 1E or means 2E, a variable display execution means (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112) capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the satisfaction of the start condition, a hold storage means (for example, a first hold memory number buffer or a second hold memory number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a look-ahead prediction execution means capable of executing a look-ahead prediction performance (for example, a chance eye performance or a hold change performance) with the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means as the prediction target, and the look-ahead prediction execution means has a different ratio of executing the look-ahead prediction performance and a different ratio of which of the multiple types of look-ahead prediction performances it executes between a special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state and a special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS703 as shown in Figure 14-27. See Figures 14-28 (A) and (B)). With this configuration, the frequency and type of pre-reading preview effects can be made different between the special state that is controlled after control to an advantageous state and the special state that is controlled when a special condition is met, which can increase interest.

(Means 4E) In any of means 1E to 3E, a variable display execution means (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112) capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the satisfaction of the start condition, a hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage number buffer or a second hold storage number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a look-ahead prediction execution means capable of executing a look-ahead prediction performance (for example, a chance eye performance or a hold change performance) in which the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means is the preview target, and the look-ahead prediction execution means is capable of executing a look-ahead prediction performance in which the variable display when the special condition is satisfied is the preview target among the variable displays corresponding to the hold information stored before the special condition is satisfied, while restricting the execution of the look-ahead prediction performance in which the variable display after the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is the preview target (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS702 as shown in Figure 14-27). This configuration makes it possible to avoid complicating the control process and to avoid inconsistencies in the presentation content.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 1a) to (Means 10a).

(Means 1a) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and that includes state control means that can control to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., as shown in FIG. 14-17, a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 14-19, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100), and update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display (e.g., as shown in FIG. 14-13, a part that executes step The state control means can control the state to a special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, thereby establishing a special condition (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75, and as shown in FIG. 14-17, a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173), and the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS71). With such a configuration, rescue of the player can be preferably realized. Specifically, even if the game state changes and any of the identification information is displayed variably, the numerical information continues to be updated, making it easier for the player to be rescued and increasing their motivation to play.

In this example, the initial value is set to the rescue time reduction counter when a jackpot occurs, but this is not the only possible embodiment. For example, multiple types of jackpots (jackpots that do not provide time reduction, jackpots that award a small number of game balls, jackpots with the second special symbol, etc.) may be provided, and the initial value of the rescue time reduction counter may not be set for some jackpots.

In this example, the first special symbol is mainly changed in the normal state, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the number of reserved memories may be increased so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol change in the normal state.

(Means 2a) In means 1a, the special condition may be configured to be established based on a predetermined display result (e.g., a losing pattern) different from the specific display result being derived and displayed a special number of times in succession as the display result of the variable display (for example, the part that executes steps 100IWS63, 100IWS71, 100IWS74, and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-13, and the part that executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17). With such a configuration, the player is relieved when a display result unfavorable to the player is derived and displayed in succession, so that a decline in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Means 3a) In means 1a or 2a, the update means may be configured to update the numerical information when a variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (e.g., a sure-win state, a time-saving state) (e.g., a portion that executes step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 14-17). Such a configuration can effectively realize rescue for the player. Specifically, the numerical information is updated fairly, and since the state can be controlled to the special state again even after it has been controlled to the special state, it is possible to control the state to the special state until it is effectively controlled to an advantageous state, which can reduce the player's investment and prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In this example, the rescue time-saving count counter is updated in the low probability low base (normal state), high probability high base (high probability state), and low probability high base (time-saving state), but this is not limited to the above. For example, the rescue time-saving count counter may be configured to be updated in all four states: low probability low base (normal state), high probability high base (high probability state), low probability high base (time-saving state), and high probability low base (latent high probability state). In this case, it is also applicable to gaming machines that execute a lottery for falling to the normal state in the high probability state.

In this example, the second special symbol is consumed first, but this is not the only possible embodiment. For example, a variable winning ball device 6B may be provided in the first start winning port, a high probability low base (small win RUSH) may be provided where small wins occur frequently, the balls may be consumed in the order in which they are won, and the first and second special symbols may change simultaneously.

In this example, a first special symbol and a second special symbol are provided, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the reel may be configured to only provide the first special symbol.

(Means 4a) In any of means 1a to 3a, the update means may be configured to set the numerical information to an initial value when a predetermined condition is met (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-16, the part that executes step 100IWS135 in the game control microcomputer 100, the part that executes step 100IWS144, and as shown in FIG. 14-17, the part that executes step 100IWS167 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, when the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent the tendency to gamble more than necessary.

(Means 5a) In means 4a, the predetermined condition may be configured to be control to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-16, the part that executes step 100IWS135 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, when the advantageous state is controlled, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent the tendency for gambling from becoming more than necessary.

(Means 6a) In means 4a, the state control means may be configured to be able to control to a special state when a special display result (e.g., a time-saving miss) different from a specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state (e.g., the part that executes step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17), and the predetermined condition is that a special display result is derived and displayed (e.g., the part that executes step 100IWS167 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17). With such a configuration, when the special state is controlled, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so that it is possible to prevent excessive gambling.

(Means 7a) In Means 4a, the predetermined condition may be configured so that the variable display is executed a special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-16, the part that executes step 100IWS144 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, it is essentially possible to control the game to a special state until the next advantageous state, thereby increasing the degree of relief for the player.

(Means 8a) Means 4a may be configured to include a backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding the numerical information updated by the update means even when the power supply is stopped, and the update means may be configured to set the numerical information held by the backup storage means to an initial value when a specific condition is met (e.g., execution of an initialization process) (e.g., as shown in FIG. 14-11, a portion that executes step 100IWS12 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the predetermined condition is that the specific condition is met (e.g., as shown in FIG. 14-11, a portion that executes steps 100IWS8 and 100IWS12 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the game center to operate, since if the numerical information up to the special number of times is held when initialization is performed in the game center, it may be too disadvantageous for the game center.

(Means 9a) In any of means 1a to 8a, a presentation control means corresponding to the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the presentation control CPU 120) is provided, and the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state for a specific period of more than a special number of times based on the execution of the variable display of a special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 14-17, a part that executes steps 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100). 172), and can be controlled to a special state for a specific period again based on the execution of a special number of variable displays in the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75, and as shown in FIG. 14-17, the part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS172), and the presentation control means may be configured to execute different presentations in the first specific period and the second specific period (for example, the part shown in modified example 4 in FIG. 14-47). With such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, it is not controlled to an advantageous state for a long period of time, so that a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed by taking measures such as shortening the execution time of the variable display to change the presentation mode.

(Means 10a) In any of means 1a to 8a, a presentation control means corresponding to the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the presentation control CPU 120) is provided, and the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state for a specific period of more than a special number of times based on the execution of the variable display of the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 14-17, a part that executes steps 100IWS172 in the game control microcomputer 100). The part that executes the above), and based on the execution of the variable display of the special number of times in the special state, it is possible to control again to the special state for a specific period (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 14-17, the part that executes step 100IWS172 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means may be configured to execute a common presentation in the first specific period and the second specific period (for example, the parts shown in Modifications 2 and 3 in FIG. 14-47). With such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, it is not controlled to an advantageous state for a long period of time, so by deliberately executing the same presentation, it is possible to prevent the player from being unnecessarily aware that the situation is not controlled to an advantageous state for a long period of time, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 1b-1), (Means 1b-2) to (Means 5b).

(Means 1b-1) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and is controllable to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and includes a gaming area in which gaming media can be shot into a first path (e.g., a path by hitting left) and a second path (e.g., a path by hitting right), and a state control means that can control to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-19). update means capable of updating numerical information based on execution of a variable display (for example, a portion executing step S100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-13); and process execution means for updating a data value indicating a game progress state required to execute a plurality of types of processes including control of the variable display and control of the advantageous state, and executing a process corresponding to the data value (for example, a portion executing step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 5). The state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times (for example, a portion executing step S100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-13). 14-17, a portion which executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, a portion which executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-13), the processing execution means executes a first process relating to the variable display when the data value is a first numerical value (for example, a portion which executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 5), and when the data value is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value, When the data value is a third value different from the first and second values, the state control means executes a third process for controlling the state to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-43, the part that executes step 100IWS114 in the game control microcomputer 100). In the normal state, the game medium is fired to the first path to play, and in the special state, the game medium is fired to the second path to play, and the game is characterized by having a launch promotion notification means (see FIG. 14-46) that executes a launch promotion notification to the effect that the game medium should be fired to the second path during the execution of the third process. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by issuing a launch promotion notification to the second path before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to execute a performance related to the launch promotion notification early when being controlled to the special state.

(Means 1b-2) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and that has a state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-19) that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and a state control means that executes numerical information based on the execution of the variable display and a process execution means (for example, a portion executing step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 5) that updates a data value indicating a game progress state required to execute a plurality of types of processes including control of variable display and control of advantageous state, and executes a process corresponding to the data value. The state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times (for example, a portion executing step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-13). the part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75, and the part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173 as shown in FIG. 14-17), the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS67 as shown in FIG. 14-13), the processing execution means executes a first processing relating to the variable display when the data value is the first numerical value (for example, the part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS75 as shown in FIG. 5). The present invention is characterized in that it is provided with a means for executing steps S110 to S113, which executes a second process related to an advantageous state when the data value is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a part that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100), a third process for controlling the state to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition when the data value is a third numerical value different from the first and second numerical values (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-43, a part that executes steps 100IWS114 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a presentation execution means (see FIG. 14-46) that executes a notification presentation that notifies the player that the game is being controlled to a special state during the execution of the third process. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by issuing a launch promotion notification to the second path before the game is controlled to the special state, a presentation related to the launch promotion notification can be executed early when the game is controlled to the special state.

In this example, priority is given to processing related to the jackpot, but this is not the only possible embodiment. For example, the system may be configured to prioritize processing related to the variable display or processing related to the rescue time reduction.

In this example, a right-hit notification is given in the third process, the next change postponement process, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the device may be configured to execute only a mode transition effect that suggests a transition to a time-saving state without a right-hit notification.

(Means 2b) In means 1b-1 and 1b-2, the process execution means may be configured to execute a second process after the first process when a specific display result is derived and displayed in a variable display where a special condition is met (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-16, when step 100IWS133 in the game control microcomputer 100 is Y, step 100IWS140 is executed and step 100IWS114 is not executed). With such a configuration, priority is given to control of an advantageous state, so that a disadvantageous result is not reached for the player and a decline in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Means 3b) In means 1b-1, means 1b-2 or means 2b, the update means may be configured to update the numerical information when variable display is started (for example, a portion that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-13), the processing execution means may be configured to change the special information from first information to second information when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value (for example, a portion that executes step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17), change the special information from second information to first information when the state control means controls to a special state (for example, a portion that executes step 100IWS145 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-16), and execute different processing when the special information is the first information and when it is the second information (for example, a portion that executes step 100IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-14). With this configuration, the process of transitioning to a special state can be executed optimally by managing the special information.

(Means 4b) Means 3b may include a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 5) that determines the variable display pattern of the variable display, and the variable display pattern determination means may be configured to determine a different variable display pattern when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information (for example, a portion that executes step 100IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-14). With such a configuration, it is possible to perform an appropriate presentation when the special number of variable displays is executed.

(Means 5b) Means 3b may include a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 5) that determines a variable display pattern for the variable display, and the variable display pattern determination means may be configured to determine a variable display pattern in which the confirmation time of the display result differs when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information (for example, a portion that executes steps 100IWS1128 and 100IWS1130 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-15). With such a configuration, it is possible to perform an appropriate presentation when the special number of variable displays is executed.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown in (means 1c) to (means 6c) below.

(Means 1c) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and is controllable to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and includes a game control means capable of controlling the game (e.g., a part that executes step S25 in the presentation control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 5) and a presentation control means that controls the presentation corresponding to the variable display (e.g., a part that executes step S25 in the presentation control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 7). The game control means includes a state control means (for example, a portion executing steps S170 to S172 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-31 and a portion executing step S108IWS811 in the performance control CPU 120) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. The game control means includes a state control means (for example, a portion executing steps S100IWS166 and S100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17 and a portion executing step S100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-19). The game control means includes a part for executing step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100), an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of a variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a part for executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a state information control means for controlling state information capable of specifying a state controlled by the state control means, and the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on a specific display result being derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-12, a part for executing step 100IWS64 in the game control microcomputer 100), and is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, a part for executing steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100). 14-17, the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), the status information control means sets the status information to a first numerical value in the normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-16, the part that executes step 100IWS145 and step 100IWS149 in the game control microcomputer 100, i.e., neither the time-shortening flag A nor C is set, and the corresponding data is "0"), and sets the status information to a second numerical value when the special state is controlled after the advantageous state is controlled based on the specific display result being derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-19, the game control microcomputer 100 When the special state is entered based on the establishment of a special condition, the status information is set to a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-17, the part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS173, i.e., the time-saving flag C is set and the data corresponding to the time-saving flag C is "1"); the game control means is capable of transmitting specific information to the presentation control means, and when the special state is entered, the game control means is capable of transmitting specific information according to whether the status information is the second numerical value or the third numerical value (for example, the part shown in FIG. 14-10, the part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS540 as shown in FIG. 14-19, and the part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS174 as shown in FIG. 14-17). Such a configuration allows for optimal control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become more complex. For example, different game states can be easily identified, making control easier, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, the presentation can be performed optimally when the presentation control means executes a different presentation.

In this example, a time-saving state A designation command or a time-saving state C designation command is sent as the specific information, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the background designation command or the variation pattern command may be configured to be sent in a manner that allows identification that the time-saving state is a jackpot, a time-saving state is a miss, or a time-saving state is a rescue time-saving state. Also, for example, when a jackpot is hit, a jackpot start designation command (fanfare designation command) or a jackpot end designation command (ending designation command) may be sent in different modes depending on the game state, and the fanfare period or ending period may change depending on which command is received.

(Means 2c) In means 1c, the state information control means may be configured to set the state information to a fourth numerical value different from the first, second and third numerical values when a special condition is satisfied again after the state has been controlled to a special state based on the satisfaction of a special condition (for example, a portion that executes step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100). Such a configuration allows for suitable control even when new functions are added and the specifications become more complex. For example, control becomes easier because different game states can be suitably identified, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, a suitable presentation can be executed when the presentation control means executes a different presentation.

(Means 3c) In means 1c or 2c, the presentation control means may be configured to be able to execute different presentations when the state control means controls to a special state based on the derived display of a specific display result and when the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, the presentation control CPU 120 is the part that executes steps 100IWS634, S638). With such a configuration, the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition can be efficiently consumed, making it possible to execute presentations according to the situation, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(Means 4c) In any of means 1c to 3c, the presentation control means may be configured to execute a common presentation when the state control means controls to a special state based on the derived display of a specific display result and when the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a common background image in steps 100IWS634 and 100IWS638). With such a configuration, it becomes possible to make the presentation in the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition the same every time, which prevents an increase in development costs since a new presentation is not required and increases the interest of the game since it does not confuse the player.

(Means 5c) In any of means 1c to 4c, the state control means may be configured to control to a special state when a special display result (e.g., a time-saving miss) different from the specific display result in the normal state is derived and displayed (e.g., a part that executes step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17), and the presentation control means may be configured to execute different presentations when the state control means controls to a special state based on the derived display of a special display result and when the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (e.g., the presentation control CPU 120 is a part that executes steps 100IWS636, S638). With such a configuration, the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition can be efficiently consumed, making it possible to execute presentations according to the situation, and improving the interest of the game.

(Means 6c) In any of means 1c to 4c, the state control means may be configured to control to a special state when a special display result different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state, and the presentation control means may be configured to execute a common presentation when the state control means controls to a special state based on the derived display of a special display result and when the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a common background image in steps 100IWS636 and 100IWS638). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the presentation in the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition the same every time, which prevents an increase in development costs since a new presentation is not required, and increases the interest of the game since it does not confuse the player.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (means 1d) to (means 4d).

(Means 1d) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and is controllable to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and is equipped with a game control means capable of controlling the game (e.g., a part that executes step S25 in the presentation control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 5) and a presentation control means that controls the presentation corresponding to the variable display (e.g., a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the presentation control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 7, and a part that executes step 108IWS811 in the presentation control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 14-31), and The means include a state control means capable of controlling to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., a portion executing steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17, and a portion executing step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-19), an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of the variable display (e.g., a portion executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-13), and a control means for controlling the number of times the variable display is executed when power supply is stopped (e.g., a portion executing step 100IWS72 in the game control microcomputer 100). and a backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information relating to the special number of times, and the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (e.g., a portion that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-13, and a portion that executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17), and the update means changes the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed. The information is updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the gaming control microcomputer 100), and the gaming control means can transmit predetermined information to the presentation control means when power supply is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-11, the part that executes step 100IWS11 in the gaming control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means can execute a suggestion presentation regarding the number of times the variable display is executed during a predetermined period after power supply is started based on receiving the predetermined information (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-22, the part that executes step 100IWS630 in the presentation control CPU 120). With such a configuration, even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be made possible. For example, players can be motivated to play from the opening of the gaming facility, which can increase the operating rate of the gaming machines.

In this example, the initial result is shown as a suggestion regarding the number of times the variable display will be executed, but this is not limited to the above. For example, it may be configured to execute suggestion effects such as a change in the background, effects during the change up to 100 spins, or displays on the demo screen or menu screen.

When a command specifying initialization (S9 in FIG. 14-12) is sent, the performance control CPU 120 may be configured to recognize the number of times until the rescue time reduction is reached as an initial value and execute the performance.

(Means 2d) In means 1d, the game control means may be configured to be able to transmit specific information capable of identifying the numerical information held in the backup storage means to the performance control means when power supply is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-11, the part that executes step 100IWS11 in the game control microcomputer 100). Such a configuration can enable suitable control even if new functions are added and the specifications become more complex. For example, this can motivate players to play from the opening of the gaming facility, thereby increasing the operating rate of the gaming machines and suppressing an increase in the processing burden.

In this example, a command capable of identifying the value of the rescue time reduction counter is sent upon recovery, but this is not limited to the above. For example, a command capable of identifying a predetermined range, such as 1 to 99 rotations in 100 rotation increments, 100 to 199 rotations, ... 500 to 599 rotations, may be sent, or a command may be sent that cannot identify rescue time reduction counter values of 128 or more, but can identify counter values of 127 or less.

(Means 3d) In means 1d or 2d, the game control means can transmit specific information to the presentation control means in relation to the execution of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-14, the part that executes step 100IWS1717 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means can execute a special presentation related to being controlled to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition based on the specific information (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31, the part that executes step 100IWS804 in the presentation control CPU 120), and the specific information may be configured to include first specific information that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number is less than a predetermined value (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-9, the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command) and second specific information that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number is greater than a predetermined value (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-9, the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command). Such a configuration can enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complex. For example, by periodically suggesting functions to players, the risk of unknowingly inflicting losses can be reduced and processing of specific information can be efficiently achieved.

Note that, in this example, a case is shown in which the second specific information, the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, is sent when the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number is greater than a predetermined value, but this is not the only possible aspect. For example, it may be configured not to send the second specific information, the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, when the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number is greater than a predetermined value.

(Means 4d) In any of means 1d to 3d, the presentation control means may be configured to be capable of executing a suggestive presentation that suggests that the game will be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established based on the execution of a first predetermined number of variable displays that is less than the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-33, the part that executes step 100IWS847 in the presentation control CPU 120, FIG. 14-39(I) to FIG. 14-40(M)), and to execute a suggestive presentation each time a second predetermined number of variable displays that is less than the first predetermined number of times is executed before the special number of variable displays are executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-31, the part that executes step 100IWS804 in the presentation control CPU 120, FIG. 14-37(A) to FIG. 14-38(F)). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by periodically suggesting functions to the player, the risk of unknowingly causing losses can be reduced.

In this example, the presentation is executed based on the count value of the rescue time reduction counter, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the presentation control CPU 120 may be configured to count the number of changes and execute the presentation after resetting the rescue time reduction counter.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 1e-1) and (Means 1e-2).

(Means 1e-1) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and is equipped with a gaming control means capable of controlling a game (e.g., a part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 5) and a performance control means that controls a performance corresponding to the variable display (e.g., a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 7, and a part that executes step 108IWS811 in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 14-31), and the gaming control means is a special state ( a state control means for controlling the variable display to a state in which the variable display is executed, for example, a time-shortened state (for example, a portion for executing steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17, and a portion for executing step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-19); an update means for updating numerical information based on the execution of a variable display (for example, a portion for executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-13); a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) for holding numerical information relating to the number of times the variable display is executed when the power supply is stopped; and an initialization means (e.g., a portion executing step S8 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-14) capable of initializing the storage contents of the backup storage means including information regarding the number of times the game has been derived and displayed successively. The state control means is capable of controlling the state to a special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times and a special condition is established (e.g., a portion executing steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-13, and a portion executing steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17). The update means is The numerical information is updated when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means executes different presentations when the special state is controlled by the state control means based on the establishment of a special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized and when the special state is controlled by the state control means based on the establishment of a special condition after the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized (for example, the parts shown in Modifications 2 and 3 of FIG. 14-47). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, since it is possible to know that the memory contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, the number of elements such as the estimation of setting values increases, which can improve the interest of the game.

(Means 1e-2) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and is equipped with a gaming control means capable of controlling a game (e.g., a part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 5) and a performance control means that controls a performance corresponding to the variable display (e.g., a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 7, and a part that executes step 108IWS811 in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 14-31), and the gaming control means is a special state ( a state control means capable of controlling the variable display to a state in which the variable display is executed, for example, a time-shortened state (for example, a portion executing steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17, and a portion executing step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-19); an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of a variable display (for example, a portion executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-13); a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information relating to the number of times the variable display is executed when power supply is stopped; and a predetermined display result when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The state control means is capable of controlling the state to a special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, and a special condition is established by the numerical information updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, a part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-13, and a part that executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17). The update means is capable of controlling the state to a special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, and a special condition is established by the numerical information updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, a part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-13, and a part that executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 14-17). The numerical information is updated when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means executes different presentations after being controlled to the special state when the state control means controls the state to the special state based on the establishment of a special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized and when the state control means controls the state to the special state based on the establishment of a special condition after the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized (for example, the parts shown in Modifications 2 and 3 of FIG. 14-47). With such a configuration, even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated, it is possible to enable suitable control. For example, since it is possible to know that the memory contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, the number of elements such as guessing the setting value increases, which can improve the interest of the game.

In this example, only fluctuation pattern table B is used after the RAM is cleared, but this is not limited to the above. For example, it may be configured to use multiple fluctuation pattern tables, just like after a jackpot.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine configurations shown in (means 1f) to (means 15h) below may be applied.

(Means 1f) A gaming machine that executes a variable display of a first identification information and a variable display of a second identification information, and is controllable to an advantageous state based on a specific display result being derived and displayed, and is equipped with a state control means that can control to a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, the state control means is controllable to the special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on a specific display result being derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, and a special condition is established when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times the variable display is executed. The update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, there are a plurality of types of advantageous states including a specific advantageous state and a special advantageous state, the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which of the plurality of advantageous states is controlled to, the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the special advantageous state is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the specific advantageous state, and the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when a special condition is established is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the specific advantageous state. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 1f to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, the special advantageous state is a special jackpot, the specific advantageous state is a regular jackpot, the time-shortening state after the special jackpot time-shortening state is more advantageous than the time-shortening state after a regular jackpot, and the time-shortening state for the rescue time-shortening state is more advantageous than the time-shortening state after a regular jackpot.

(Means 2f) In means 1f, the rate at which the game is controlled to a special state with a special advantage degree after being controlled to an advantageous state differs between when the variable display of the first identification information is triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when the game is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information, and the number of times the variable display is executed to establish a special condition is the same as the special number of times when the game is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when the game is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information. With such a configuration, it is possible to heighten interest by providing different gameplay characteristics between the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, while preventing excessive gambling from occurring due to the special number of times being the same between the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 2f to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, the rate at which the special advantage level in the time-saving state after a jackpot (time-saving continues until the next jackpot) becomes different between the first special pattern and the second special pattern, and the number of fluctuations of 800 times, which is the condition for controlling to the rescue time-saving state, is the same when controlling to a jackpot based on the first special pattern and when controlling to a jackpot based on the second special pattern.

(Means 3f) Means 1f or 2f is provided with a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values including an unfavorable setting value having a first probability of being controlled to an advantageous state and an advantageous setting value having a second probability of being controlled to an advantageous state higher than the first probability, and the special condition is more likely to be established when the setting is the unfavorable setting value than when the setting is the advantageous setting value, and the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. With such a configuration, even when an unfavorable setting value is set, the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state, so that the player can be rescued more effectively.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 3f to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, it is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values having different advantageous degrees for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities), and to execute a setting confirmation process or setting change process when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that it is possible to confirm the current setting value or change the setting value. For example, it is possible to change the setting to six levels from "1" to "6". Then, it is possible to configure the number of fluctuations that are the conditions for control to the rescue time reduction to be smaller when set to an unfavorable setting (for example, "1") than when set to an advantageous setting (for example, "6"), so that the advantageous degree in the rescue time reduction is higher than the advantageous degree in the time reduction state after the jackpot. In addition, an unfavorable setting (e.g., "1") has a higher rate of achieving rescue time reduction than an advantageous setting (e.g., "6"), and the rescue time reduction is always 800 times the number of time reductions (effectively until the next jackpot), so it may be more advantageous than a time reduction state via a jackpot (e.g., after a normal jackpot, the number of time reductions is 100).

(Means 4f) Any of means 1f to 3f is provided with a setting means capable of setting one of a number of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the degree of advantage of the special state to which the player is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state is common regardless of which setting value is set, and the degree of advantage of the special state to which the player is controlled when a special condition is met is common regardless of which setting value is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in gambling tendency due to the setting value that is set, and sound gameplay can be achieved.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 4f to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, it is possible to set one of multiple setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities), and execute a setting confirmation process or setting change process when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, making it possible to confirm the current setting value or change the setting value. For example, it is possible to change the setting to six levels from "1" to "6". Then, it is possible to configure it so that which of the multiple types of time-saving states is controlled to after a jackpot is the same regardless of which setting value is set, and the advantage in the rescue time-saving state is also the same regardless of which setting value is set.

(Means 5f) In any of means 1f to 4f, the proportion of the advantageous states among the multiple types to which the game is controlled differs between when the advantageous state is controlled in response to the variable display of the first identification information and when the advantageous state is controlled in response to the variable display of the second identification information, and the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after the special condition is established is the same when the special condition is established in response to the variable display of the first identification information and when the special condition is established in response to the variable display of the second identification information. With such a configuration, while different gameplay characteristics are exhibited in the case of performing the variable display of the first identification information and the case of performing the variable display of the second identification information, the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is the same regardless of which setting value is set, so that an appropriate degree of relief can be achieved while suppressing an increase in gambling.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 5f to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, the ratios controlled for normal jackpots and special jackpots are made different when a jackpot occurs due to the first special symbol and when a jackpot occurs due to the second special symbol, and the advantage of the rescue time reduction is the same when the rescue time reduction is controlled based on the first special symbol and when the rescue time reduction is controlled based on the second special symbol.

(Means 6f) In any of means 1f to 5f, a variable display pattern determination means is provided that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern, and the variable display pattern determination means has a higher probability of determining the shortened variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in a special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied than in a special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 6f is based on a configuration that uses, for example, the fluctuation pattern table E of Figure 14-8 (E).

(Means 7f) Any of means 1f to 6f includes a variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern corresponding to the execution of a reach effect, and the variable display pattern determination means has a lower rate of determining a specific variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in a special state controlled when a special condition is established than in a special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. Such a configuration can suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 7f is based on a configuration that uses, for example, the fluctuation pattern table E of FIG. 14-8 (E).

(Means 8f) In any of means 1f to 7f, the update means can update specific numerical information different from the numerical information based on execution of a variable display in a special state, the state control means can control to a special state by setting special information and can end the special state by canceling the setting of the special information, and the special state is ended based on the specific numerical information becoming a predetermined value corresponding to a predetermined number of times in the special state, backup storage means can hold the numerical information and specific numerical information updated by the update means and the setting information of the special information even if the power supply is stopped, and initialization means can initialize the storage contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is met, and the initialization means initializes the setting information of the special information and the specific numerical information when the predetermined condition is met, and does not initialize the numerical information. With such a configuration, the degree of salvation of the player can be increased even when the predetermined condition is met.

In addition, in this characteristic section 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 8f may be configured, for example, to initialize the time-saving flags A to C and the value of the time-saving count counter in the initialization process shown in FIG. 14-11, but not to initialize the value of the rescue time-saving count counter.

(Means 1g) A gaming machine that executes a variable display of a first identification information and a variable display of a second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state based on a specific display result being derived and displayed, comprising: a state control means that can control to a special state in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state; an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display; a variable display execution means that can execute a variable display based on the satisfaction of a start condition and the satisfaction of a start condition; a hold memory means that can store information regarding the variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied; a backup memory means that can hold the numerical information and the hold information when power supply is stopped; and a backup memory means that can store the hold information when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The game includes an initialization means capable of initializing the contents stored in the backup storage means, and a restoration means capable of executing restoration control for restoring the numerical information updated by the update means and the reserved information stored in the reserved storage means based on the contents stored in the backup storage means when power supply is started, and the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed, and is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established based on the execution of the variable display corresponding to the restored reserved information after the restoration control is executed, and the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages to the player while optimizing the control by initialization.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 1g to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, when the initialization process is executed, the rescue time reduction counter and the reserved memory are reset, while when the power outage is restored, the rescue time reduction counter and the reserved memory are restored, and when the fluctuation display corresponding to the reserved memory at the time of restoration reaches the 800th fluctuation and the condition for control to the rescue time reduction is met, the rescue time reduction can be controlled.

(Means 2g) In means 1g, the rate at which the game is controlled to a special state with a special advantage degree after being controlled to an advantageous state differs between when the variable display of the first identification information is triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when the game is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information, and the number of times the variable display is executed to establish a special condition is the same as the special number of times when the game is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when the game is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information. With such a configuration, it is possible to heighten interest by providing different gameplay characteristics between the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, while preventing excessive gambling from occurring due to the special number of times being the same between the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 2g to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, the rate at which the special advantage level in the time-saving state after a jackpot (time-saving continues until the next jackpot) becomes different between the first special pattern and the second special pattern, and the number of fluctuations that is the condition for control to the rescue time-saving state is the same when the jackpot is controlled based on the first special pattern and when the jackpot is controlled based on the second special pattern.

(Means 3g) Means 1g or 2g is provided with a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values including an unfavorable setting value having a first probability of being controlled to an advantageous state and an advantageous setting value having a second probability of being controlled to an advantageous state that is higher than the first probability, and the special condition is more likely to be established when the setting is unfavorable than when the setting is advantageous, and the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. With such a configuration, even when an unfavorable setting value is set, the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state, so that the player can be rescued more effectively.

To apply the gaming machine of means 3g to this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, for example, it is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities), and to execute a setting confirmation process or setting change process when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that it is possible to confirm the current setting value or change the setting value. For example, it is possible to change the setting to six levels from "1" to "6". Then, it is possible to configure the number of changes until the rescue time reduction is started to be smaller for an unfavorable setting (for example, "1") than for an advantageous setting (for example, "6"), so that the degree of advantage in the rescue time reduction is higher than the degree of advantage in the time reduction state after the jackpot. In addition, an unfavorable setting (e.g., "1") is more likely to result in a miss than an advantageous setting (e.g., "6"), and therefore is more likely to result in a rescue time reduction, and the rescue time reduction is always 800 times (effectively until the next jackpot), so it may be more advantageous than a time reduction state via a jackpot (e.g., after a normal jackpot, the time reduction is 100 times).

(Means 4b) Any of means 1g to 3g is provided with a setting means capable of setting one of a number of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the degree of advantage of the special state to which the game is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state is common regardless of which setting value is set, and the degree of advantage of the special state to which the game is controlled when a special condition is met is common regardless of which setting value is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in gambling tendency due to the setting value that is set, and sound gameplay can be achieved.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 4g to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, it is possible to set one of multiple setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities), and to execute a setting confirmation process or setting change process when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, making it possible to confirm the current setting value or change the setting value. For example, it is possible to change the setting to six levels from "1" to "6". Then, it is possible to configure it so that which of the multiple types of time-saving states is controlled to after a jackpot is the same regardless of which setting value is set, and the advantage in the rescue time-saving state is also the same regardless of which setting value is set.

(Means 5g) In any of means 1g to 4g, the proportion of the advantageous states among the multiple types to which the game is controlled differs between when the advantageous state is controlled in response to the variable display of the first identification information and when the advantageous state is controlled in response to the variable display of the second identification information, and the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after the special condition is established is the same when the special condition is established in response to the variable display of the first identification information and when the special condition is established in response to the variable display of the second identification information. With such a configuration, while different gameplay characteristics are exhibited in the case of performing the variable display of the first identification information and the case of performing the variable display of the second identification information, the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is the same regardless of which setting value is set, so that an appropriate degree of relief can be achieved while suppressing an increase in gambling.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 5g to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, the ratios controlled for normal jackpots and special jackpots are made different when a jackpot occurs due to the first special symbol and when a jackpot occurs due to the second special symbol, and the advantage of the rescue time reduction is the same when the rescue time reduction is controlled based on the first special symbol and when the rescue time reduction is controlled based on the second special symbol.

(Means 6g) Any of means 1g to 5g includes a variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern, and the variable display pattern determination means has a higher probability of determining the shortened variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in a special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied than in a special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. Such a configuration can suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 6g is based on a configuration that uses, for example, the fluctuation pattern table E of FIG. 14-8 (E).

(Means 7g) Any of means 1g to 6g includes a variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern corresponding to the execution of a reach effect, and the variable display pattern determination means has a lower rate of determining a specific variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in a special state controlled when a special condition is met than in a special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. Such a configuration can suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 7g is based on a configuration that uses, for example, the fluctuation pattern table E of FIG. 14-8 (E).

(Means 8g) In any of means 1g to 7g, the update means can update specific numerical information different from the numerical information based on execution of a variable display in a special state, the state control means can control to a special state by setting special information and can end the special state by canceling the setting of the special information, and the special state is ended based on the specific numerical information becoming a predetermined value corresponding to a predetermined number of times in the special state, backup storage means can hold the numerical information and specific numerical information updated by the update means and the setting information of the special information even if the power supply is stopped, and initialization means can initialize the storage contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is met, and the initialization means initializes the setting information of the special information and the specific numerical information when the predetermined condition is met, and does not initialize the numerical information. With such a configuration, the degree of salvation of the player can be increased even when the predetermined condition is met.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 8g may be configured, for example, to initialize the time-saving flags A to C and the value of the time-saving count counter in the initialization process shown in FIG. 14-11, but not to initialize the value of the rescue time-saving count counter.

(Means 1h) A gaming machine that executes the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state based on the derived display of a specific display result, includes a state control means that can control to a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, and the state control means can control to the special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed, and the update means further includes a suggestive performance execution means that updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and can execute a suggestive performance related to the establishment of the special condition, and the suggestive performance execution means has a ratio of which of a plurality of performance modes is used to execute the suggestive performance depending on the number of times the variable display is executed, and the performance mode of the suggestive performance is a mode that suggests the period until the special condition is established. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase interest by drawing attention to the performance mode of the suggestive performance, and to promote operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 1h to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, it is sufficient to configure it so that the ratio of whether or not to execute a countdown effect that indicates the number of fluctuations that is the condition for controlling the rescue time reduction is changed according to the count value of the rescue time reduction counter. Also, the gaming machine of means 1h can be realized by a configuration that determines whether or not to execute a caption display while waiting for customers and the presentation mode, using, for example, the table shown in FIG. 14-25.

(Means 2h) In means 1h, the presentation mode of the suggestive presentation is a mode in which the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is met can be specified. With such a configuration, the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is met can be clearly notified to the player.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 2h is based on, for example, executing a countdown presentation that indicates the number of fluctuations that will be the condition for controlling the rescue time reduction.

(Means 3h) In means 1h or 2h, the suggestive effect is an effect of displaying a specific image, and the specific image is displayed in a number of different forms that differ in at least one of color and size, and the period until the suggested special condition is met differs depending on the form in which the specific image is displayed. With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to the form of the specific image.

In this characteristic section 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 3h is based on a configuration in which, for example, the table shown in FIG. 14-25 is used to determine whether or not to display subtitles while waiting for customers and the presentation mode. In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 3h, for example, the color and size of the countdown numbers in the countdown presentation image may be configured to differ depending on the count value of the rescue time-saving counter.

(Means 4h) Any of means 1h to 3h includes a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the satisfaction of the start condition, a reserved storage means capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a predetermined image display means capable of displaying a predetermined image when the variable display is not being executed and no reserved memory is stored in the reserved storage means, and the suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing a suggestive performance when the predetermined image is displayed, and the rate at which suggestive performance is executed when the predetermined image is displayed varies depending on the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase interest by drawing attention to whether or not a suggestive performance is executed, and to promote operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 4h is configured to determine whether or not to display subtitles while waiting for customers, for example, using the table shown in FIG. 14-25.

(Means 5h) Any of means 1h to 4h includes a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the satisfaction of the start condition, a reserved memory means capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a predetermined image display means capable of displaying a predetermined image when the variable display is not being executed and no reserved memory is stored in the reserved memory means, and the suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing a suggestive performance when the predetermined image is displayed, and the rate at which suggestive performance is executed in a predetermined manner when the predetermined image is displayed varies depending on the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase interest by drawing attention to the presence or absence of a suggested performance manner and to promote operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 5h is based on a configuration in which the presentation mode of the caption display while waiting for customers is determined using, for example, the table shown in FIG. 14-25.

(Means 6h) Any of means 1h to 5h includes a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of a start condition and the satisfaction of a start condition, a reserved storage means capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a predetermined image display means capable of displaying a predetermined image when the variable display is not being executed and no reserved memory is stored in the reserved storage means, and the suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing a suggestive performance based on at least one of detecting that the operating means has been operated and that the gaming medium has passed through a predetermined area when the predetermined image is displayed. With such a configuration, a suggestive performance can be performed for a player who actually plays a game, and the operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 6h to this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, for example, when the demo state is entered, if a gaming ball is detected by operating the ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 or at the start hole, a caption indicating the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is executed is displayed.

(Means 7h) Any of means 1h to 6h includes a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the suggestive performance execution means has a different rate of executing suggestive performance depending on which setting value is set. With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to the presence or absence of execution of the suggestive performance, and operation of the gaming machine can be promoted by suggesting the setting value.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the means 7h is configured to use the table shown in FIG. 14-25 to determine whether or not to display subtitles while passengers are waiting.

(Means 8h) Any of means 1h to 7h includes a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the suggestive performance execution means has a different rate of executing a suggestive performance in a specific manner depending on which setting value is set. With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to the manner of the suggestive performance, and operation of the gaming machine can be promoted by suggesting a setting value.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the means 8h is configured to use the table shown in FIG. 14-25 to determine whether or not to display subtitles while waiting for customers and the presentation mode.

(Means 9h) Any of means 1h to 6h includes a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and a setting suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set setting value, the setting suggestion effect execution means has a different rate of executing a setting suggestion effect depending on which setting value is set, and the suggestion effect execution means has a common rate of executing a suggestion effect regardless of which setting value is set. With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to whether or not a suggestion effect is executed, and the complexity of control can be suppressed.

To apply the gaming machine of means 9h to this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, for example, it is possible to set one of a number of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities), and to execute a setting confirmation process or setting change process when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, making it possible to confirm the current setting value or change the setting value. For example, it is possible to change the setting to six levels from "1" to "6". Then, while it is possible to execute a performance that suggests the setting value (for example, a performance in which the execution rate differs depending on the setting value), it is possible to configure it so that the execution rate of the caption display during waiting for customers is the same regardless of which setting value is set.

(Means 10h) In any of means 1h to 6h and means 9h, a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and a setting suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set setting value, the setting suggestion effect execution means has a different rate of executing a setting suggestion effect in a specific manner depending on which setting value is set, and the suggestion effect execution means has a common rate of executing a suggestion effect in a specific manner regardless of which setting value is set. With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to the aspect of the suggestion effect, and the complexity of control can be suppressed.

To apply the gaming machine of means 10h to this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, for example, it is possible to set one of a number of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities), and to execute a setting confirmation process or setting change process when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, making it possible to confirm the current setting value or change the setting value. For example, it is possible to change the setting to six levels from "1" to "6". Then, while it is possible to execute a performance that suggests the setting value (for example, a performance with a different execution rate depending on the setting value), it is possible to configure it so that the execution rate of the caption display during customer waiting in the red performance mode is the same regardless of which setting value is set.

(Means 11h) In any of means 1h to 10h, the suggestive performance execution means executes suggestive performances at a different rate in a specific period after the start of power supply depending on whether an initialization process is executed when power supply is started or whether a recovery process is executed. With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to whether or not a suggestive performance is executed, and operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 11c to this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, for example, it is sufficient to configure the machine so that the rate at which the captions and countdown effects are displayed while customers are waiting differs between after the initialization process and after the power outage is restored.

(Means 12h) Any of means 1h to 11h includes a variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern, and the variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a special variable display pattern when a special condition is met, and further includes a specific notification effect execution means for executing a specific notification effect that notifies the player that the game will be controlled to a special state when a special condition is met and a variable display based on the special variable display pattern is being executed without determining a special variable display pattern before the special condition is met. With such a configuration, the player can be notified that the game will be controlled to a special state when a special condition is met, and the player can be clearly notified of the change in the game state, thereby increasing the interest when the special condition is met.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 12h is based on a configuration that uses, for example, the pattern table for the rescue time-saving variation miss shown in Figure 14-8 (I).

(Means 13h) Any of means 1h to 12h includes a variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern, and the variable display pattern determination means can determine a specific variable display pattern in both cases where the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and where the display result of the variable display is not the specific display result, the rate of determining the specific variable display pattern is higher than the predetermined variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display is the specific display result, and the rate of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower in a predetermined period before a special condition is established than in a period before the predetermined period when the display result of the variable display is not the specific display result. Such a configuration can suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 13h is based on a configuration that uses the fluctuation pattern table shown in Figures 14-8 (F) and (G), for example.

(Means 14h) Any of means 1h to 13h includes a preview performance execution means capable of executing a preview performance that notifies the user that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, and the preview performance execution means is capable of executing a preview performance in both cases where the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and where it is not the specific display result, and the preview performance is executed more frequently when the display result of the variable display is the specific display result than when it is not the specific display result, and the preview performance is executed less frequently in a specified period before a special condition is established than in a period prior to the specified period when the display result of the variable display is not the specific display result. Such a configuration can suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 14h is configured to determine whether or not to execute a preview performance using, for example, the table shown in FIG. 14-32.

(Means 15h) Any of means 1h to 14h includes a preview performance execution means capable of executing a preview performance that notifies the user that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, and the preview performance execution means is capable of executing a preview performance in a specific manner and a predetermined manner in both cases where the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and where the display result of the variable display is not the specific display result, the preview performance is executed more frequently in the specific manner than in the predetermined manner when the display result of the variable display is the specific display result, and the preview performance is executed more frequently in the specific manner in the predetermined period before the special condition is established than in the period before the predetermined period when the display result of the variable display is not the specific display result. Such a configuration can suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine of means 15h is based on a configuration in which, for example, the table shown in FIG. 14-32 is used to determine whether or not to execute a preview performance and the performance mode.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 11 ... Main board 12 ... Performance control board

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
a variable winning means capable of changing between a first state in which the game medium can easily win a prize and a second state in which the game medium cannot or cannot hardly win a prize;
and a control means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed to the first state,
The display means includes:
A background display corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed,
A display of an amount of the game value to be awarded can be displayed on the front side of the background display,
a first notification display that is displayed when the amount of the game value awarded reaches a first predetermined amount, and a second notification display that is displayed when the amount of the game value awarded reaches a second predetermined amount, on the front side of the background display;
The notification display is a display that ends after a specific period of time has elapsed since the display was started,
The character display included in the notification display is larger in display size than the character display included in the provided amount display,
The character display included in the provision amount display and the notification display includes a specific character display in which a specific area is formed surrounded by lines forming the character display,
The display position of the specific character display included in the indication of the amount of the imparted item is not changed during display,
The display position of the specific character display included in the notification display is changed during display,
the background display is not visible from the specific region of the specific character display included in the imparting amount display,
When a display position of a specific character display included in the notification display is changed, the background display is visible from the specific area of the specific character display,
The display means includes:
When the round of play is being played, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the variable winning means changed from the second state to the first state;
If the gaming medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been awarded can be displayed at the start of the display of the awarded amount,
When the game medium wins the variable prize winning means within the predetermined period, a special display different from the predetermined display can be displayed at the start of the display of the amount of the award;
not displaying a round game display capable of identifying the started round game until the predetermined period has elapsed, and starting to display the round game display together with the start of the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the notification display is displayed while the award amount display is displayed.

Images